Charles Josselyn 
 
fijistorg emir flower of Jttino 
 
 BY 
 RICHARD INGALESE 
 
 Fourth Edition 
 
 THE OCCULT BOOK CONCERN 
 
 Publishers 
 
 9 to 15 Murray Street 
 New York City 
 

 COPYRIGHT, 1902 
 BY RICHARD INGALESE 
 
 COPYRIGHT, 1903 
 
 BY RICHARD INGALESE 
 
 COPYRIGHT, 1905 
 BY RICHARD INGALESE 
 
 JOHN B. WATKINS COMPANY 
 
 PRINTERS 
 NEW YORK CITY 
 
DEDICATED TO 
 MY WIFE 
 
 WHO WAS MY INSPIRATION AND CO-WORKER IN THE 
 
 PREPARATION, DELIVERY AND COMPILATION 
 
 OF THESE LECTURES. 
 
 615739 
 
"Unto you it is given to know the mysteries 
 of the kingdom of God : but to others in par- 
 ables ; that seeing- they might not see, and hear- 
 ing they might not understand." 
 
PREFACE. 
 
 r PHIS BOOK is made up from personal notes and 
 JL stenographic reports of lectures delivered in New 
 York City during the seasons of 1900-1901-1902, with 
 the addition of some new matter in the form of ampli- 
 fications. The compilation is made at the request of my 
 students and is published primarily for their benefit. 
 The material is left in the form in which it was deliv- 
 ered, and the photograph of the author is inserted, also 
 at their request. 
 
 The book may not appeal to the orthodox religionist 
 nor to the materialist ; but may prove interesting, if not 
 enlightening, to the agnostic and to the investigator of 
 either psychic phenomena, or the phenomena of mental 
 therapeutics. 
 
 The modern teachings of the Science of Mind have 
 not appealed to many thinkers because of the vagueness 
 of thought and expression of the majority of those who 
 attempt to present it ; and also because of the lack of a 
 working hypothesis needed to explain the law under 
 which both psychic and mental phenomena occur. This 
 book is an attempt toward supplying the latter defi- 
 ciency by stating laws under which Mind evolves and 
 operates. 
 
 The author does not claim any original research or 
 discoveries along these lines, having had the matter 
 
herein contained given to him in the course of his 
 study, under trained minds who had verified these facts 
 for themselves and who required him to do the same. 
 
 The Occult forces of nature and their modes of 
 manifestation have been known for ages to certain 
 secret orders which have not deemed it wise heretofore 
 to give their knowledge to the world. This age, how- 
 ever, seems, in their judgment, propitious for the 
 wider spread of such knowledge both because many in- 
 dependent investigators are discovering for themselves 
 something about these forces and, in their ignorance, 
 are perverting the use of them as witness hypnotism 
 and because the advanced men of the race have 
 reached a point where they are desirous of this knowl- 
 edge, and every mental demand brings its supply. 
 
 "THE HISTORY AND POWER OF MIND/' was selected 
 for a title because the history of mind is the history of 
 man; and these lectures first trace mind, or psychic 
 man's, origin and development, and then describe the 
 power of mind and its modes of manifestation. 
 
 It may not be amiss to state in conclusion that the 
 book is not written for the purpose of propagandism. 
 Something of the operation of Nature's Laws is de- 
 scribed in these lectures, and the acceptance or rejection 
 of the statements made will not change the Laws nor 
 affect the author. R. I. 
 
 New York City, October ist, 1902. 
 
CONTENTS 
 
 CHAPTER PAGE 
 
 Preface 
 
 I Occultism : Its Past, Present and Future 1 1 
 
 II Divine Mind : Its Nature and Manifestation 31 
 
 III Dual Mind and Its Origin . . 52 
 
 IV The Art of Self-Control . . .78 
 
 V The Law of Re-embodiment . . 100 
 
 VI Colors of Thought Vibration . .120 
 
 VII Meditation, Creation and Concentration 144 
 
 VIII Lesser Occult or Psychic Forces and their 
 
 Dangers . . . .168 
 
 IX Hypnotism and How to Guard Against It 189 
 
 X Higher Occult or Spiritual Forces and their 
 
 Uses .... 219 
 
 XI The Cause and Cure of Disease . . 239 
 
 XII The Law of Opulence . . .259 
 
THE HISTORY AND POWER OF MIND. 
 
 LECTURE ONE. 
 
 OCCULTISM, ITS PAST, PRESENT AND 
 FUTURE. 
 
 To many persons the subjects discussed in these 
 lectures may appear preposterous, and therefore 
 those of you who have not studied along metaphysi- 
 cal lines are requested to hold yourselves agnosti- 
 cally until this entire course shall be finished. You 
 do not know whether Occultism is true or not ; you 
 are now ready to examine the subject and, after 
 having heard the entire exposition, you will be in a 
 position to judge whether it offers a logical, working 
 hypothesis, and whether it is worthy to receive more 
 of your time and consideration. If it is true it can 
 be demonstrated, for truth is always demonstrable. 
 You can prove by demonstration each of the funda- 
 mental statements that will be made, as you can 
 prove a proposition in mathematics. When I say 
 truth is demonstrable, do not understand me to mean 
 that it is capable of being demonstrated imme- 
 diately upon hearing it. Everything must unfold. 
 You cannot raise your body on a horizontal bar the 
 first time you try because your muscles are not 
 strong enough ; but after your muscles have become 
 strengthened by practice you may be capable of 
 raising your body to any position you desire. So it 
 is with a person who has never used his mind in 
 
12 The History and Power of Mind. 
 
 scientific reasoning or in concentration. He should 
 not flatter himself that he can immediately accom- 
 plish what a person who has practiced for many 
 years can do. If you use your mind along the lines 
 indicated in these lectures you will find that there 
 will be a continuous growth for you, and that the 
 time will come when you can do anything that you 
 desire. A very large promise, you may say, but if it 
 is true I assure you it is demonstrable. 
 
 Our first subject is "Occultism, Its Past, Present 
 and Future." This is an introductory lecture, giving 
 something of the history of Occultism and of the 
 Occultists in order that we may know the source 
 from which our information is derived. 
 
 The Century Dictionary gives the definition of 
 Occultism as: "The doctrine, practice or rites of 
 things occult or mysterious ; the Occult Sciences or 
 their study ; mysticism ; esotericism." In the middle 
 ages Occult Science or Occultism embraced pri- 
 marily what is now known as the physical sciences. 
 It was understood to mean those things which were 
 unknown, but which by experimentation might 
 become known. Chemistry, as a branch of Alchemy, 
 was regarded as one of the Occult Sciences because 
 it was largely unknown, but through investigation 
 and experimentation it constantly became better 
 known. But Occultism also had a secondary mean- 
 ing which was coupled with the first, namely, mysti- 
 cism, esotericism. In ancient days people thought 
 it not unwise to attempt the discovery of the un- 
 known through experimentation with the subjec- 
 
Occultism, Its Past, Present and Future. 13 
 
 tive as well as the objective side of nature, and the 
 two meanings, that which pertained to the objective, 
 which was unknown but could be ascertained, and 
 that which pertained to the subjective, which was 
 unknown but could be ascertained, were both in- 
 cluded in the term Occultism. 
 
 Materialism as it grew in strength called the 
 unknown (which was becoming known on the 
 objective or visible side of life) "Science," but 
 stamped the belief in or the investigation of the 
 subjective side of life as "superstition." And most 
 people became very much afraid of that word, and 
 became afraid of being known as superstitious even 
 more than to be known as ignorant; and such per- 
 sons preferred to remain ignorant of the Occult. In 
 time the word Occultism grew to mean that which 
 pertained to the subjective that which pertained to 
 esotericism, and at present it is defined as esoteric- 
 ism. 
 
 As you go back in history you will find that 
 esotericism has everywhere played a large part in 
 moulding the thoughts of men. There were always 
 the esoteric and the exoteric religions and sciences. 
 There always has been and there will be for ages 
 yet to come one religion for the masses and 
 another for the students. There have been for a 
 long time, and for some time yet to come there will 
 be two sciences one for the materialist, diluted for 
 the masses, and another for the students of Occult- 
 ism. You will find traces of this duality in any 
 religion at any period in history. The Nazarene, the 
 
14 The History and Power of Mind. 
 
 inspired leader of the Christians, after having taught 
 the multitude in parables and having withdrawn to 
 one side, was questioned by his disciples: "Why 
 speakest thou to them in parables?" He answered: 
 "Because it is given unto you to know the mysteries 
 of the kingdom of heaven, but to them it is not 
 given." And afterwards he unfolded to his disciples 
 the esoteric side of his teachings, thus giving them 
 truths that were not for the masses. And in all 
 religions, whether it be the Egyptian, Buddhism, or 
 that precursor of the Christian religion Judaism, 
 there are truths which are revealed only to the 
 student. In Judaism there was the Jehovic teach- 
 ing for the masses, the Cabalistic for the most 
 secret students, and between these two was a third, 
 the Talmudic, which partook of the nature of both. 
 So the truth reached all grades of society according 
 to the comprehension of each a plan that was 
 adopted later by the Church of Rome with very 
 great success. 
 
 Of course many religionists, especially those call- 
 ing themselves Christians, will deny that there is 
 any esotericism in their faith. But those who are 
 acquainted with the history of the early Christian 
 Church and the writings of the Fathers, and those 
 who are familiar with the philosophy of The Logos, 
 and the mysticism of Paul as shown in his Epistles, 
 will never attempt to deny it to the educated. 
 
 But however violent the denial of esotericism may 
 be by the religionist, it will not exceed in violence 
 the denial of the term "science" to anything per- 
 
Occultism, Its Past, Present and Future. 15 
 
 taining to the occult by the majority of the modern 
 physicists; yet scorn, laughter or denial will not 
 blot from the pages of either sacred or profane his- 
 tory the fact that Magic was and is practiced among 
 all people. The existence of magic necessitates the 
 knowledge of certain laws and forces which are as 
 yet unknown to the materialist, though modern 
 science, having gone almost to the limit of the 
 visible, is now beginning to knock at the door of the 
 Occult Sciences and to pry into the invisible. It is 
 already studying the ether, ions, electrical invisibles, 
 atoms and radiant matter. It is only a few weeks 
 since Flammarion, in one of his articles, said that he 
 was a student of Occultism, and that henceforth all 
 progressive men of science would have to study 
 along that line. 
 
 According to the teachings of esotericism Occult- 
 ism is the science of Divine Unfoldment. The 
 student of Occultism regards Deity as the All ; and 
 is taught that there is not nor cannot be any mani- 
 festation outside of Deity. Whether we look at a 
 blade of grass, or a drop of water, or upon our 
 planet with its teeming myriads of men and animals, 
 or look away into space at system after system of 
 worlds, all is Deity in various states of manifesta- 
 tion. The Occultist is primarily an evolutionist and 
 says that all evolution is carried on during vast 
 periods of time, which he calls Cosmic Days; that 
 Deity idealizes a picture of what It will accomplish 
 during a Cosmic Day, and then the whole impulse of 
 evolution which is Divine Energy or Impulse is 
 
1 6 The History and Power of Mind. 
 
 onward and upward, striving ever to reach that 
 idealization. 
 
 Everything in the universe is an unfoldment of 
 Deity Itself, and Occultism is the science of that 
 Unfoldment. It teaches the laws under which that 
 Unfoldment takes place, not only upon the ob- 
 jective plane of life but also upon the subjective 
 plane. The Occultist finds that where he merely 
 studies the modern sciences he is only studying the 
 sciences of effects, for there is not one of the modern 
 sciences that teaches the cause of phenomena. 
 Take the subject where modern science has perhaps 
 made as much progress as in any other line 
 embryology. We find there is a germ ; it has a form 
 of life; a method of accretion; it reaches a certain 
 point of development; then ask a scientific man 
 what it is going to be, a fish, a bird, a reptile or a 
 man, and he cannot answer. Up to this pc'nt the 
 formation of a germ of each kind is identical w^ch the 
 others. But after this point has been reached there 
 is new accretion, a new form is assumed, and the 
 germ may become a bird, a fish, a reptile or a man ; 
 but the form that it takes was indelibly stamped 
 upon it from the beginning. How was it stamped? 
 What determines the diverging point, what deter- 
 mines the form of consciousness, the form of ex- 
 pression ? In the science of embryology there is no 
 satisfactory answer to be had because here, as you 
 see, is the study of effects. The cause is not looked 
 for, is not found. 
 
 The student of Occultism says I want to know 
 
Occultism, Its Past, Present and Future. 17 
 
 when the ideal which determined all its future 
 growth was stamped upon that germ. I want to 
 know why, when it reached that point, it became a 
 man instead of a bird ; why it drew to itself certain 
 elements and threw off others. I want to know the 
 laws that govern the subjective side of life ; I want 
 the veil to be torn away, that I may see the cause 
 of form, and not only its effects. This is why he 
 attempts to study first upon the objective side of 
 life and then upon the subjective, or to study them 
 contemporaneously. 
 
 As materialistic as was the Nineteenth Century, 
 we find that a few men once more began to turn 
 their thoughts toward the realm of the unknown 
 and unseen in order to discover, if possible, the 
 "why" of existence. And certain scientific men 
 thought it not unreasonable nor undignified to in- 
 vestigate the Occult or to organize The Society for 
 Psychical Research for the purpose of investigating 
 these occult subjects. We have seen the great cult of 
 Spiritualism spreading through the world and have 
 witnessed the revival of Palmistry and of Astrology 
 and other quasi Occult Sciences. Then following 
 these, the crowning effort of all, we find that a great 
 psychic wave swept over the world and man began 
 to realize that he was Mind and as such was neither 
 bound by time nor by space, but could send his 
 thoughts in any given direction and could communi- 
 cate without words with distant minds; and that 
 mind could compel matter to obey it. With the 
 awakening of the world the Occult Sciences have 
 
1 8 The History and Power of Mind. 
 
 again challenged the attention of the most progress- 
 ive men of the race. 
 
 But man grows tired of externals and life after 
 life as he evolves he studies deeper and deeper into 
 Nature's laws. We do not always accomplish the 
 same amount of study in each life because we think 
 we have not the time for study. We believe we 
 have so much else to do that is of much more im- 
 portance to us. Then there is the external world 
 with its duties and pleasures and our attention is so 
 deeply engaged with these things that we have no 
 time left for more serious subjects. But in each life 
 we take up as much of the study of these sciences 
 as we have the time and inclination for, and gradu- 
 ally after many ages have passed we become earnest 
 and devoted students. 
 
 A knowledge of Occult Law may be gained in 
 two ways, by original research and by teachers. 
 There are courageous souls who choose to progress 
 along the lines of personal experimentation instead 
 of taking the easier and perhaps the better way of 
 gaining a knowledge of its principles through the 
 aid of teachers. These strong souls often make ter- 
 rible mistakes and unnecessary sacrifices, for, after 
 leaving the objective plane, they come upon the hid- 
 den or subjective side where there are forces and 
 agencies that turn to naught man's thought and 
 efforts unless both be properly directed. But even 
 when knowledge has been gained through teachers it 
 does not put an end to experimentation ; because the 
 teacher explains the law and leaves the pupil 
 
Occultism, Its Past, Present and Future. 19 
 
 to make his own verification after having been 
 taught how it should be done. The knowledge 
 comes, however, as all real knowledge must, by ex- 
 perimentation and by experience. 
 
 Who are the teachers? They may be grouped 
 into three great classes, Masters, Adepts and Stu- 
 dents. The Masters of Occultism are those who, in 
 a prior period of Cosmic evolution, passed upward 
 through the human stage until they reached the 
 Divine, and became Gods. When a new Cosmic 
 Day commences, and new planets are formed, and 
 men are brought into existence for the purpose of 
 unfolding more and more of the Deity within them- 
 selves and enlarging their consciousness as individ- 
 ualized parts of nature, the Masters are they who 
 lead and teach the evolving race. The Adepts are 
 those advanced men of our race who are students of 
 the Masters, while at the same time they are teachers 
 of their less developed brothers. They are men who 
 have perfected themselves along certain lines, but 
 have not reached perfection along all lines. The 
 Students are they who are studying under these 
 Adepts; they are persons who desire to know the 
 truth, and have devoted themselves to the study 
 of these particular sciences. They hold the same re- 
 lation to the Adepts as the Adepts hold to the Mas- 
 ters. 
 
 There are different grades of Masters because 
 they who finished their evolution upon their system 
 of worlds earlier in the great Cosmic Day are 
 stronger than they who finished later. And so there 
 
20 The History and Power of Mind. 
 
 are grades of Adepts and of Students. We find that 
 there are everywhere grades of intelligence. In 
 other words, that which Huxley speaks of as a scien- 
 tific necessity is true, and there are intelligences 
 in this Universe as superior to man as man is supe- 
 rior to a black beetle. Take, for instance, a Patago- 
 nian or an Australian bushman, and contrast him 
 with an Emerson. What a vast gulf separates these 
 two intelligences ! Yet both are proceeding upward 
 in their evolutionary career; the one, of course, be- 
 ing in advance of the other. 
 
 And it does not require much scientific imagina- 
 tion to conceive that there is an infinite gradation 
 of intelligence because we see such a diversity 
 everywhere. Then it is only logical to suppose that 
 what is true upon the lower plane of our daily expe- 
 rience is also true throughout nature. 
 
 The Masters and Adepts are the custodians of the 
 Occult Sciences, which are perfected sciences it is 
 claimed, because they cover all departments of na- 
 ture, both physical and metaphysical, the objective 
 and the subjective. 
 
 Now, all the facts and principles of these sciences 
 must be verified by each person as he progresses 
 along his evolutionary path. I may tell you some- 
 thing that may seem absurd to you ; or you may say 
 "that sounds reasonable," and therefore you believe 
 it. I may tell you something else, and you say "I 
 believe that is true because both the intuitive and 
 rational portions of my nature endorse it." But you 
 do not know whether it is true or not. In the first 
 
Occultism, Its Past, Present and Future. 21 
 
 case you have a disbelief, in the next two cases a 
 belief; but before you have a knowledge, you must 
 verify the truth of my assertion. And so it is that 
 every student of Occultism must verify each state- 
 ment of his teacher in order that he may make it a 
 part of his own being that he may know that it 
 is true; otherwise it would be only a belief, and 
 beliefs do not amount to much, because there are 
 almost as many beliefs and theories as there are 
 individuals. 
 
 In this Cosmic Day Occultism commenced 
 when the Masters came upon this planet to teach 
 mankind. The evolution on this planet is divided 
 into a certain number of periods, and we are at the 
 present time in what the Occultists know as the fifth 
 period. In the first and second periods very little 
 was accomplished by man. He was, at it were, in a 
 new world with new sensations and new experiences, 
 and his life was entirely objective, and largely ani- 
 mal. His theater of activity was that continent 
 known to tradition as "The Land of the Gods," 
 "Mount Muni," The Imperishable Isles," or what 
 we would prosaically call the "Continent of the 
 North Pole." 
 
 During the third period of evolution, man lived 
 upon the continent known as Lemuria. A con- 
 tinent lying in the Pacific Ocean, Arabian Sea 
 and Indian Ocean. Its Northern portion was much 
 in the present location of Australia, the Philippines, 
 and the Islands of the Southern Pacific ; all of which 
 constitute the remnants of that continent now 
 
22 The History and Power of Mind. 
 
 sunken beneath the Seas. That periods occur in 
 which there is a sinking of certain continents, and 
 a rising of others, is as well known to Physicists 
 as to Occultists. In Lemuria man passed from his 
 lowest state of animal existence into what we may 
 call a more rational or human state. His develop- 
 ment during this time is substantially shown in the 
 history of primitive man. Some of the egos, out- 
 stripping the others, succeeded in reaching adept- 
 ship along certain lines, but the great mass of the 
 people lived sensuous and sensual lives. There was 
 very little spirituality manifested by the race dur- 
 ing this period, and the perversion of natural laws 
 and forces became marked toward its close. 
 
 The most notable event which occurred on that 
 continent, immediately prior to the cataclysm which 
 swept it beneath the waters, was the establishment 
 of colonies in India. The colonists consisted of Mas- 
 ters, the Adepts and the cream of the race. It was 
 these colonists who built the rock temples of 
 Elephanta and the other great temples of India 
 those temples in which mysticism seems to have 
 had its earlier home; and where, upon their walls, 
 are painted the strange old symbols, in colors, that 
 indicate the history and the growth of man. 
 
 Those were the souls who gave to India its riches 
 in literature and philosophy, and established the 
 mighty empires which even tradition has forgotten. 
 But it was the degenerate descendants of these col- 
 onists who spread Northward and Westward, and 
 populated first Asia, and later, Europe. 
 
Occultism, Its Past, Present and Future. 23 
 
 After the continent of Lemuria had passed away, 
 then came the fourth period, with man's field of ac- 
 tivity in Atlantis. Atlantis extended from the West 
 Indies to the coast of Central and Northern Africa, 
 as we know from the investigations of the British 
 Government, which spent many years, and large 
 sums of money, in determining the extent of the 
 sunken continent; and it was here that civilization 
 proceeded with tremendous strides. All the ac- 
 cumulated knowledge of the other periods was 
 stored in the minds of those who had been the Le- 
 murians, and were then incarnating as Atlanteans. 
 As they acquired greater and greater knowledge, 
 they not only reached a point in mechanical devel- 
 opment far beyond anything that we have reached 
 at the present day, but they also took up the study 
 of Occultism, which became common among the 
 people. 
 
 By that time the great Masters had retired from 
 physical contact with men, and the , Adepts had 
 taken their places as direct teachers of the people. 
 They moved among men, and were the kings and 
 rulers, the law-givers and inventors ; in fact, they 
 were the inspirers of the race up to the time it 
 reached its highest point of development in that 
 period. 
 
 Then the continent became divided into five great 
 kingdoms, and in each of these there were lodges 
 of Adepts. At the height of Atlantis' glory, once 
 more the people turned to sensual abandonment, 
 and the Adepts withdrew into Retreats with their 
 
 
24 The History and Power of Mind. 
 
 pupils, for the people refused to listen to them, or 
 to be aided by them any longer. In the course of 
 time, materialism swept over that continent, as it 
 has swept over Europe and America; and Occult- 
 ism was forgotten by the masses, and remembered 
 only by the few; and then, gradually, that which 
 was pure Occultism became perverted, and men be- 
 gan to use their powers criminally. Those who re- 
 membered or practiced Occultism, put into opera- 
 tion mental and certain other forces which enslaved 
 all those who had forgotten how to use their own 
 forces, or who were not developed to the same point 
 as themselves. And thus Atlantis became a conti- 
 nent where a few immensely wealthy, powerful and 
 strong egos ruled the majority of the people, and 
 made them their slaves. 
 
 But the misuse of Occult forces brought its 
 re-action, as it always does, and, as Plato tells us, 
 Atlantis suddenly became submerged. You remem- 
 ber that when he went to Egypt he was informed 
 that the last remnants of Atlantis had disappeared 
 about five thousand years prior to his visit ; and also 
 that the priests had records of the old continent, 
 as well as of their own country, which extended 
 back thousands of years. These records were kept 
 by the Occultists who were priests in the time of 
 Plato, and are still kept in triplicate ; one copy has 
 been placed in each of the three great repositories 
 situated on separate continents. 
 
 Before Atlantis went down those of the inhabi- 
 tants who had preserved their purity and who were 
 
Occultism, Its Past, Present and Future. 25 
 
 trying to lead upright lives, were taken by the 
 Adepts out of the country. Those living in the 
 Western Empires were colonized in Central and 
 South America. In Central America that rare civ- 
 ilization which preceded our own was founded, and 
 was the duplicate in every respect of the one for- 
 merly established in India. The degenerate de- 
 scendants from the Central American civilization 
 emigrated to North and South America and popu- 
 lated them. The degeneracy of these aboriginal 
 Americans was due to the fact that at this time in 
 that Fourth Period the undeveloped souls of the At- 
 lanteans were incarnating in those bodies ; for it was 
 with the Atlanteans as it had been with the Le- 
 murians, the strongest souls came first and became 
 the pioneers. They bore the heaviest burdens and 
 thus prepared the way for the less developed souls 
 who had not the strength to do the work that their 
 elder brothers had done. And it should not be 
 forgotten that the history of the Lemurians and the 
 Atlanteans is but the history of ourselves. Our 
 strongest and bravest souls came forward to start 
 the Fifth Period onward in its evolution, as even a 
 cursory reading of general history will disclose, and 
 they have reappeared from time to time to manifest 
 their energies in the several lines of human achieve- 
 ment, in order to teach, help and direct the course of 
 events. 
 
 From the Eastern Empires of Atlantis the ad- 
 vanced souls went into Africa and laid the founda- 
 tion of what is known now as the Egyptian Empire. 
 
26 The History and Power of Mind. 
 
 And this brings us to the Fifth Period, in which 
 Occultism was again taught popularly and openly 
 among the people. A study of Egyptian history re- 
 veals that during its entire period there were Occult- 
 ists Magicians they were called who could pro- 
 duce great phenomena. They were teachers of the 
 people and were the priests and law-givers; they 
 were the friends of kings and were consulted when- 
 ever there was sickness or national calamity. These 
 teachers were the Adepts who came in contact with 
 the people. 
 
 In the Fifth Period, which is the present one, the 
 descendants of the colony which remained in India, 
 having reached the height of its prosperity and de- 
 velopment, passed Westward and founded the As- 
 syrian and Babylonian Empires. There again the 
 Adepts moved among men. In both sacred and pro- 
 fane history of those times we find that the Magi 
 were able to cure all manner of diseases and to 
 manipulate the laws of nature. Passing upward 
 from Babylon and Syria to the Mediterranean on the 
 one side and through Egypt to the Mediterranean 
 on the other, we find that the great remnants of the 
 Third and Fourth Periods were merged and blended 
 in the Fifth Period in the Phoenician, the Grecian, 
 the Carthaginian and the Roman peoples. 
 
 This is not a statement of occult history in full; 
 but is merely the barest outline in order to show 
 you how Occultism has been presented in the past, 
 and how it has been preserved for us. 
 
 At the beginning of this Fifth Period we had a 
 
Occultism, Its Past, Present and Future. 27 
 
 new burst of occult knowledge and force, because 
 all the knowledge acquired in the preceding periods 
 by the egos had been brought over in these later in- 
 carnations, and in the early history of each of the 
 Nations mentioned Occultism was taught to the peo- 
 ple once more. The Adepts were friends of the peo- 
 ple and were freely consulted by them. But gradu- 
 ally as materialism advanced and sensuality became 
 the dominant trait of each of these peoples, the 
 Adepts withdrew again from personal contact with 
 the world as the great Masters had withdrawn in 
 previous periods of time. 
 
 In Greece materialism in its most artistic form 
 began to stamp itself upon the minds of the people, 
 who turned from spiritual teachings and caused 
 the Adepts to withdraw entirely from the 
 world. And it came to pass that all magic or 
 Occultism, for they were identical in those days, 
 was confined to what is known now as temple magic 
 and was practiced by the priests who were students 
 of the Adepts. In various Grecian temples me- 
 chanical or ceremonial magic was taught ; that is, a 
 knowledge of mental forces united with a knowledge 
 of chemistry and alchemy, by the blending of which 
 great phenomena were produced. Some record of 
 this great knowledge is preserved even in the his- 
 tories which you have. 
 
 Before Occultism in Greece passed away one final 
 attempt was made to counteract materialism, 
 and the Elusinian Mysteries were founded. In these 
 mysteries the development and evolution of the 
 
28 The History and Power of Mind. 
 
 human soul were taught in symbolic form and the 
 wisest men of that age thought it a privilege to be 
 initiated into these Mysteries. But even this proved 
 unavailing to stem the tide of materialism and there- 
 fore the priests ceased to publicly proclaim or exert 
 their occult powers. Occasionally some enthusias- 
 tic student came forward and exhibited his knowl- 
 edge of the Occult by the performance of a few 
 miracles and marvelous phenomena ; but the people 
 as a class were too materialistic to be taught any- 
 thing better or higher than their own gross beliefs 
 and soon such students had to retire from public 
 work. 
 
 Then Christianity arose, and its doctrines were 
 received by a great many who, after a brief period 
 of genuine revival of spirituality, used them for polit- 
 ical purposes. The different orders of the priest- 
 hood became the Occult Bodies within the Christian 
 Church, and up to the middle ages the priests in the 
 Church possessed all the knowledge of Occultism 
 that the world had. And the Catholic Church is now 
 the only one that has preserved a trace of this 
 ancient truth. It was during the Middle Ages that 
 the Occultists as a class withdrew from the Church 
 of Rome and formed secret bodies or societies such 
 as the Rosicrucians in various parts of the world. 
 
 At the present day almost all occult knowledge is 
 possessed and preserved by secret societies; and 
 the members of these societies or bodies only teach 
 such individuals as have reached a point in their 
 evolution which has made them capable of receiving 
 
Occultism, Its Past, Present cmd Future. 29 
 
 the higher truths. In this way portions of this 
 secret knowledge are given to the world from time to 
 time as the world becomes able to receive them. 
 
 The culmination of what is known as the Dark 
 Age, in this period of evolution, came in the nine- 
 teenth century, for at that time the world reached 
 its lowest point in materialism, and from now the 
 tendency will continue to be upward toward Spiritu- 
 ality. A few Occultists believe that the time has 
 passed when there is a necessity for guarding these 
 secrets with such jealous care, and believe that the 
 world is ready to receive more of these truths than 
 formerly. Then, too, many persons are making dis- 
 coveries along these lines and are ignorantly mis- 
 using the forces they are learning to use. So it has 
 been decided to teach the people something about 
 these forces and how they can and should be used, 
 in the hope of averting, if possible, the fate of the 
 Lemurians and Atlanteans. 
 
 Almost every day you may see in the newspapers 
 advertisements in which the offer is made to in- 
 struct people concerning personal magnetism and 
 how to use it ; how to be successful, how to become 
 popular and how to dominate other minds until 
 they become enslaved. The people are awakening 
 and are beginning to feel a great desire to know 
 about these Occult forces; and if they do not use 
 them rightly they will surely use them wrongly. 
 
 At the present time various efforts are being 
 made to give the occult teachings to such persons 
 as are fitted to receive them, but they cannot 
 
30 The History and Power of Mind. 
 
 yet be taught in full to the great mass of people; 
 but should only be given to those who desire to 
 know the truth and who wish to ally their forces 
 with that of Nature for the good of others and for 
 benefit to themselves. 
 
 Now you are not going to be taught all there is 
 about Occultism in these lectures, but only that par- 
 ticular portion which teaches what the great Uni- 
 versal Mind is; and after that what you are, what 
 your subjective and objective minds are and what 
 occult forces each of these minds reaches and con- 
 trols. Then you shall be taught how to use these 
 forces for your own upbuilding and for the hasten- 
 ing of your evolution. We shall confine ourselves 
 to mental lines, taking fragments of occult history 
 and bringing them together into a small mosaic 
 which will show you your relationship to the Uni- 
 versal Mind and how all humanity is but a mani- 
 festation of that great Mind. We shall learn how 
 to build ourselves up along spiritual, mental and 
 material lines, because this knowledge can be used 
 successfully along all three. We all want to suc- 
 ceed in life materially, and most of us want to 
 grow in knowledge and power; and it is through 
 the use of these forces that we accomplish our 
 heart's desire. The time is fast approaching when 
 man must learn to use his mental forces or fail in 
 the great evolutionary struggle fail for this entire 
 period not to take the battle up again until some 
 other Cosmic Day shall come. In the course of 
 time all men who survive will become Occultists. 
 
LECTURE TWO. 
 
 DIVINE MIND, ITS NATURE AND MANI- 
 FESTATION. 
 
 The God idea seems to be universal, although we 
 are told that in the interior of Australia a tribe 
 of men was discovered who had no conception of 
 God. In all my investigations that is the only men- 
 tion I have ever seen of a body of people who were 
 entirely without any idea of God or of what is gen- 
 erally meant by the word God. This idea concern- 
 ing Deity changes as man developes. It was the 
 late Colonel Ingersoll who had a very clever and 
 profound way of stating this thought. He said, 
 "An honest God is the noblest work of man." 
 
 This is profound because man's concept of Deity 
 corresponds with his power of idealization ; he can- 
 not create a God that is above his own ideal. And 
 while it is true that God created man in His own 
 image, according to the Scripture, it is also true that 
 undeveloped man is forever returning the compli- 
 ment by creating God in his own image. Therefore 
 when primitive man began to realize the "I am I," 
 that is to say, that he was something distinct and 
 apart from everything else, he came to the point 
 where he began to manifest the principle of self-con- 
 sciousness ; he began to think, to analyze and to wor- 
 ship. The first thing he saw which awakened a feeling 
 
 31 
 
32 The History and Power of Mind. 
 
 of fear or reverence in him was what we call Nature 
 and natural forces; and perceiving that they were 
 stronger than himself he commenced to worship 
 them as his Deity. Next he passed on to the mak- 
 ing of an image of the thing he worshiped, such as 
 the totem ; and later he worshiped the sun and moon 
 and stars. When he had learned by experience that 
 fire could destroy both his body and his possessions 
 he began to worship that too, and thus he continued 
 to live for ages alternately worshiping and pro- 
 pitiating everything which he did not understand 
 and could not control. 
 
 The idea of Deity is first found in individual wor- 
 ship. Each man has his own particular God which 
 is a true one for him, because each person has his 
 own conception of Deity. But as he becomes 
 stronger he is not satisfied to worship alone and then 
 he desires to impress his ideas upon those with 
 whom he comes in contact and we find him 
 in the second stage of his worship, which is tribal. 
 When a certain tribe of men becomes stronger nu- 
 merically than another and begins to dominate that 
 other it immediately enforces its own God idea upon 
 the conquered people as was most excellently illus- 
 trated in the primitive Grecian States. There every 
 little state had its own particular God, but as the 
 states became merged a national God idea gradually 
 took form, by the weaker states accepting the God 
 of the stronger. But sometimes the tribal or na- 
 tional God of the conquered people appealed to the 
 wants or needs of the conquerors and was adopted 
 
Divine Mind, Its Nature and Manifestation. 33 
 
 by them as when Isis became Diana of Ephesus. 
 Christianity has given us another example of this 
 adoption of another nation's God by accepting 
 Judea's God Jah-hovah and renaming him Jehovah. 
 
 Jah-hovah was nothing more than the Male-female 
 creative principle united. It was a Planetary Spirit 
 or one of the Elohim. Christianity adopted Him 
 from Judaism and improved upon the conception of 
 its votaries by making of Him a Universo-personal 
 God. Much of his supposed wrath and vengeance 
 was modified or ameliorated by attributing to Him 
 enough of the element of love to enable Him to 
 show a leniency toward such of His creatures as He 
 had elected or foreordained to be saved. 
 
 But now we have passed into a transition state 
 and man's conception of Deity is broadening from 
 the anthropomorphic to a real Universal God with- 
 out modifications or limitations. The anthropomor- 
 phic idea means God made in the image of man or 
 ascribing human attributes to God. In olden times 
 the attributes of human weaknesses and human 
 traits were ascribed to the Jehovic God. But we have 
 now arrived at the point where anthropomorphism 
 is no longer characteristic of the most progressive 
 thinkers. We are now able to conceive of a Uni- 
 versal Deity; one without human weakness, one 
 without human limitation ; and if there is one thing 
 above all others that this great mental and meta- 
 physical movement stands for it is the sweeping 
 away of the old anthropomorphic idea and the giving 
 in its place a Universal Deity. 
 
34 The History and Power of Mind. 
 
 "Divine Mind" has been selected for the term 
 to be applied to this new conception of God in order 
 to emphasize this idea of Universal Deity; in order 
 to bring out clearly first the Deific idea and secondly 
 the fact that it is consciousness for mind and con- 
 sciousness are really synonymous terms. I prefer 
 the term "Universal Consciousness," but since 
 "Divine Mind" seems to be a favorite term with the 
 Christian Scientists, the Mental Scientists, the "New 
 Thought Movement" and others, we shall use that 
 as representing the universality of Divine Con- 
 sciousness. 
 
 This consciousness being universal necessarily 
 manifests everywhere. Looking at it on the objec- 
 tive side and in the mineral kingdom we speak of 
 the cohesion of minerals. Now minerals cannot be 
 cohesive unless there is a certain amount of con- 
 sciousness to hold them together. If we examine 
 into what we call the transition states, or if we go 
 back of the mineral kingdom to the gases which 
 chemicalized to produce the minerals, we find some- 
 thing we call chemical affinity, which is a certain 
 form of consciousness. Let us take a concrete ex- 
 ample. A drop of water is, as you know, formed 
 by the combination of two gases, hydrogen and 
 oxygen in parts of two to one, H 2 O. Why should 
 those atoms form in this combination rather than in 
 any other? The amount of power required to dis- 
 rupt the forces locked up in that drop of water is 
 something tremendous. Yet you may take a drop of 
 water and put it on a piece of iron and you can watch 
 
Divine Mind, Its Nature and Manifestation. 35 
 
 the divorce as it takes place between the two ele- 
 ments. If there was no consciousness in what is 
 called chemical affinity this could not occur. The tre- 
 mendous force locked into that combination of gases 
 becomes dissipated as soon as the atoms are brought 
 into new conditions. This shows that there is con- 
 sciousness there ; were it otherwise no change would 
 have taken place. In the case of boiling water: if 
 fire and water were but inert matter acting upon 
 inert matter and no consciousness were there how 
 could those vibrations be raised and the water be 
 made to boil? But it is the conscious side of the 
 atoms composing the fire, acting upon the conscious 
 side of the atoms composing the water, which raises 
 those slower vibrations of the water and makes it 
 boil. 
 
 Passing up a step higher we come to examine the 
 vegetable kingdom. Why do pine, hemlock and 
 spruce trees grow side by side taking from the earth 
 only such particles as each needs to sustain its in- 
 dividual life ? Is there not here a conscious selection 
 of elements made by each tree? 
 
 In the animal kingdom this consciousness becomes 
 so distinctly individualized that to distinguish its 
 higher form from the lower or vegetable kingdom 
 we call it something more than consciousness we 
 call it intelligence. In man we find a still higher 
 form of consciousness than in that of the animal, 
 which we designate as Mind ; and this state of de- 
 velopment is the highest with which we are familiar. 
 Therefore when we use the term Universal Con- 
 
36 The History and Power of Mind. 
 
 sciousness or Divine Mind, we mean that which 
 comprehends, that which embodies and includes all 
 that we call consciousness individualized or other- 
 wise. We mean all that is visible or invisible known 
 or unknown. All that can be seen, touched, handled 
 or sensed ; all that can be apprehended all is God. 
 
 The Universal Mind consists of two portions 
 the manifested and the unmanifested. The mani- 
 fested portion can be apprehended by the human 
 mind, but that which is unmanifested cannot be ap- 
 prehended. There is a plus element which is always 
 above and beyond that which is manifested. The 
 manifestation takes place within the unmanifested 
 and there is always something from within which 
 brings forth the manifested. This plus element we 
 shall not attempt to explain ; because I am informed 
 that none of the Occultists not even the greatest 
 has ever been able to fathom much of Its nature. 
 
 From man's point of view the manifested portion 
 of the Universal Mind consists of two parts, the 
 visible and the invisible; and yet each of these is 
 but a condition, a part or a diversity of the complete 
 unity of the Universal Consciousness. Upon the 
 visible plane of manifestation Divine Mind or Con- 
 sciousness expresses Itself in the two great forms 
 which are popularly known as force and matter: 
 looking at matter from the standpoint of a material- 
 ist (because matter is what we are supposed to be 
 most familiar with) we will study the manifestation 
 of the Universal Consciousness in that form. 
 
 We are supposed to be familiar with matter and 
 
Divine Mind, Its Nature and Manifestation. 37 
 
 yet Holman J. Clerk Maxwell and almost all scien- 
 tists are willing to confess that their conception of 
 it is but a hypothetical idea. Huxley, in his "Sensa- 
 tion and Sensiferous Organs," says: "All that we 
 know about matter is that it is the hypothetical 
 substance of physical phenomena." Physically we 
 can know very little of either force or matter be- 
 cause this objective world is on the plane of effects. 
 The Occultists divide matter into two great por- 
 tions, the particled and the unparticled. The par- 
 ticled portion comes forth from the unparticled as a 
 precipitation of it. Let me try to make this clear to 
 you. If you place a pan of water outside your win- 
 dow when the temperature of the atmosphere is be- 
 low freezing point, you will find that gradually there 
 is a lowering of the rate of vibration of the atoms 
 which compose the water until there comes a crystal- 
 line formation within the pan. Most of the water in 
 the pan is still fluidic but there are also these cryst- 
 alline formations, and we have both the particled 
 and the unparticled portions in the pan. In a 
 like manner throughout Nature these two forms 
 of matter are forever seen during a period of mani- 
 festation or evolution, and it is the particled portion 
 of matter that science has agreed to call atoms. 
 Though I believe that recently certain scientists are 
 trying to sub-divide even the atom which they admit 
 they have never yet seen. There are several scien- 
 tific theories concerning the nature of the atom 
 which we will not discuss at this time. It is suffi- 
 cient to know that the physicists agree in saying 
 
/ 
 
 38 The History and Power of Mind. 
 
 that logically and necessarily there must be an ulti- 
 mate element, and this produces the phenomena 
 which we call physical life. 
 
 It has often seemed to me that if all Mental 
 Scientists had the faith of the profane scientists they 
 would soon become Occultists and would accom- 
 plish anything they undertook, for the profane scien- 
 tist if the term "profane" will be excused says: 
 "Such a law must of necessity exist," and often 
 stakes his life upon his faith. Then, too, he always 
 lives up to and acts upon his scientific faith. For 
 instance, before Neptune was discovered science 
 said: "At such a point in space there should be a 
 planet," and thenceforth all astronomical calcula- 
 tions were based upon this logical theory; but it 
 was not until a long time after the scientists had 
 made known their theory that the planet was actu- 
 ally discovered. And so it is with this question that 
 we are considering the existence of the unseen 
 atom. The scientist knows that there is a unit of 
 substance; he knows there must be one because 
 visible physical forms are the product of something 
 and he says they must have an individual basis and 
 therefore there is an atom. 
 
 The Occultist asserts that the atom which the 
 scientist says must exist, does exist, and is visible 
 upon the subjective side of life. It is the smallest 
 portion of particled substance, and atoms are the 
 bricks with which the world is builded. So the 
 atom is seen and known by the Occultist and is 
 recognized as a logical necessity by the physicist. 
 Then comes the question, how is it created? 
 
Divine Mind, Its Nature and Manifestation. 39 
 
 The Occultist says it is created by the will of 
 Deity. Deity desires to manifest, to raise Itself to a 
 higher form of existence, and this desire going forth 
 within Itself causes the Universe to grow into ob- 
 jectivity. This desire manifests first in the unpar- 
 ticled portion and is a force which being sent 
 into unparticled matter causes a precipitate within 
 itself which is called atoms. And all worlds, all 
 bodies, all atoms are made of the same substance. 
 Everywhere throughout space there is but one basis 
 for the physical universe and this basis we agree to 
 call matter. Most people, however, give to matter 
 qualities that it does not possess and therefore give 
 it a power over themselves. If you understand the 
 nature of matter and look at it from the right stand- 
 point you will be able to control it; but if you give 
 to it qualities that do not belong to it then it will 
 control or limit you. 
 
 The other great power which is recognized as a 
 factor in building the physical world is force and 
 we find a limited amount of knowledge con- 
 cerning it. True it is that scientists have classi- 
 fied forces as electric force, force of heat, force of 
 steam, etc., but after everything has been stated and 
 analyzed we find all that the physicist knows of 
 force is that it is the immediate cause of a change in 
 the velocity or direction of the motion of a body. 
 In other words, it is the proximate cause of the 
 phenomena of form. When we view the material 
 world as the manifestation of Deity we know that 
 behind this motion which we call force, and behind 
 .this form which we call matter there is a cause 
 
40 The History and Power of Mind. 
 
 which produces them ; and we want to know some- 
 thing about this cause. 
 
 The Occultist starts with the premise, as we 
 said before, that all is Deity or Divine Essence. 
 This Divine Essence manifesting as motion is 
 called force by both the Occultist and the physi- 
 cist. The Occultist also calls it thought because 
 all force in its ultimate is either thought or the 
 result of thought. With the Occultist force and 
 thought are identical and force is the product of 
 mind. The Divine Essence manifesting as matter is 
 what both the physicists and Occultists call sub- 
 stance substance being the collective name for 
 the atoms; and we call it substance because it is 
 that which stands under, that which lies behind the 
 visible Universe. The physical Universe is, there- 
 fore, but atoms in motion or vibration and back of 
 matter and back of motion is Divine Essence. 
 
 The mistake that the physicists of the ultra school 
 make is in believing that matter is all; that every- 
 thing is a by-product of matter and that Mind and 
 Consciousness are but this thing which we call mat- 
 ter in motion. And the great mistake of the ultra 
 Mental and Christian Scientists is in believing that 
 all is mind and that there is no matter. Each view 
 is extreme, and fails to distinguish both manifesta- 
 tions of Divine Essence. The Divine Essence does 
 manifest in those two forms and we should study 
 its manifestations in both ; therefore, to say there is 
 no matter and thus sweep away in thought the 
 physical world, is, in my opinion, not altogether 
 
Divine Mind, Its Nature and Manifestation. 41 
 
 scientific. But the true scientific attitude is to say 
 that the Supreme Universal Divine Essence Con- 
 sciousness God does manifest in the dual way of 
 motion and matter. This gives us the trinity of 
 Consciousness, Force and Substance. 
 
 The Occultist does not forget this trinity and the 
 part each portion plays in life. The atom as viewed 
 by the Occultist is dual, and has its consciousness 
 aspect and its substance aspect. Its positive aspect 
 is consciousness, its negative aspect is substance 
 and these two are inseparable. 
 
 The physicist does not recognize the conscious 
 side of the atom and the Christian Scientist does not 
 recognize the physical side, but the Occultist main- 
 tains that the physical side of the atom is the ve- 
 hicle for consciousness ; and this duality of the atom 
 is the keynote to Occultism. The knowledge of this 
 is essential to the conscious production of phenom- 
 ena. Understanding this, you may realize how 
 the visible Universe is produced, how forces are 
 controlled, how cures are performed by mental 
 therapeutics. It all resolves itself into the action of 
 mind upon mind or upon lesser and other forms of 
 consciousness. Matter is subject to mind when 
 mind controls form through the consciousness side 
 of substance, by making and modifying vibrations 
 the cause of form. 
 
 The world of form is but atoms vibrating at cer- 
 tain established rates. Vibrations which appeal to 
 us as sound have no inherent sound, but are due to 
 rates of vibration that impinge upon the nerves of 
 
42 The History and Power of Mind. 
 
 the ear and are transmitted as vibrations to the 
 brain and thence to the mind. Those vibrations 
 which appeal to the eye as color have no light per se, 
 but are rates of vibration that, impinge upon the 
 optic nerves and are transmitted to the brain as 
 vibrations. All is vibration vibration modified by 
 Consciousness behind it or by individual conscious- 
 ness within it. All sensation is but the effect of 
 vibration upon the mind. 
 
 For example: I am looking at a glass bulb that 
 contains an electric light. It gives me the impres- 
 sion of something we call light. The ether is made 
 to vibrate at a certain rate and these vibrations im- 
 pinge upon the optic nerves and reach the objective 
 mind within the brain, and I have the sensation of 
 something we have agreed to call light. Thus we 
 see that it all comes back to a mental basis for a 
 material world; since all kinds of physical phenom- 
 ena are produced by the same substance vibrating at 
 different rates. 
 
 For example, hold a poker in the fire. After a 
 while it becomes so brilliant that we call it white. 
 Then take it out of the fire and watch it. After a 
 little time it will change from white to yellow, then 
 to red, and finally back to black. It was the same 
 group of atoms vibrating at different rates which 
 produced the separate and distinct colors of the 
 poker. The impinging of the vibrations upon our 
 minds caused our conceptions of the changing 
 colors ; and the same law which produced the colors 
 for us produces the physical Universe or the ex- 
 
Divine Mind, Its Nature and Manifestation. 43 
 
 ternal manifested world. Therefore it is the rela- 
 tionship of our individual consciousness to the ex- 
 ternal world of vibrations which makes the world 
 for us. 
 
 Now let us consider Divine Mind in its subjective 
 manifestations. The lower portion of the unpar- 
 ticled part of that Consciousness is, in the scientific 
 phraseology of the physicists, the ether. The two 
 are identical. Ether, like the atom, is something 
 that the scientific world says must exist; it is a 
 logical necessity, but no scientist has ever seen the 
 ether; he only knows that it produces certain phe- 
 nomena. This ether is a subtle, universal, magnetic, 
 fluidic medium in which all manifested things are 
 embedded : this is about the consensus of the opinion 
 of the scientific world. 
 
 We will now consider these qualities of the ether 
 from a mental standpoint, because this course is 
 particularly designed to teach you the nature and 
 powers of mind. 
 
 First of all the ether is subtle. It interpenetrates 
 all other forms of existence, all other forms of phy- 
 sical life. Why do you see me? Why do you see 
 the light? Because of this subtle essence that is 
 between us. I am talking about an aspect of the 
 Universal Mind and you must remember that this 
 subtle essence is Consciousness or Mind. You are 
 permeated with it, the atoms of your body are held 
 together in groups by it ; this subtle consciousness is 
 in every portion of your being. You are swimming, 
 living, existing in a sea of it. 
 
44 The History and Power of Mind. 
 
 Secondly, we must understand that the ether is 
 universal ; it cannot be excluded from any plane or 
 place. This Universal Consciousness is, as its name 
 implies, everywhere. It is important to remember 
 this universality because in thought transference or 
 in treating mentally a person at a distance you must 
 realize that there is no separateness in mind. Upon 
 the plane of mind the thought passes immediately 
 from one to another ; so you do not have to make a 
 great effort to reach another mind. You can reach 
 it instantly and easily through the medium of this 
 Mind because it is universal. 
 
 Thirdly, the ether is magnetic. It attracts all its 
 parts, and every part and particle of itself being in- 
 terdependent none are independent. Every particled 
 part of this sea of magnetism, every individualized 
 part, whether it be an atom, a man or a sun, is a 
 magnetic center ; and because the whole is magnetic 
 each part must be magnetic. Evolution can only 
 be carried on by reason of these centers and it was 
 for this purpose that they were brought into exist- 
 ence. Every center in the Universal Consciousness 
 should be preserved. Therefore your first duty to 
 God and to yourself is to preserve your own mag- 
 netic center. Occultism teaches no sacrifice of self 
 because evolution would be retarded instead of aided 
 by such teaching. 
 
 By this I do not wish to be misunderstood as say- 
 ing there should be no self-denial, or that there 
 should be no giving up of personal or selfish com- 
 forts or superfluities ; but I do mean that the indi- 
 
Divine Mind, Its Nature and Manifestation. 45 
 
 vidual center should not be destroyed or depleted 
 until it becomes an imperfect medium for Deity to 
 work through. Occultism says no one should sacri- 
 fice his life for another because every life is im- 
 portant to Deity, and for aught we know the life to 
 be sacrificed may be the more important center of 
 the two at that juncture of history. I am not 
 speaking of sentimentality, but I am stating a law. 
 
 Again, no one should give and continue to give 
 of his own spiritual, mental or physical force until 
 he is a bankrupt. A depleted center is of no use to 
 Deity in the evolutionary struggle. Look over the 
 list of those persons who are practicing mental 
 therapeutics, or think of your altruistic friends who 
 are bearing other people's burdens and see how the 
 law has acted in their cases. Are not many of them 
 mentally, physically or financially depleted and of 
 comparative little utility because of this conscious 
 or unconscious violation of the law? I am not 
 eulogizing heroics, sounding the glory of martyr- 
 dom nor criticising the victims of vanity ; but I am 
 stating an immutable law. 
 
 I know that altruism is said to have been taught 
 by the Nazarene Occultist, and admitting that after 
 three or four generations had passed away, he was 
 correctly reported in this respect in the records 
 which you now have then his teachings could only 
 have been intended to neutralize the intense and 
 almost universal selfishness which prevailed at that 
 time. Both altruism and selfishness are extreme 
 views, while intelligent individualism is the mid- 
 
46 The History and Power of Mind. 
 
 die ground and is in accordance with the law 
 that I have stated. It is fortunate, however, that 
 selfishness is so earnestly condemned and that altru- 
 ism is more preached than practiced or humanity 
 would not be able to press on in compliance with the 
 law as it is doing at present. So your duty to your- 
 self and to Deity is to become a positive center ; and 
 the higher your rate of vibration the more powerful 
 do you become. No one ever succeeded in life who 
 was continually in a negative condition. To be suc- 
 cessful you must be positive. "Unstable as water, 
 thou shalt not succeed," says the Scripture. You 
 must be strong and positive, and then whatever you 
 undertake will end successfully. 
 
 Did you ever stand on the bank of a river and 
 watch the water as it whirled round a center or 
 vortex in the middle of the stream? Did you ob- 
 serve how that vortex drew to itself everything that 
 came floating down upon the current? That was an 
 active, positive center distinct from any other center 
 or vortex in that stream, and because of its individu- 
 alized strength it had the power of attraction and 
 everything was drawn into it. 
 
 So it is that men become vortices in this great 
 magnetic sea of consciousness and according as 
 they became positive and strong do they draw to 
 themselves whatsoever they desire. But we cannot 
 help others until we become strong ourselves. We 
 must have force before we can impart it to others. 
 We must know before we can teach. 
 
 Fourth, the ether is fluidic. This unparticled sea 
 
Divine Mind, Its Nature and Manifestation. 47 
 
 of Divine Consciousness flows according to the im- 
 petus given to it both by Deity Itself and by man ; 
 and it moves in the direction in which it is sent. 
 This is another important fact to remember, because 
 you will learn that there are currents within this 
 fluidic sea and later on you will be taught how to 
 attach yourself to those currents and forces and to 
 draw such as you desire into yourself. There are 
 also currents of love and you shall be taught how to 
 attach yourself to draw love to you. There are de- 
 structive currents and you shall be taught how to 
 avoid attaching yourself to them. 
 
 Suppose you were a thousand miles from home 
 and you desired to help some member of your 
 family. With your power of thought you could 
 make this fluidic force, this Consciousness and life 
 flow into the person that you desire to help. So it 
 is very important that you should realize something 
 about the nature of this fluidic Universal Conscious- 
 ness. It is a wonderful storehouse in which every- 
 thing that is conceivable to the mind of man is 
 stored; and his thoughts going forth into it can 
 bring back to him just what he desires. 
 
 Fifth, this Consciousness the ether is the 
 medium in which all things are embedded and 
 through which all things are connected with each 
 other. Because it is a medium there is no friction 
 between any parts of it per se; it yields to you and 
 yet connects you with any or all of its parts. It 
 does not impair or retard the force you sent out 
 into it, and it brings back to you precisely what you 
 
48 The History and Power of Mind. 
 
 send forth. If you think love to a friend, your love 
 will go to him precisely as you think it, and with no 
 greater nor less intensity than you feel it. If there 
 were any friction in this Universal Ether or Divine 
 Consciousness we should not be able to receive the 
 light from the stars. The worlds would some time 
 stop in their orbits because no world would be able 
 to revolve for more than a limited time, if there were 
 the least resistance to its progress through space. 
 
 Consciously direct your thought into the Ether 
 and it is sure to reach the person, place or thing to 
 which you send it. If you want to give me a mental 
 treatment, you think kindly, positively of me, and 
 this thought going from you into the Ether makes a 
 little pathway for itself until it reaches me. For the 
 time being there is a magnetic cord established be- 
 tween us and over that magnetic cord you send your 
 thoughts of health and strength. No wave of 
 thought vibration can ever be impaired. Modern 
 scientists agree that at the same place and at the 
 same time there may be an infinite variety of etheric 
 waves of different lengths, with none of them inter- 
 fering with each other. We can see waves, which we 
 call light, as they are sent to us from the stars ; and 
 could we but translate the messages those waves of 
 light or vibrations are bringing to us, we should be 
 wiser and better than we are. But we know that 
 the color of a star indicates its state of development, 
 and in this way we are able to determine which of 
 the heavenly bodies are below or above us in their 
 evolution. 
 
Divine Mind, Its Nature and Manifestation. 49 
 
 Few persons know scarcely anything about the 
 magnetic power which is daily given to all living 
 creatures by our sun. We know that the sunshine 
 often dispels the fears which have come upon us at 
 night. We know that difficulties which seem insur- 
 mountable as viewed by moonlight, melt before us 
 like mist when the beautiful, golden rays of the sun 
 are turned upon them. We may be courageous, 
 positive and strong while the sun shines, but when 
 it has disappeared below the horizon and the 
 shadows of night have settled down upon us 
 our courage dwindles, and we often become weak 
 and negative. More souls pass out of their bodies at 
 night than while the sun is shining; and peo- 
 ple who are ill grow worse as the sun com- 
 mences to decline. All these conditions are gov- 
 erned by the law of vibration. The light waves or 
 vibrations from the sun are the strongest, the most 
 powerful and the most magnetic that come to us 
 from any source. They vibrate at the rate of a 
 golden yellow, and therefore are a continuous flow 
 of force currents to this world and to all other planets 
 near enough to receive their vibrations. When 
 a person or any other individualized consciousness 
 concentrates its thoughts upon the sun it receives a 
 mental and a magnetic treatment from that great cen- 
 ter, since the concentration of thought opens a direct 
 channel for the great force to flow through to the 
 one concentrating upon it; and the vibrations both 
 mental and physical of that person or creature are 
 
50 The History and Power of Mind. 
 
 raised in proportion to the intensity of its powers of 
 concentration. 
 
 Divine Mind is precisely analogous to a sensitive 
 plate and each human thought makes a picture on 
 that plate. By thought you make the exposure, and 
 the thing pictured will in time become your own, for 
 you are attached to your creations and time develops 
 the picture for you. If you hold the image you have 
 made long enough you will get a perfect picture ; if 
 you think idly, then you have made what the photog- 
 raphers would call an under exposure and the pic- 
 ture is not full, clear and perfect, and many of the 
 details are left out ; but by holding the picture firmly 
 and strongly, you make it a permanency and then 
 it is yours, for thoughts become things. 
 
 Mental pictures are first mental things, but after 
 a time they become physical things or draw physical 
 things to them, for the great Consciousness gives 
 back to us precisely what we send into it. It gives 
 to us whatever we ask of it, and our ignorance in 
 making demands will be no protection to us. The 
 only way that evolution can go on is by Divine 
 Mind granting every request that we persistently 
 make ; it is in this way we gain wisdom through ex- 
 perience. 
 
 This automatic action, as it were, of Divine Con- 
 sciousness was fully taught by Jesus, but is as lit- 
 tle understood or believed in by his present so-called 
 followers as it was by those whom he originally tried 
 to teach. You remember he said : "J u dge not that 
 ye be not judged ; for with what judgment ye judge 
 
Divine Mind, Its Nature and Manifestation. 51 
 
 ye shall be judged ; and with what measure ye meet 
 it shall be measured to you again." And again he 
 said: "Ask, and it shall be given unto you; seek, 
 and ye shall find ; knock, and it shall be opened unto 
 you." And when he said these things he was stat- 
 ing what he knew was a law which could be put 
 into operation then or at any time afterwards. 
 
LECTURE THREE. 
 
 DUAL MIND AND ITS ORIGIN. 
 
 If we let a ray of light pass through a series of 
 colored glasses we find that the color of the last 
 glass it passes through is the tint that the light will 
 take; and the tint of the light will be accentuated 
 because the colored glass modifies certain other 
 colors not consonant with its own nature, while 
 it permits the rays of a similar vibration to its 
 own to pass through. The same conditions hold 
 good with consciousness. Consciousness is limited 
 in its manifestation by the medium or media through 
 which it manifests. For an illustration, take the 
 consciousness of a flower, an animal, and a man. 
 There is a limitation of the expression in each of 
 these, by reason of the form in which it manifests. 
 And consciousness also accentuates the peculiar na- 
 ture through which it manifests. It accentuates that 
 particular portion of the Universe, or planet, or man, 
 in which it manifests. 
 
 Concentrate your consciousness your mind on 
 your right foot, and hold it there for awhile, and you 
 will draw the blood from other parts of the body into 
 the foot, until it will become swollen and red. You 
 are thinking of the foot to the exclusion of all the 
 rest of the body. That portion of your conscious- 
 ness which is functioning in the foot is accentuated 
 52 
 
Dual Mind and Its Origin. 53 
 
 above the consciousness which remains in the rest 
 of the body. Carry this a step further, and 
 we find that the law operates precisely in the same 
 manner with the entire man. Consciousness accent- 
 uates that portion of the man in which its greatest 
 expression is. For that reason, since the early Chris- 
 tian centuries the body has been mistaken for the 
 man, because it was the last medium through which 
 his consciousness or mind expressed itself it was 
 that portion of the man which was accentuated by 
 the consciousness. 
 
 Very little was known of the real nature of man 
 after the second and third centuries of the Christian 
 era, except that he was a body which was generally 
 regarded as the man. The theologians knew there 
 was a body, and, consequently, in their theology the 
 body was put forth primarily as man. They thought 
 he had a soul, and taught certain doctrines concern- 
 ing that indefinite something which they designated 
 as his soul. This term "soul" is still somewhat in- 
 definite at the present day. Any of the leading dic- 
 tionaries will give you a large variety of meanings 
 attached to the word. The theologians could not de- 
 fine or picture the soul, but they accepted the Jew- 
 ish conception of the Adamic man, and believed that 
 Adam was created out of the dust of the ground ; and 
 that afterward God breathed into him the breath of 
 life ; and they regarded that breath as his soul. 
 
 We find in the Hebrew Scriptures the Old Testa- 
 ment the expression, a "nephesh for a nephesh" 
 (a life for a life), and "He that taketh the nephesh 
 
54 The History and Power of Mind. 
 
 of his neighbor's ox," etc., showing that the exoteric 
 Jews had no conception of a soul as distinct from the 
 Universal life principle and they have very little 
 conception of it to-day. So when the Christians ren- 
 dered in theological language the Jewish thought, 
 they called the life principle of man his soul. Later 
 in the centuries the "moral philosophers" appeared 
 on the scene, and were almost as indefinite in their 
 teachings concerning his true nature as were the 
 theologians. These moral philosophers whom we 
 now call metaphysicians also taught something 
 about a soul or mind ; but there was a confusion of 
 words, due, of course, to a confusion of thought, and 
 instead of teaching what soul or mind was, they de- 
 scribed the phenomena of mind. 
 
 For instance, in the writings of Sir William Ham- 
 ilton, who was one of the representative thinkers of 
 his time, which was not far from our own age, we 
 read the discussions concerning mind, and we find 
 the question: how many articles or subjects can 
 the human mind be conscious of at one time? Also 
 discussions of the peculiar phases of sleep-walking, 
 unconscious memory, etc ; in other words, the study 
 of the phenomena of mind. All the Occidental an- 
 cient moral philosophy concerning the inner mind, 
 soul or spirit, as they were indefinitely designated, 
 was really what we now call physiological psychol- 
 ogy, and pertained entirely to the action of mind 
 upon or through the body. 
 
 Since the consciousness manifested chiefly in the 
 external man in those days, and since the body, plus 
 
Dual Mind and Its Origin. 55 
 
 a little indefinite something more, was regarded as 
 the man, it was only natural that the theologians 
 should have taught the doctrine of a physical resur- 
 rection. Many of them did not know how to ac- 
 count for immortality unless there was to be a phys- 
 ical resurrection at least this was true after the 
 Council of Nice. We find at that time that the 
 Christian and the Jew were the only two relig- 
 ionists in the world who feared a dissolution of 
 the physical body; and naturally there arose the 
 barbaric practice of burying dead bodies for the 
 purpose of preserving them. The Egyptians pre- 
 served their dead only for the supposed purpose of 
 having their old atoms to use again on their return 
 to earth. 
 
 The majority of people of the present day have 
 not progressed much further than the theologians 
 and the metaphysicians of the early centuries. Ask 
 ten men whom you may meet in every-day life, what 
 a man is, and nine of them will describe the physical 
 body. You will be surprised to learn how little is 
 known of anything besides the physiological man. 
 I have been told by persons who were considered in- 
 telligent, that the soul is a body something like the 
 physical, only more beautiful, because it has wings 
 like a bird ; and I believe that was the common con- 
 ception of the people of the middle ages. Many of 
 the old paintings represent the soul as a body, float- 
 ing through space with a pair of wings. The body, 
 plus wings, was the artistic conception of the psy- 
 chic or real man in ancient times. 
 
56 The History and Power of Mind. 
 
 A few days ago I asked a well known Church 
 woman in the city, what she thought a soul looked 
 like. After considerable thought upon the subject 
 she replied that she did not know, but supposed it 
 was something white that fluttered like a sheet in 
 the wind. I asked another the same question, and 
 she said she was not certain, but thought it was 
 something like an alarm clock attached to the body, 
 which kept ringing when one did something one 
 ought not to do. With nine-tenths of the people 
 there is no distinction between themselves and their 
 bodies, for man knows very little of himself at the 
 present time ; and it would be well for each of you 
 to stop now and see what definition you can formu- 
 late concerning yourself. 
 
 In the middle of the nineteenth century, the more 
 adventurous minds commenced to investigate 
 the nature of man and the fact of whether or not 
 immortality was demonstrable, and there arose 
 what is known as the Spiritualistic movement, or 
 Spiritualism. In this country, and in France, the 
 investigators maintain that there is a persistency of 
 consciousness after the dissolution of the physical 
 body, and that certain phenomena are produced by 
 it. This was the first general deliberate attempt in 
 Christian times to discover the soul of man, and 
 the first effort to collect a sufficient amount of sci- 
 entific data on which to base a philosophy concern- 
 ing the psychic man. They have given us no phil- 
 osophy yet, although their investigations com- 
 menced sometime in the middle of last century. 
 
Dual Mind and Its Origin. 57 
 
 The principal tenet of their belief is that beyond this 
 earth life there is somewhere an eternal progression 
 for the human soul, which certainly is an improve- 
 ment on the old orthodox Christian belief in stag- 
 nation by reason of the wearing of crowns, waving 
 of palms, and singing hallelujahs forever and for- 
 ever. 
 
 The next movement along this line commenced 
 in 1875, and was known as the Theosophical move- 
 in ent.~ This was started for the purpose of study- 
 ing, among other things, man, and particularly his 
 latent psychic faculties. This movement gave a 
 more exhaustive and complete theory concerning 
 the nature of man than was then to be had in the 
 Occident. Vague it was at times, and the several 
 sections of the movement differed in belief among 
 themselves. Some made man a combination of 
 seven, and others of fourteen, different personalities 
 or principles ; but, nevertheless, it was an attempt to 
 reach something besides the physical. 
 
 In 1886 there was another movement along the 
 line of investigation of psychic phenomena. This 
 was called the Society for Psychical Research, and 
 worked along the same general lines that the Spirit- 
 ualists were investigating. The object to be attained 
 was to establish scientific demonstrations of the 
 persistency of man's consciousness after death, and 
 many scholarly men and women became investi- 
 gators with this object in view. If anything more 
 than what the Spiritualists had learned before them 
 has been gained along this line it has not been re- 
 
58 The History and Power of Mind. 
 
 ported to the world, though I have no doubt that 
 any real genuine enlightenment from this society 
 would be thankfully received by many. 
 
 Finally came that body of investigators whose 
 practice is called Hypnotism, and which is mesmer- 
 ism, revamped and renamed. Hypnotism has done 
 a little good for the world, and it will do consider- 
 able harm before it becomes generally condemned. 
 We want to see the good in everything, so I shall 
 call your attention to a few facts that Hypnotism 
 has brought forth. It has proved to the minds of 
 many, and it has certainly given evidence to the 
 minds of all who have investigated it, that the body 
 of man is not the man. For when a person is put 
 into the state of hypnosis, the body is unable to 
 think, to feel, or to function in any way. If the body 
 were the man, sleep could not extinguish entirely his 
 consciousness ; there would be enough left to regis- 
 ter sensation. If you stick a pin into the flesh of a 
 man in ordinary sleep you will get a quick response, 
 and unless you are very active you may regret mak- 
 ing the investigation. But if you stick a pin into 
 the flesh of a man who is in a state of complete hyp- 
 nosis, you will find there is no response from your 
 victim. This shows that in one case there is con- 
 sciousness, and in the other there is none. This evi- 
 dence is sufficient to prove to the unprejudiced in- 
 vestigator that the body is not the man, but there is 
 within the body a recording something that is capa- 
 ble of sensing things external to the body. The 
 phenomena of Hypnotism also show that the mind is 
 
Dual Mind and Its Origin. 59 
 
 not the product of the molecular vibration of the 
 brain, because during hypnosis, and while the brain 
 is quiescent, the mind continues to be active. 
 
 These experiments are further verified by the use 
 of anaesthetics. When a person is etherized, the ef- 
 fect is the same as if he were hypnotized; because 
 in both cases the mind, or the real man, is forced 
 out of his physical body, which is then incapa- 
 ble of functioning, and remains inert until the 
 reasoning principle returns to its habitation. Many 
 times, a subject has been put into hypnosis and the 
 consciousness sent out of the body to a distant place, 
 whence it has brought a correct report of things 
 that were occurring there at that time. Hypnotism, 
 therefore, has done two very good things. It has 
 scientifically proved that man is mind, the thinker, 
 and that mind can persist separate and apart from 
 its vehicle, the body ; and if that condition can exist 
 for one moment, then there is no logical reason why 
 it should not exist throughout eternity. Hence we 
 have here some scientific data for immortality. 
 
 Investigations upon these subjects were first made 
 in recent times in Paris, and in Nancy, France; 
 afterward in the United States and in Sweden, and 
 finally throughout the world. Investigators found 
 that there was a mind capable of experiencing sen- 
 sations which ordinarily functioned in the human 
 body, but which could be separated from it as I have 
 just described. But they also found that there is a 
 secondary mind in man, and that after the first mind 
 is well under the control of the hypnotist, there is 
 
60 The History and Power of Mind. 
 
 still a secondary mind or intelligence which may act 
 independently of the first. This secondary con- 
 sciousness they named the subliminal self. So they 
 have found that man is not only a mind, but he is 
 two minds. In the course of time the first conscious- 
 ness that was reached became known as the object- 
 ive mind, and the second consciousness as the sub- 
 jective mind. 
 
 If mind is something and Hypnotism has shown 
 that it is then mind must have a form and a color. 
 We cannot conceive of anything in the Universe 
 that is without form and color. Individualization, 
 separateness requires form and color, or those con- 
 ditions could not exist. A great mass of evidence 
 has been collected from various sources upon this 
 subject. Spiritualistic Societies, the Society for Psy- 
 chical Research, and clairvoyants, seers and sensi- 
 tives all over the world agree upon the one point 
 that mind has form. They differ somewhat upon 
 the question of whether or not it has color, but that 
 is a logical necessity. They say that mind has form, 
 and that its form is the same as that of the body 
 which it inhabits, and that the real man is an ether- 
 ialized prototype of his physical self. In other 
 words, the physical self is but a materialized picture 
 of the inner man or mind. All evidence agrees on 
 that point, and if human testimony is worth any- 
 thing, it is certainly conclusive in this case, be- 
 cause there is a unanimity of evidence from four 
 great sources which do not harmonize on many 
 other points. 
 
Dual Mind and Its Origin. 61 
 
 About color there is a great difference of opinion, 
 due to a difference in the respective development of 
 the observers. Let me illustrate. A woman is walk- 
 ing along the street, and observes another woman 
 approaching. She says : "What a beautiful dress," 
 and is asked what is its color, and answers "blue." 
 She is asked how it is made, but can only say that 
 its general effect is beautiful, and its color is blue. 
 
 Another woman who saw the dress would tell 
 you its color and how it was made. Still another 
 would agree with both the others, and would add, 
 "And the woman who wore the dress was more 
 beautiful than her dress." The last observer was 
 able to see not only the dress, the design, and the 
 figure, but also the character of the woman within. 
 
 It is the same with the four classes of observers 
 or investigators that have been mentioned; some 
 are persons who ordinarily function solely upon the 
 objective plane of life, but who, under exceptional 
 conditions, sometimes see the outlines or figure of 
 the psychic or real man. Other more careful observ- 
 ers having advanced to the point where they can 
 command the higher natural forces, and can func- 
 tion upon the subjective side of life, may see not 
 only the outlines of these mind or soul forms, but 
 see them as plainly as they see physical forms 
 around them in the ordinary affairs of life. Then 
 there are others who have advanced so far in their 
 evolution that they can look beneath the form of 
 the man and see the character. These persons are 
 the Seers, or higher Clairvoyants. The last two 
 
 
62 The History and Power of Mind. 
 
 classes agree with the Occultist in making the as- 
 sertion that the character of mind is always known 
 by its color ; and this must be scientifically true, be- 
 cause there could be no differentiation of form ex- 
 cept through the vibration which manifests as color. 
 So it is a logical necessity, as well as a matter of 
 testimony, that every human mind or psychic man 
 has form and color. 
 
 There is one thing in the world that cannot lie, 
 and that thing is vibration. The vibrations of a man 
 determine his form and his color. And his thought 
 or character is the cause of his vibrations, as we shall 
 see later, in another lecture. As far as we have gone 
 we have learned that man is identical with mind, 
 and that this mind has form and color ; also that man 
 has two consciousnesses which are called the 
 objective and the subjective minds. The normal 
 color of the subjective mind of man known in the 
 theological parlance as spirit is blue. It is of the 
 same nature as the Ether or Divine Consciousness 
 whence it came. The color of the objective mind 
 of man called by the theologians the soul is 
 green ; and man's predominating color is always de- 
 termined by the mind which dominates. Having 
 arrived at this point, we will now examine the origin 
 of these respective aspects of man, the objective and 
 the subjective. 
 
 Evolution is not carried on equally throughout all 
 its parts. We find this is true wherever we investi- 
 gate the operations of this law. But Evolution is 
 carried on by the creation of centers within the 
 

 Dual Mind and Its Origin. 63 
 
 Great Consciousness, and by enlarging and preserv- 
 ing these centers. As actual reform is carried on in 
 a great city by the reformation first of individuals, 
 and not with trying to reform the whole public at 
 once, so it is with the great law which works 
 through centers or individuals. 
 
 The Occultist differs from the physicist in his 
 views of the law which governs natural selection. 
 The physicist illustrates the working of this law in 
 a manner something like this: A little Hottentot, 
 who represents the highest degree of development 
 in his particular locality, wanders into the forest, 
 and meets another little Hottentot who is the high- 
 est exponent of the development of another tribe. 
 These two, being male and female, meet by chance, 
 and by natural impulse or selection marry, and raise 
 a family of little Hottentots to a higher degree of 
 development than themselves. This is the law of 
 natural selection, and chance determines the entire 
 evolutionary career of the race, according to the 
 physicist. 
 
 But the Occultist has a maxim that "nature, un- 
 aided, fails," and believes that there could be no evo- 
 lution except by working through conscious centers. 
 For instance, our sun is a center purposely formed, 
 and through that center great life force is conscious- 
 ly sent out to smaller, weaker centers, imbuing them 
 with life, and promoting other forms of life and 
 growth upon them as it does upon this planet of 
 ours. It is the same with species and types; it is 
 not a natural selection, in the sense of nature work- 
 
64 The History and Power of Mind. 
 
 ing blindly, that causes evolution, but it is rather an 
 artificial selection, or the raising up of individual 
 parts. Take man, for instance; the Adept selects 
 such advanced men and women as he knows are ca- 
 pable of evolving more rapidly than others, and by 
 putting his own force and strength upon them he 
 aids in their development, and in this way these 
 selected individuals are assisted upward till they be- 
 come the highest expressions of manhood and wom- 
 anhood. 
 
 In the animal and vegetable kingdoms man takes 
 the highest expression of this or that form or type, 
 and through artificial, conscious selection, unites 
 them with other forms, and thus produces a higher 
 type of expression, as in the breeding of animals and 
 the grafting of trees and flowers. The Occultist in- 
 sists that the purposiveness of Deity, as Nature, is 
 present in all Its individual parts, but becomes fully 
 manifested only through the conscious co-operation 
 of the more evolved centers of Itself. 
 
 Understanding this, we are now prepared to ex- 
 amine the origin and development of the subjective 
 and objective minds of man. In passing, it should 
 be stated that while we will use the terms objective 
 and subjective mind as being one of the accepted ex- 
 pressions of the modern psychologists, we do not 
 fully endorse their views as to the nature and power 
 of those respective minds. 
 
 First, then, as to the origin of the subjective mind. 
 The Occultists teach that the subjective mind of 
 man came direct from the substance of Deity, much 
 
Dual Mind and Its Origin. 65 
 
 as Minerva sprang from the head of Zeus. With 
 the co-operation of the Elohim those great Ones 
 who said "Let us make man in our own image," the 
 Supreme Consciousness coalesced within Itself 
 quantities of Its particled portion until mind forms 
 were created. The atoms were drawn together by 
 the power of attraction, and it was thus that the sub- 
 jective minds of men were born. Let us illustrate: 
 Imagine the atmosphere to be the Supreme Con- 
 sciousness. Look forth into it on a cloudless day. 
 The atmosphere itself is heterogeneous matter and 
 is ordinarily invisible. After a while you may see a 
 gradual condensation of some portion of the atmos- 
 phere, a center is being formed, a cloud appears 
 which is of the same nature as a part of the atmos- 
 phere, and sufficiently condensed to become visible 
 to you. It is in this manner that individual minds 
 are born out of the Ether. Take again as an illus- 
 tration something we have used before a pan of 
 freezing water. At first the water is homogeneous ; 
 then there is a lowering of the rates of vibration of 
 the atoms that compose it, and gradually some tiny 
 crystalline forms appear. These crystalline forms 
 are attracted, and small pieces of ice appear in the 
 pan. This ice is of the same nature as the water, 
 yet it is separate and distinct from it. It is in the 
 same manner that the substance of Deity is con- 
 densed and the individual subjective minds of men 
 are born. Those of you who have read my wife's 
 Occult novel, "Mata, the Magician," will remember 
 
66 The History and Power of Mind. 
 
 this same thought is there, poetically and beautifully 
 expressed, as follows: 
 
 "It thinks, and Suns spring into shape ; 
 It wills, and Worlds disintegrate; 
 It loves, and Souls are born." 
 
 It is not my purpose to enter into the details of 
 the working of the law of evolution, but to help 
 you understand your own nature I shall give briefly 
 an outline of the evolutionary steps that are taken 
 by the subjective mind in its process of individual- 
 ization. As you have seen, an immediate condensa- 
 tion of consciousness within the Great Conscious- 
 ness is caused by the desire of Deity to manifest or 
 express Itself in individualized forms, and this ex- 
 pression is brought into actuality through the in- 
 strumentality of the Planetary Spirits, or Elohim. 
 These great Beings send their thoughts to a desig- 
 nated point in the Ether, form a center, and through 
 the vibrations of their united thought-forces cause 
 an assembling of atoms whose conscious sides re- 
 spond to these vibrations. 
 
 The physicists tell us that with the grouping of 
 atoms into molecular life a new individuality is al- 
 ways created, which is something more than the sum 
 total of its constituent parts. The Occultist says 
 this is true because the union of the conscious 
 side of the atoms causes the character or individu- 
 ality to appear in the group. So, when the many 
 atomic consciousnesses are compressed into an oval 
 
Dual Mind and Its Origin. 67 
 
 form by the Elohim, there comes into being an or- 
 ganized consciousness or mind, which controls its 
 atomic parts. These Ether-born minds thenceforth 
 take up their evolution and gather and store their 
 experiences as they progress, and by such methods 
 become more and more individualized. The evo- 
 lution of these subjective minds begins upon the 
 subjective side of life, and for ages they continue 
 to progress upon planets that are composed of such 
 tenuous matter that they are invisible to the pres- 
 ent sight of men. After these subjective minds 
 have become thoroughly individualized, they or 
 rather we, for these subjective minds are ourselves 
 become ready to incarnate in animal forms on 
 this physical world of ours. 
 
 There are two classes of subjective minds which 
 always incarnate at the same time on a physical 
 world. Those who have been brought into exist- 
 ence in the Cosmic Day, and those who have at- 
 tempted their evolutionary career one or more times 
 before in some other Cosmic Day, but who failed, 
 and are now making another attempt to go on in 
 their evolution. For a center of consciousness may 
 not be successful in the particular period of evolu- 
 tion in which it is first brought into existence; and 
 salvation is not a mere matter of faith or belief 
 alone. It depends entirely upon one's self whether 
 one reaches Godhood from manhood in the evo- 
 lutionary period in which one sets out. 
 
 Until the half-way point was reached in the evo- 
 lutionary career of man and this planet, the Uni- 
 
68 The History and Power of Mind. 
 
 versal Consciousness pushed men forward. After 
 the half-way point was passed, and men had reached 
 their mental majority, and should have become in- 
 dividualized, the old order of things was changed. 
 Men must use their own minds now, and must make 
 use of the knowledge they have of Nature's laws, 
 if they expect to go on in their evolution. It is 
 progress, or fail and return into space, to remain un- 
 til another period of evolution shall commence, when 
 souls shall again attempt to perpetuate their indi- 
 viduality. Ultimately, man's destiny is to evolve to 
 something higher than manhood he is to some time 
 reach Godhood. 
 
 Your attention will now be called to one or two 
 characteristics of the divine portion of man. The 
 subjective mind is the divine nature, because it 
 comes direct from the Great Universal Conscious- 
 ness; it is the Logos, or the Word made flesh. It 
 is the highest because it is the first expression of 
 the Universal Consciousness ; it is close to the heart 
 of God, is the first born, and carries the first im- 
 press of Deity. Because its evolution was entirely 
 subjective before it reached this planet, and because 
 it now functions normally on the plane of causes 
 the mental plane it is the intuitive portion of man. 
 It is that portion which knows without reasoning, 
 which apprehends immediately upon the presenta- 
 tion of a subject; that which sees causes. 
 
 The objective mind evolves entirely upon this 
 planet. It is an offspring of this particular period 
 of evolution, and its nature is the result of its ob- 
 
Dual Mind and Its Origin. 69 
 
 jective growth and physical experiences. Briefly, 
 its evolution is as follows : Deity settles down as a 
 great mass or cloud of consciousness upon a planet, 
 and vitalizes it, gives life and form to it, and gives 
 to the mineral kingdom its form of consciousness by 
 ensouling it. I do not mean you to understand that 
 this lower kingdom becomes wholly individualized. 
 For instance, in the vast fields of coal and iron the 
 Great Consciousness has not individualized be- 
 cause that form of expression restricts individual- 
 ization; but when we examine the higher portion 
 of this kingdom the precious stones we find that 
 here, in a measure, individualization has begun. A 
 part of the mass, a few of the purest and best atoms, 
 those which are capable of taking a more rapid 
 rate of vibration, have become separated from the 
 others, and have made an attempt at individualiza- 
 tion. Then a part of the Great Consciousness passes 
 on to the vegetable kingdom, where we have first 
 the lichens and grasses; each of these is a sepa- 
 rate and distinct form, and consciousness is there 
 individualized ; but the individualization is not per- 
 petual because of the frailty and lack of persist- 
 ence of the forms. Thence the consciousness passes 
 into the bush, and afterward it reaches perfect indi- 
 vidualization in the tree, the highest form of life in 
 the vegetable world. 
 
 Then a portion of the Great Consciousness sweeps 
 on into the animal kingdom and ensouls the low- 
 est animal forms, and gradually, as evolution pre- 
 pares better vehicles, these souls of animals, or indi- 
 
70 The History and Power of Mind. 
 
 vidualized intelligences, re-embody themselves in 
 higher physical forms of animals, until we have the 
 elephant, the horse and the dog. Here individuali- 
 zation becomes not only consciousness, but it be- 
 comes mind, and persists as animal mind. It re- 
 embodies itself in one form after another, and the 
 dog, for instance, comes back many times to this 
 material plane a dog, and gains more strength and 
 knowledge by its experiences. Finally these indi- 
 vidualized animal minds pass into the ape forms, and 
 thence into physical human bodies, and though these 
 bodies disintegrate and pass away, the animal 
 minds persist and reincarnate and ultimately become 
 the objective minds of men. 
 
 When these quasi-human forms have reached the 
 point of development where they are capable of 
 becoming vehicles for the Divine Subjective minds, 
 then the union of the subjective and objective minds 
 takes place. The subjective minds come to earth 
 for the purpose of getting experience upon this ma- 
 terial plane, that they may become wiser, and more 
 strongly individualized; also that they may raise 
 the animal minds or objective consciousnesses, 
 which they ensoul, to a higher and a better condi- 
 tion of development; for with the interblending of 
 the Divine Subjective mind with the objective or 
 animal mind comes a permanent union, and those 
 "whom God hath joined together" cannot be sepa- 
 rated without a tremendous loss to each, as will be 
 shown in the lecture on "Lesser Occult or Psychic 
 Forces and their Dangers." 
 
Dual Mind and Its Origin. 71 
 
 After the union of the subjective and objective 
 minds has taken place, this united entity continues 
 to incarnate and re-incarnate as its physical bodies 
 wear out. Understanding this, you will be better able 
 to appreciate the meaning of Chapter Six of Genesis, 
 where it says: "And it came to pass, when (ani- 
 mal) men began to multiply on the face of the earth, 
 and daughters were born to them (that is when 
 sufficient forms were created), that the sons of God 
 (the subjective minds) saw the daughters of men 
 (the objective minds) that they were fair; and they 
 took them wives (blended with them) of all which 
 they chose." 
 
 Genesis is the disarranged, mutilated remnant of 
 a Chaldean Occult record, and even in its present 
 form, with the interpolations it has received, it con- 
 tains great truths. Some day an Occultist may 
 re-arrange the original parts of the Bible, and in- 
 terpret it for the enlightenment of the world, but as 
 it is, it contains much for those who are able to 
 read and understand. 
 
 The objective mind, or animal intelligence, is the 
 reasoning or intellectual faculty of man; it is that 
 faculty which becomes educated through external 
 means, and learns from books; it is that faculty 
 which is taught to reason ; and it is also the seat of 
 sensation. If it were not for the objective mind we 
 could not feel, as was shown heretofore when we 
 cited Hypnotism. The objective mind is also some- 
 times designated as the brain intelligence. Because 
 it gains its knowledge entirely from externals, it is 
 
72 The History and Power of Mind. 
 
 oftener wrong than right in relation to true causes. 
 It only takes into account effects or phenomena, and 
 then, not having all the facts, in most cases it is 
 incapable alone of deducing a right conclusion. 
 
 When the subjective mind has incarnated into 
 the objective mind we have the real psychic man, 
 the dual man. This interbl^nding of these two 
 consciousness makes one form, and in that form 
 it perpetuates itself. Why is not a man as wide 
 as he is long? It is because of the form of the inner 
 man which is the model for the physical body. The 
 inner man is the magnetic matrix into which the 
 physical particles are built. Thus it is that all form 
 has its mental basis. Before a form can exist on 
 the physical plane it must be created on the mental 
 plane. 
 
 Since both these minds are condensations of 
 the Universal Mind, they both have naturally the 
 characteristics of that Mind. The Universal Con- 
 sciousness brought them into existence through Its 
 creative capacity, so both these minds have the 
 power of creating. The great trouble, however, is 
 this: the objective mind, through its animal ex- 
 perience, has acquired the animal fear. This is 
 the chief characteristic of the animal mind and is 
 its mainspring of action; hence most of the crea- 
 tions of the objective mind are the product of fear 
 or are colored by fear. 
 
 For example, our mothers stamp fear upon us 
 before we are born, and continue to do it after we 
 are born,, and until we have grown old enough to 
 
Dual Mind and Its Origin. 73 
 
 fear for ourselves. They create diseases for us 
 through their fears of disease until we get old 
 enough to create our own diseases. And that 
 wretched fear follows us from the cradle to the 
 grave. We are afraid we shall not succeed in busi- 
 ness, and we create our own failures. We fear we 
 shall not have money enough to pay our bills for 
 the current month, and we generally lack something 
 because we have created that lack. We fear bad 
 luck, disasters, and death, and it is indeed a wonder 
 that man has not swept himself off this planet 
 through his fearful creations. The offsprings of fear 
 are the creatures and creations of this objective 
 mind; and the subjective mind which is within the 
 objective mind accepts the unfortunate creations, 
 believes the misrepresentations, and unites its own 
 forces with those of the objective mind in bringing 
 the pictured calamities into real external existence. 
 For example, I once knew a little girl who was 
 named after her aunt, and her mother often said 
 to the child: "I hope you will not have a cancer, 
 and die with it, as your aunt did." After a time a 
 small bunch appeared on the child's cheek follow- 
 ing an abrasure and her mother said : "That looks 
 as if it might become a cancer." After awhile, when 
 the child's attention was called to the tiny bunch on 
 her face, she would gravely declare that it was her 
 cancer. Her mother had suggested the thought, 
 and the little one had accepted it. When she grew 
 to womanhood the cancer developed, as the mother 
 
74 The History and Power of Mind. 
 
 and child had feared it would, and it had to be re- 
 moved. 
 
 I knew a man who was very fortunate in busi- 
 ness and was successful in everything he undertook. 
 One day a friend said to him: "Your luck can't 
 always go one way." Very soon he began to think 
 about that remark, and after awhile he accepted it 
 as a prophecy, and then began looking for his good 
 luck to change to bad. Soon little things began to 
 go wrong, and every time some misfortune came 
 to him he remembered what his friend had said. 
 Then he commenced looking for mishaps every- 
 where, and within five years from the time he ac- 
 cepted the unfortunate suggestion he was ruined 
 financially and physically. 
 
 Here are three rules which it might be well for 
 you to remember in this connection : 
 
 First. The dominant consciousness always con- 
 trols the creations. 
 
 Second. The environment shows which conscious- 
 ness controls. 
 
 Third. Ignorance of the laws of life excuses no 
 one. 
 
 If you continue to create ignorantly you will suf- 
 fer the same as though you knew the law, because 
 an unwise use of the law brings unfortunate results 
 the same as the wise use of the law brings good re- 
 sults. God always gives you in time precisely what 
 you create, and if you allow your objective mind to 
 do the creating you must accept its creations ; your 
 ignorance will not excuse you. If you should kill 
 
Dual Mind and Its Origin. 75 
 
 a man because you were angry, whether you knew 
 it was against the law of the State, or not, you would 
 be punished. It is the same with the moral law. 
 Both your minds can create good, but the objective 
 mind usually does not do so until it has been prop- 
 erly trained. The subjective mind of man must con- 
 trol the objective mind and its fears before he can 
 make pictures that will bring him pleasant environ- 
 ment. Every time an unpleasant thought or fear 
 comes to your mind, banish it. Every time a thought 
 of disease comes, blot it out. You can do it, be- 
 cause you have the divine power, and can control 
 your objective mind which is your instrument and 
 vehicle. If a mental picture of disease comes into 
 your mind and you let it remain, it will become a 
 physical reality; but if you destroy it the moment 
 you see it, nothing can come from it. In the place 
 of a picture that you do not like, make one that 
 you do like. Make your thought picture, and God, 
 in time, will fulfill your desires thus expressed. But 
 you never will be successful, you never will reach 
 the highest of your possibilities until you control 
 your own objective mind and its forces. How to 
 do that we will take up in the next lecture, which 
 we will call "The Art of Self-Control." 
 
 One more word in regard to the dual man, which 
 is mind. This dual nature of mind or man will ex- 
 plain many of the contradictions of human nature. 
 It will give a full explanation of original sin, which 
 is nothing more nor less than the uncontrolled ani- 
 
76 The History and Power of Mind. 
 
 mal nature of the objective mind, which expresses 
 itself whenever and wherever the opportunity is 
 given, until it has been disciplined. If you want a 
 colt to become a racehorse you will take great care 
 to have it thoroughly broken and trained before you 
 enter it for a race; and still you permit the animal 
 objective mind of your own nature to remain un- 
 trained, and to dominate you while you are trying 
 to use it in the race of life. 
 
 If you remember the distinction of this dual na- 
 ture of mind you will understand what has para- 
 lyzed the force of the Christian Scientists and has 
 filled them with great terror. They describe a some- 
 thing outside of Deity that is not divine, but which 
 creates, but can only create evil. They do not know 
 where it comes from ; they merely know it is in man. 
 That cult calls it malicious animal magnetism, and 
 makes of it a personal devil; but it is nothing but 
 the objective mind of man, uncontrolled. It is a 
 part of the Universal Consciousness, and therefore 
 not devoid of good. It is more ignorant than bad, 
 and makes mistaken creations in its undeveloped 
 state. 
 
 Understanding the lower nature of man, you un- 
 derstand the nature of evil. Evil is but the crea- 
 tions through ignorance of this objective mind. It 
 is a misdirection of the creative forces; it is the 
 permitting of the unenlightened animal mind to 
 make creations. Many of the old theological ques- 
 tions and the Christian and Mental Science ques- 
 
Dual Mind and Its Origin. 
 
 77 
 
 tions of modern times are understood, and are ex- 
 plainable, when one understands the dual mind of 
 man. 
 
LECTURE FOUR. 
 THE ART OF SELF-CONTROL. 
 
 One of the reputed wisest men that ever lived said : 
 "He that is slow to anger is better than the mighty ; 
 and he that ruleth his spirit than he that taketh a 
 city." Of course I refer to Solomon. 
 
 This lecture on "The Art of Self-Control" might 
 be said to be an amplification of that utterance of 
 Solomon. I am free to admit that it is much easier 
 to talk about self-control than it is to practice it, 
 but, nevertheless, there are certain ways whereby 
 we can, in a measure, exercise self-control. The fact 
 that Solomon made the remark quoted does not ap- 
 peal to one particularly, unless one can see the rea- 
 son for so acting. There are persons who, if they 
 read in the Scriptures that certain things should be 
 done, will do them because the Scriptures com- 
 mand them to be done. And there are persons 
 who will do things because their parents or someone 
 whom they love or honor says such a thing should 
 be done. In such cases the effort is but a perfunc- 
 tory one, unless a reason for so acting be given, and 
 very little good comes of the obedience to the com- 
 mand under either of those circumstances. Let us 
 see if there is a reason for Solomon's aphorism. 
 
 It goes without saying that no one can be truly 
 great who has not the power of self-control. It does 
 7 8 
 
 
The Art of Self-Control. 79 
 
 not matter how many virtues a man may have, if 
 he allows himself to give way to paroxysms of an- 
 ger and loses his self-control at critical moments, 
 his greatness becomes largely diminished; neither 
 can he become really successful in any chosen field 
 or line of work unless he has first developed self- 
 control. Napoleon said if he could keep his anger 
 below his chin he could control men. In other 
 words, when his emotions became dominant then 
 self-control was lost and when he lost control of 
 himself he had no power to control others. Grant's 
 great strength lay in his power of self-control at 
 critical moments. George Dewey destroyed the 
 Spanish Fleet quickly and completely because he 
 controlled himself first and afterward his men. His 
 command to his Captain was : "When you are ready, 
 Gridley, you may fire." Imagine, if you can, a 
 statesman who has not developed this art of self- 
 control and you will find that at the moment he 
 needs self-mastery most it utterly deserts him. Im- 
 agine one of the great financiers of this country not 
 having sufficient control over his tongue to keep 
 his plans secret, and how long would he be a factor 
 in the world of finance? 
 
 In the case of physical health, unless there is an 
 approximate control of the emotions, there will 
 never be permanent good health, because there can- 
 not be perfect health without perfect self-control. 
 The reactions which naturally follow outbursts of 
 emotions bring about physical disorder; if not im- 
 mediately, then in the course of time. And above 
 
8o The History and Power of Mind. 
 
 all, there can be no progress made in Occultism un- 
 less there be self-control ; and that which really de- 
 termines the growth of a student is his power to 
 control himself. Without this power, intuition can- 
 not be fully awakened, clairvoyance and clairaudi- 
 ence cannot manifest and his development is other- 
 wise greatly retarded. A student cannot make use 
 of the higher forces of nature unless he becomes 
 self-controlled first. ' A mental healer cannot assist 
 or relieve a patient so long as he is in a perturbed 
 condition of mind himself. A student cannot dom- 
 inate his own body unless his mind is poised and 
 undisturbed. He cannot concentrate on a person 
 at a distance and get his thoughts, unless he has the 
 power to make his own objective mind quiescent 
 while the power of concentration is put into action. 
 Some of the reasons I have given why we should 
 master the art of self-control may not interest or 
 appeal to many of you from an intellectual stand- 
 point, but here is one that may. Every time you 
 lose your self-control, your aura or photosphere be- 
 comes so actively inharmonious that all the crea- 
 tions you wish to draw to you are repelled. You 
 cannot be a successful creator upon the spiritual, 
 mental or physical planes unless you are able to 
 control your emotions sufficiently to enable that 
 which you have created to come to you. Another 
 reason for exercising self-control is this: One can 
 never escape from pain until self-control is acquired. 
 One can never reach the place of peace until the 
 conquest of self is made. 
 
The Art of Self-Contral 81 
 
 As understood by the Occultist, self-control is the 
 control of the objective mind by the subjective 
 mind. Another way of expressing the same thing 
 is to say that self-control is the control of the emo- 
 tions by the higher mind. This latter statement may 
 seem more tangible to you. Sensations and emo- 
 tions are the manifestations of the objective mind 
 of man as we have heretofore seen. 
 
 One complete conquest of the objective mind by 
 the subjective mind is sufficient to establish 
 self-mastery. In other words, we do not have a 
 new objective mind to conquer in each natural in- 
 carnation. To illustrate this let us take hydrogen 
 to represent the objective mind and oxygen to rep- 
 resent the subjective mind. Now the time for the 
 union of the two minds has come and the oxygen 
 blends with the hydrogen making a drop of water. 
 The union of the two in the drop of water corre- 
 sponds to the union which makes the real inner 
 man. This drop of water may be at one time in 
 a clay jar, at another time in an iron vessel, and 
 another day in a crockery bowl, and then in a Dres- 
 den cup; it is the same drop of water no matter 
 what its environment may be. And so it is during 
 all your different incarnations; there is but one 
 entity, the psychic man, who is composed of these 
 two minds incarnating together in different physi- 
 cal bodies ; and if you once conquer your objective 
 mind you will be its ruler throughout eternity. 
 Looked at in this light, it does not seem such a 
 hard thing to do when you consider that you have 
 
82 The History and Power of Mind. 
 
 only one conquest to make. But while there may 
 be but one conquest there will be many battles to 
 fight and it is during these battles that victory is 
 constantly shifting, sometimes being on one side 
 and sometimes on the other; but finally the con- 
 quest must be made by the subjective mind. 
 
 In the early part of our evolution the pleasures 
 of physical and animal life seem to be greater than 
 the pain and consequently the subjective mind, in 
 order that it might receive the pleasures of sensa- 
 tion, permits the objective mind to have absolute 
 dominion. But any force grows with use and the 
 objective mind, as it manifests itself more and more, 
 becomes so strong that finally the reactions that 
 follow pleasure bring more pain than pleasure, and 
 the subjective mind awakens to the situation and 
 begins to demand a way out of pain. We have been 
 indulging in these sensual pleasures during all the 
 ages past; life after life we have given way to 
 the objective mind, and have allowed it absolute 
 sway and dominion, because we thought there was 
 more pleasure to be had out of life in that way. 
 But reactions came and pain taught us that there 
 is a better way to live. Pain is the evidence that 
 the objective mind has not been fully conquered. 
 
 In the last lecture you were shown some of the 
 characteristics of both minds, but there are a few 
 other facts which I will mention which may possi- 
 bly help you to identify yourselves with the sub- 
 jective mind, or your real self. The subjective 
 mind is the "I am I" of man ; it is the self-conscious- 
 
The Art of Self-Control. 83 
 
 ness, or that part of him which studies the states of 
 his consciousness and modes of mind. It is the 
 center of consciousness in him and until it has been 
 awakened there can be no self-control. Emotions 
 will not control themselves, and, as the term implies, 
 there must be a Self which can control them. There 
 are two aspects of both these minds, the positive 
 and the negative. In the subjective mind the nega- 
 tive side is the intellectual and the positive side is 
 the will. But at this period in our history the in- 
 tellectual side of our natures is awakened and the 
 will is not. The objective mind also has two as- 
 pects, the negative or reasoning side, and the posi- 
 tive side or desire. These two aspects in the ob- 
 jective mind are blended to a large extent and be- 
 cause they are thus united that mind is strong. 
 
 Our first great object should be to awaken the 
 will portion or force aspect of the subjective mind, 
 in order that the will and the intellect, united, may 
 control the objective mind. There is force enough 
 in the positive side of this subjective mind to ac- 
 complish anything it desires and therefore it is to 
 our interest to awaken this latent but tremendous 
 force in ourselves. Let us see how it works. I say 
 I wish to do something. That is the desire or the 
 positive side of my objective mind expressing itself. 
 But another aspect of my mind replies: "No, you 
 must not do that because it is not right." Here are 
 certain aspects of my two minds in activity, the 
 desire or positive portion of my objective mind and 
 the intellectual or negative portion of my subjective 
 
84 The History and Power of Mind. 
 
 mind ; and if my will or positive portion of my sub- 
 jective mind is not awakened, it will be more than 
 likely that the positive side of my objective mind 
 will win the battle. But if the positive side of my 
 objective mind says I want to do something, and 
 my will or the positive side of my subjective says : 
 "You do not want to do anything of the kind and 
 you shall not'' then there is put into action a greater 
 force than desire and the desire is overcome by the 
 higher or positive side of my subjective mind the 
 will. 
 
 The emotions are natural forces on their proper 
 plane; and because they are natural many persons 
 think it unnecessary to control them ; and many who 
 would like to control them do not know how be- 
 cause they do not understand their own natures. 
 Because a thing is natural is no reason why it should 
 not be controlled. Electricity is a natural force. 
 Used properly for illuminating purposes, it is a very 
 good thing. But it is a natural force and can be 
 used to destroy human bodies and valuable prop- 
 erty also, so there may be a perversion of natural 
 forces through the misuse of them, or by not con- 
 trolling them. To understand our emotions we must 
 analyze them, since they seem to make up the great- 
 er portion of ourselves, and their name is legion. In 
 appearance they are many, and yet, on close analy- 
 sis, we find only four basic ones and the battle will 
 not seem so hard if we can realize this. 
 
 The first great emotion, the one that causes us 
 the most needless suffering, is Fear. The second 
 
The Art of Self -Control. 85 
 
 cardinal emotion is Sensuousness. The third basic 
 emotion is Sex Desire; and the fourth, and most 
 subtle of all, is Vanity. These are the basic ele- 
 ments of the emotional nature. You cannot con- 
 ceive of any emotion that has not its origin in one 
 or more of these four. Let us briefly examine the 
 nature of each of these emotions, since the larger 
 part of the actions of mankind are directly attribu- 
 table to one or more of them. 
 
 Fear is the cause of most anger, most jealousy, 
 most murder, failure, theft, doubt, discouragement, 
 despondency and many other lesser inharmonious 
 conditions. Analyze any one of these states of 
 mind, and you will find that fear is the father of it. 
 Eliminate fear and you have destroyed the root or 
 basis for many of the emotions which lead men 
 astray. Begin your fight directly upon fear not 
 the many phases of it and a tremendous amount of 
 force will be saved; for it must be conquered be- 
 fore very much will be accomplished in life. You re- 
 member you were taught in another lecture that 
 the mind is magnetic, and draws to itself whatever 
 it frequently thinks about. When you are constantly 
 fearing something, you are drawing toward you the 
 thing you fear, and the reason humanity has not 
 been swept from this planet long ago is because 
 it has shifted its fears from one object to another 
 so often that it has never held to one thing long 
 enough to destroy itself. 
 
 To accomplish rapidly the destruction of this 
 great enemy it is well to begin by controlling some 
 
86 ' The History and Power of Mind. 
 
 of its grosser forms, such as physical cowardice. 
 Great numbers of men and women are inwardly 
 the most wretched cowards and yet suppress the 
 external expression of their fears because ashamed 
 of them. Here is where the fear of public opinion is 
 greater than the fear of something else, and the 
 emotion is not conquered but shifted. Try to con- 
 quer your cowardice, because it is an enemy to you 
 and is retarding your development. 
 
 Then there are very few persons who do not fear 
 someone. You may not be conscious of the fact, 
 but if you stop to think, you will see that it is true. 
 You dread to meet Mr. Blank because you do not 
 know what he will think of you, or because he is 
 wealthy and you are not, and you are afraid you 
 cannot make so great a display as he can. Or per- 
 haps you have heard that Mr. Blank is a great states- 
 man, and you are in awe of statesmen ; so you stam- 
 mer and grow red and wish you were a thousand 
 miles away when you are introduced to him. The 
 first thing to do toward overcoming this fear of 
 persons is to declare, "I am not afraid of Mr. 
 Blank, nor of anyone else." Then calling to 
 mind the image of Mr. Blank, say to it as if he 
 were there in person, "Mr. Blank, you have not the 
 power to make me uncomfortable, and I am not 
 afraid of you," and continue to repeat this asser- 
 tion till your perturbation has subsided and you feel 
 that you could face him without a tremor of fear or 
 embarrassment. 
 
 Many women are afraid of mice. I have seen a 
 
The Art of Self -Control. 87 
 
 room full of women put to the most ignominious 
 flight, screaming like lunatics because a tiny mouse 
 ran across the floor. To cowards of that class I 
 would suggest that you put a mouse into a cage 
 and keep it where you can look at it. Examine its 
 little body through a magnifying glass and make 
 friends with it, declaring constantly while you are 
 looking at it that you are not afraid of mice; that 
 there is nothing about them for you to fear; that 
 they are small centers in consciousness and you are 
 a larger center in the same consciousness ; that the 
 same life principle that sustains them sustains you ; 
 and after you have come to a realizing sense of your 
 relative positions your fears will fade away, never 
 to return. 
 
 When you have eliminated the grosser forms of 
 fear, then attack the finer forms, such as fear of 
 the unseen or the unknown. Many persons' lives 
 are made utterly wretched because of their fear of 
 the future. They are continually expecting things 
 that never happen. Others are afraid of the criti- 
 cism of the world, and a common question on their 
 lips is: "What will people think?" You should re- 
 member that the world always criticises and con- 
 demns everything and everybody that it does not 
 understand. You must declare, therefore, that you 
 are not afraid of the criticism of any individual nor 
 of the public at large; that you are not dependent 
 upon anyone for your health, wealth or happiness; 
 and that the approval and disapproval of other per- 
 sons, whether collective or individual, are alike to 
 
88 The History and Power of Mind. 
 
 you. If you declare this earnestly and often, you 
 will overcome all fear of criticism. 
 
 Fear being eliminated, we next turn our attention 
 to Sensuousness, which is the result of a perversion 
 of natural forces. The animal indulges his senses 
 in order that he may live; but man indulges his 
 senses not only that he may live, but also to get 
 pleasure from his indulgences; and it is the over- 
 indulgence that constitutes the perversion of this 
 natural force. Reaction seldom follows the natural 
 indulgence of the senses for the purpose of living. 
 If a creature eats because he is hungry and stops 
 when the hunger is appeased, there will be no re- 
 action; but when the senses are indulged more for 
 pleasure than from necessity, and there has been an 
 over-stimulation, a reaction always follows the in- 
 dulgence. Asceticism is one of the moral reactions 
 from sensuousness. In many places in the Orient, 
 especially in India, asceticism is taught as the proper 
 method of living. Many schools of philosophy in 
 America have adopted this Eastern teaching. This 
 is the other extreme, and, like most extreme views, 
 is not productive of the best results; hence the 
 Western school of Occultists does not agree with 
 the Eastern school on this point, which, after all, is 
 but a question of the method of development. Sup- 
 pression of the senses is not the best plan, and West- 
 ern Occultists have found that better results are 
 gained from regulation of the senses. By regulation 
 is meant a moderate indulgence in all that pertains 
 to the normal use of the senses ; but never yield to 
 
The Art of Self-Control. 89 
 
 over-indulgence. In this manner you may have all 
 the pleasures of life without the reactions. Sack- 
 cloth and ashes do not indicate that the wearer of 
 them has become spiritual. To deny the body its 
 natural functions, or to whip or torture it, does not 
 make a person wise nor good ; and there is no more 
 reason in trying to gain spirituality through asceti- 
 cism than there is through over-indulgence. Use 
 your senses properly and enjoy all the harmless 
 things of life, and let the mind not the desire 
 determine the extent of the use of the senses. This 
 is regulation, the teaching of Western Occultism. 
 
 The third great basic emotion that mankind has 
 to learn to control is sex desire. This, too, is a natu- 
 ral force, and is a part of the force of life and love ; 
 it is a part of the force of magnetic attraction, mani- 
 fested in the Absolute, and manifestating in every 
 part of It according to the nature of its vehicle. In 
 the minerals it is chemical affinity ; in the animals it 
 manifests as the desire for procreation. In man this 
 force, like sensuousness, should be regulated. Here 
 again Western Occultism differs from the Eastern 
 schools, where asceticism is taught. In man this 
 emotion should be so well regulated that it should 
 become a creative force instead of an animal desire 
 for procreation. I do not mean that this force should 
 only be transmuted into mental power, but that it 
 should be used to consciously create bodies, un- 
 marred by passion, for the use of egos who desire 
 to reincarnate. Use this natural force, but do not 
 abuse it; regulate it, but do not eradicate it. The 
 
90 The History and Power of Mind. 
 
 normal condition of man requires that no part of 
 his body should become atrophied or useless, but 
 that every part of him, whether spiritual, mental, or 
 physical, shall be in a perfect condition. 
 
 The fourth great emotion that must be conquered 
 before perfect self-control is acquired, is vanity. This 
 emotion is so subtle that at times it almost baffles 
 us. The peculiarity of this fault is that the victim 
 does not recognize his defect of character. You can 
 seldom convince a vain person that he is vain ; and 
 because of its subtlety, it is the hardest and the very 
 last emotion we have to conquer. The first aspect 
 of this fault is the grosser or physical vanity which 
 pertains to admiration for its own particular attract- 
 iveness of feature, form or face. It is the feeling 
 which prompts you to wear a particular style of 
 dress, not because the dress is beautiful, and be- 
 cause you love the beautiful, but because you believe 
 others will admire you in it. It is the same feeling 
 which would cause a person to mutilate his horse's 
 tail in order to attract the attention of the public 
 to his horse and then to himself as the owner of 
 the horse. This grosser form of vanity we can 
 conquer if we wish to, because occasionally it is 
 revealed to us by our friends or enemies, and when 
 it is discovered it can be eradicated. But this is only 
 the beginning of the battle, because next beyond 
 and still more subtle, is another phase of vanity 
 which is mental, and this is still harder to recognize 
 in ourselves. 
 
 Mental vanity expresses itself in all mental forms. 
 
The Art of Self-Control. 91 
 
 If a man discovers that he is in a small degree su- 
 perior to his fellow men he feels it and often looks 
 with contempt upon his weaker brothers. He tries 
 to dominate those whom he believes are his inferiors 
 in intellect, forgetting the fact that he himself is 
 but a Cosmic infant as compared with the souls who 
 have passed in evolution beyond him. And it some- 
 times requires many incarnations and many sad ex- 
 periences to eradicate this defect of character, which 
 really limits his evolution. 
 
 Then comes spiritual vanity, and this is the force 
 which actuates all reformers. It is this vanity which 
 makes men say: "All is wrong with the world." 
 It is another way of saying the Supreme Conscious- 
 ness is wrong in Its management of terrestrial 
 things and / must go forth into the world and right 
 it. God has made mistakes, and / shall correct 
 them. / shall lift all humanity up to my plane and 
 help all mankind to my level. / will convert the 
 world to my views, and the people shall accept 
 my conception of God, my politics, or my religion 
 and men shall be proselyted to my truth. Spiritual 
 vanity comes in such a subtle guise that one does 
 not recognize the motive that lies behind one's ef- 
 forts; and yet the time comes in the evolution of 
 that particular individual when his spiritual vanity 
 must pass away, as it usually does, in martyrdom. 
 There comes a time in that soul's career when this 
 spiritual vanity is burned out of his nature, and he 
 becomes a perfected, self-conscious center in the 
 Universal Consciousness, impersonally working for 
 
92 The History and Power of Mind. 
 
 the raising up of the whole of mankind according 
 to the Divine plan. Here is the true At-One-Ment, 
 where your saviours pass away from the adulation 
 and worship of men and become the unseen and 
 generally unknown workers for humanity the Si- 
 lent Brotherhood who teach, inspire, and raise hu- 
 manity as fast as it can receive, with never a word 
 of praise, never a word of recognition, never a word 
 of thanks or of appreciation from the world for 
 their sacrifices and their efforts. Spiritual Vanity 
 must pass away before perfection is reached. 
 
 At present we may battle with the first two forms 
 of vanity and leave this last aspect to be conquered 
 in some other incarnation. 
 
 Thus we have these four great basic emotions 
 which must be controlled. To do this we must learn 
 to exercise our wills. There are two very good 
 rules by which, if persistently followed, self-control 
 can be attained. The first is, never speak until you 
 have thought with your subjective mind. It will 
 be impossible for you to speak before you have 
 thought at all, because you cannot have a material 
 manifestation of speech until there has been some 
 mental action. But do not let the emotions of the 
 objective mind become expressed in words before 
 you have thought with the subjective mind. In 
 other words, let your thought be divorced from emo- 
 tion before you attempt to express your thoughts in 
 speech. For example: You walk out of a warm 
 room, suddenly the cold air strikes you, and 
 immediately you exclaim, "I am catching cold!" 
 
The Art of Self-Control. 93 
 
 This remark is the offspring of the emotion fear and 
 is not the result of your becoming conscious of a 
 little fresh air. The objective mind commences to 
 manifest fear and it speaks into existence a crea- 
 tion of sickness. Now if you will stop and think 
 with your subjective mind before you exclaim into 
 existence that cold, and claim it for your own, you 
 will destroy the fear which would be the father of 
 it, and no cold could be created for you. 
 
 The second rule is, never act until after you have 
 thought with your subjective mind. Acting upon 
 emotion usually leads to regret and is always fol- 
 lowed by a reaction. A thousand cases could be 
 cited to prove the truth of this statement and I have 
 no doubt that you have thought of many examples. 
 These two rules, if put into practice even occasion- 
 ally, will help you ; but if you practice them con- 
 stantly you will be surprised to see how soon you 
 will begin to dominate the four cardinal emotions; 
 and after they are destroyed, all the others must 
 disappear, because they are but branches from these 
 four principal emotions. 
 
 There are certain aids which will assist you to 
 carry out these rules. First, you should realize that 
 all uncontrolled emotions are the result of ignorance 
 or undevelopment ; and this knowledge will rob 
 them of their power over you. You will know that 
 you are at the emotional point in your evolution, 
 which is an indication of ignorance of your own 
 power of self-control. Then you will soon begin 
 
94 The History and Power of Mind. 
 
 to see the need of development and set about cor- 
 recting the fault. 
 
 A child fears the dark because he does not know 
 its nature or its cause. If he is carried into a dark 
 room, and the light is turned on, when he sees noth- 
 ing there to injure him, his fear is immediately dis- 
 sipated. His fear was banished when his ignorance 
 was destroyed. If you can show a person that there 
 is no "bad luck" except that which he has created, 
 and that the "evil" he fears he builds for himself, 
 immediately you destroy the power he has given 
 to these conceptions. If a man is vain of his knowl- 
 edge and he can be made to see that the field of 
 knowledge is unlimited, and that his vanity over the 
 small amount that he possesses is but an indication 
 of his great ignorance, immediately his vanity dis- 
 appears. So it is by enlightenment that any or all 
 our emotions are controlled or eliminated from us. 
 
 The second great aid is this: If we understand 
 what habit is and know the law which underlies it, 
 and if we know that much of our yielding to our 
 lower natures and our lack of self-control is a 
 matter of habit, we shall be able to destroy habits 
 much sooner than if we do not understand them. 
 I cannot enter very fully into this subject at this 
 time, but will give you a good working basis to be- 
 gin with. There are two elements that enter into 
 the formation of a habit. The first is what we may 
 call the law of periodicity, or periodical return, and 
 the second is the initial impulse. The law of period- 
 icity causes a thought or an act to be repeated within 
 
The Art of Self -Control. 95 
 
 a determinate time. The intensity with which the 
 thought was projected, or the act performed, deter- 
 mines the time in which the tendency to repeat itself 
 will manifest. 
 
 Let me try to make this plain to you. Look at an 
 electric light for a moment then shut your eyes 
 and note the effects. Immediately there is a mental 
 vibration or picture of a bright light that passes 
 away after a short time; now it reappears, to 
 pass away again. Again it appears and disap- 
 pears, growing dimmer with each appearance, until 
 finally it fades out altogether. This is an example 
 of the action of the law of periodicity, and every 
 thought, every feeling and every tendency will re- 
 peat itself at given periods of time according to the 
 intensity of the initial impulse that gave it birth. 
 Recognizing this law, if you will remember the ex- 
 act time your habits repeat themselves, you will be 
 prepared to overcome them with greater success. 
 What is called the association of ideas is another 
 illustration of the working of the law of periodicity. 
 For example, if we go to our room, or to any place 
 where we can be alone, and send out an intense 
 thought at nine o'clock in the morning, or at any 
 special hour, we will find on the following day at 
 the same hour that we will be inclined to repeat 
 the thought. If we yield to our inclination each day, 
 at the end of a week the habit will be formed and it 
 will require some effort to resist the temptation to 
 repeat the practice we have begun. This is the way 
 habits are formed through the cyclic law bringing 
 
96 The History and Power of Mind. 
 
 back to us the thoughts and things we ourselves 
 have created. Someone may say to me, "You are 
 going to lose something," and my heart will almost 
 stop beating as the picture is presented to my mind. 
 The next time I see the person who made the sug- 
 gestion of loss that same picture will rise up in my 
 mind because I associate that person with the sug- 
 gestion made to me. When I pass the place where 
 we were when the suggestion was made I will re- 
 member it and tremble with fear, and after awhile 
 the habit of thought will become so firmly estab- 
 lished with me that I will think of the loss predicted 
 until the picture materializes, and becomes a reality 
 on the objective plane. 
 
 But the same law which helped you form the 
 habit will help you overcome it if you but reverse 
 the rule in this way : When the mental picture re- 
 curs, destroy it by denying that it can materialize. 
 For example : If you have been holding a picture of 
 loss, declare that you cannot lose anything that be- 
 longs to you ; and when your picture of loss comes 
 up, refuse to look at it and put into its place a pic- 
 ture of something that you want. If you have a 
 habit of thinking of yourself as an invalid, destroy 
 that habit of thought by picturing yourself in the 
 possession of perfect health. If you have created 
 the habit of picturing death for yourself, or for a 
 friend, reverse the picture and see him and yourself 
 well and happy; and the law of periodicity will 
 bring your new pictures along with the old ones, 
 since they are associated together. Each time both 
 
The Art of Self -Control. 97 
 
 pictures appear, look at the new and refuse to see 
 the old and soon the old picture will fade out and 
 disappear and a new order of things will be estab- 
 lished. 
 
 The third great aid in conquering the emotions is 
 through the power of suggestion. Heretofore the 
 objective mind has been making most of the sug- 
 gestions which the subjective mind has passively 
 received. For example: You feel a draft of cold 
 air, and immediately your objective mind suggests 
 to your subjective mind, which is really you, that 
 you are taking cold ; you accept the suggestion, and 
 reply, "Yes, that is true ; I shall take cold if I sit in 
 this draft;" and immediately you commence to see 
 the picture of yourself with a cold. You have ac- 
 cepted the suggestion and claimed the creation of 
 the objective mind for your own, and there is noth- 
 ing that will prevent the picture from materializing 
 for you. But if you will use the same amount of 
 force in refusing to accept the suggestion of your ob- 
 jective mind that you do fighting the cold after it 
 has materialized you will not let it materialize at all. 
 
 If you desire to conquer the emotion sensuous- 
 ness, and your objective mind insists upon gratify- 
 ing its appetite for the pleasure of eating, you should 
 take the position that you do not want any more 
 food and should suggest to your objective mind that 
 it does not want any more. Speak to it as if it were 
 another person or a child. If you have the habit 
 of drinking, or smoking, and you wish to overcome 
 these habits, suggest to your objective mind that 
 
98 The History and Power of Mind. 
 
 it does not want to drink or smoke; that there is 
 no real pleasure to be derived from the gratifica- 
 tion of these tastes or appetites, and you will soon 
 see, if you persist in this use of suggestion, that 
 your desires will change, and you will conquer 
 sensuousness without a great deal of inconvenience 
 or annoyance. 
 
 There are certain declarations and suggestions 
 that most persons who work along this line find 
 extremely beneficial and I will give you a few of them. 
 Suggest to your objective mind : "I am your mas- 
 ter, and you are my servant, my instrument, and 
 you must obey me." If you persist in making this 
 declaration you will soon begin to feel that you are 
 master, and your objective mind must accept it as 
 the truth; and as soon as both minds recognize the 
 truth of that declaration from that moment self- 
 control and self-mastery is assured. 
 
 Another way to take from the objective mind its 
 power over the subjective mind is to declare "You 
 cannot control me," or "You cannot disturb or 
 make me uncomfortable." The word "cannot" ex- 
 presses limitation always ; used in the proper place, 
 it destroys wrong creations ; used improperly, it lim- 
 its one's power to progress. It is useless to argue 
 with the objective mind, because it is a waste of 
 force; one might as well argue with an animal and 
 expect to convince it of the error of its ways. The 
 only way to be successful in conquering it is to 
 command and compel it to obey, and when it at- 
 tempts to argue with you command it to be silent. 
 
The Art of Self-Control. 99 
 
 Say "Peace, be still," and let that be your answer to 
 all its protests and arguments ; and the greater the 
 vehemence with which you speak these words, the 
 sooner will the objective mind obey you. 
 
 Separate yourself from your objective mind in 
 thought, and for convenience while learning to mas- 
 ter it, identify it with your body. Realize that you 
 are separate from, and superior to, it ; treat it as if it 
 were a child entrusted to your care by Deity to 
 educate and enlighten. While you are putting into 
 practice these suggestions, demand daily from the 
 Supreme Power the highest wisdom that you are 
 capable of receiving, and "all things whatsoever 
 ye shall ask in prayer, believing, ye shall receive." 
 
LECTURE FIVE. 
 
 THE LAW OF RE-EMBODIMENT. 
 
 Herbert Spencer, in his "First Principles," dis- 
 cusses force and matter, and after a long disserta- 
 tion he accepts as a fact the indestructibility of 
 matter and the persistency of force. The idea that 
 he develops is that it makes no difference how often 
 matter and force may change form, nevertheless 
 they are persistent; therefore he argues that there 
 is only a certain amount of force and matter in the 
 Universe. He concludes his discussion with the 
 opinion that in his judgment the whole Universe 
 is an unfoldment from the homogeneous to the 
 heterogeneous and back to the homogeneous again ; 
 and these respective periods he designates as "alter- 
 nate eras of evolution and dissolution." 
 
 In his statement that the whole Universe is a 
 manifestation of alternate eras of evolution and dis- 
 solution, Mr. Spencer has touched upon an Occult 
 truth, a fragment of Occult knowledge. For the 
 Occultist teaches that there is no such thing as 
 eternity, as understood by the Western mind; that 
 nothing can go on working forever and forever with- 
 out rest. His idea being that everything moves ac- 
 cording to given law, within certain periods, and 
 that there are actions and reactions throughout all 
 nature. Those of you who are familiar with the 
 
The Law of Re-embodiment. IQI 
 
 Eastern philosophy, will remember that this same 
 thought is brought out there, and is described as 
 "the days and nights of Brahma." Occultism says 
 that the Great Consciousness manifests Itself peri- 
 odically as the Universe, and after each manifesta- 
 tion there comes a period of rest, a period of night ; 
 for even Divine Consciousness Itself must rest. 
 
 When the Night of Brahma is coming on, gradu- 
 ally the living Universe finds its life pulsations 
 growing slower and slower, and fainter and fainter ; 
 and one by one the planets fade from sight; one 
 by one the stars cease to give forth their light, and 
 the suns themselves grow dim. The Earth is rolled 
 up as a parchment, and men and gods and worlds 
 and suns all sink into sleep there are no thoughts 
 in the Great Mind. All is silence, rest, darkness. 
 Reaction has followed action ; the day's work has 
 been done throughout all parts of the Supreme, and 
 the Cosmic night has come. 
 
 This night of rest lasts Eons embracing thou- 
 sands and untold thousands of years; then comes 
 creation's dawn. There is a slight pulsation within 
 the Great Consciousness and there begins to be 
 the rudiments of the Universe. It is as though one 
 were standing in a great dark auditorium in the 
 center of which burns a flickering flame of light. It 
 is the only point of light to be seen in all that great 
 place; then away in the distance another flame ap- 
 pears, then another and another, till the heavy at- 
 mosphere begins to pulsate and soon every portion 
 of the room is illuminated, and that which was dark- 
 
102 The History and Power of Mind. 
 
 ness becomes light, and the non-existent exists and 
 becomes motion. You who have stood upon an 
 eminence and watched a city as darkness was set- 
 tling upon it saw, as the night advanced, one tiny 
 point of light after another appear, now here, now 
 there, until there was a great blaze of light through- 
 out the whole city, and where it had been obscura- 
 tion and gloom it became a brilliant illumination. 
 
 So it is with the Great Consciousness. From Its 
 innermost heart goes forth the pulsating life, and the 
 Solar Deities, in whom are embodied the greatest 
 power and wisdom that man can conceive, are awak- 
 ened to take up their part of the work in the new 
 day, and there a sun springs into existence, then 
 another, and another, until the whole Universe is 
 again brought into activity. These Deities radiate 
 the life force which thrills into activity the Planetary 
 Spirits, who also take up their work, and worlds 
 come forth into space again. These Spirits radiate 
 the life force that awakens the minds of men who 
 have slept through the long night of Brahma, and 
 they resume again their evolutionary journey. And 
 so the morning of a Cosmic Day has come. Deity 
 has awakened, and has planned the day. 
 
 The Cosmic Days are more or less alike, as are all 
 the days of men's years alike, except that each Cos- 
 mic Day is better than the one preceding it, since 
 each new period of evolution is an advance beyond 
 the one that passed before. Divine Mind images 
 within Itself, or pictures the new day, and thus cre- 
 ates the outline of the plan by which all things shall 
 
The Law of Re-embodiment. 103 
 
 evolve during that period. Then the greatest cen- 
 ters of consciousness take the plan as imaged by 
 Deity and carry into execution the idea of the Great 
 Architect. God thinks and the creative agencies 
 bring into existence the physical worlds according 
 to God's idea which they see. God wills and di- 
 vides into two parts which we have described in a 
 previous lecture as the particled and the unparticled 
 portions, and there is the force and matter ensouled 
 by consciousness. Then by their will power the 
 great centers of consciousness direct this force and 
 this matter into the different matrices that Deity has 
 planned, and the suns are formed to give forth light, 
 and the worlds are made for men and animals to 
 evolve upon. 
 
 The plans made by Deity in the dawn of each 
 Cosmic Day are what men call "Natural Laws/' 
 They are the ways in which Deity selects to mani- 
 fest during that particular Cosmic Day. These 
 plans emanating from the center of the Supreme 
 radiate throughout every part and portion of It; 
 and the law which governs the visible side of life 
 is the same law that governs the invisible side ; and 
 if you find a law operating in the realm of physics, 
 you may know that it also operates in the realm of 
 metaphysics. 
 
 And now we have seen how Divine Thought has 
 manifested Itself in physical re-embodiment and 
 how the law of periodicity has once again caused 
 thought to be embodied in form, and how thereafter 
 the law of periodicity makes itself felt everywhere 
 
104 The History and Power of Mind. 
 
 throughout the Cosmic Day. Take, for example, 
 the greatest conception of time that the human mind 
 is capable of actually grasping, the cyclic motion 
 of our sun. We find that it travels from a given 
 point in space through its orbit, and returns again 
 in about twenty-five thousand and nine hundred 
 years. The law of periodicity has caused that great 
 orb to go forth and return and a cycle has been 
 made. The moon also has its particular orbit as has 
 our Earth and all the planets that swing in space; 
 all are governed by the law of periodicity. Then 
 again there is history repeating itself, and man 
 forming his habits by a repetition of thought. And 
 as it is with the law of periodicity, so it is with all 
 the other impulses which are sent into the Uni- 
 verse by Deity; they continue to manifest over and 
 over again from the moment they are sent forth 
 until the last throb of the great Deific heart shall 
 be given and the Cosmic night shall come. The 
 impulses which form a Universe, persist throughout 
 the Universe, and manifest as the Laws of the Uni- 
 verse. 
 
 When we find that the Supreme Consciousness 
 re-embodies Itself for a new Cosmic Day we know 
 that the law of re-embodiment must apply to every 
 part and portion of the Universe; that re- 
 embodiment is a Cosmic Law, a law of nature. For 
 evidence of this truth let us study the planets. 
 Worlds are brought into existence by Planetary 
 Spirits or Elohim who see the Divine thought or 
 picture of worlds and use the images for matrices. 
 
The Law of Re-embodiment. 105 
 
 They then project their thoughts into these cen- 
 ters, thereby creating vortices, which, through the 
 intensity of their vibrations and the tremendous ve- 
 locity with which they revolve, draw from bound- 
 less space the tiny particles we call atoms, and these 
 seething masses of matter become huge balls of 
 flaming gases. After ages and ages have passed 
 these burning balls cool sufficiently to sustain vege- 
 table and animal life upon their surfaces. And 
 worlds, like the bodies of men, have their birth, their 
 childhood, maturity and finally death and disinte- 
 gration. When death comes to a world the life 
 principle commences to flow out of it through vari- 
 ous channels into space. It is seeking new centers 
 in which to re-embody itself; and with the passing 
 of the life force from a world we find disintegration 
 taking place. The atoms which composed the com- 
 pact mass of the external world become demagnet- 
 ized and fall away from each other, and finally drift 
 away into space to be attracted by other newer and 
 stronger magnetic centers, where they become re- 
 embodied in other worlds in which consciousness 
 may manifest. 
 
 Re-embodiment is a fact in nature, whether you 
 look at it from an Occult standpoint, or from that 
 of Herbert Spencer, with his indestructibility of 
 matter and force re-embodying themselves for the 
 purpose of evolution. This law of re-embodiment 
 manifests in all planes, upon all worlds or planets. 
 That we may comprehend it better, let us look at 
 the action of this law in the several kingdoms on 
 
io6 The History and Power of Mind. 
 
 this world of ours. Starting with the mineral king- 
 dom, we find there the lowest expression of em- 
 bodied consciousness on this planet, and as typical 
 of that kingdom we will consider the action of this 
 law in coal. Take some of this coal and burn it. 
 What is the result? The hard black mass becomes 
 changed into ash and gas. The ash returns to the 
 earth whence it came and again forms earth; and 
 the gas which was liberated by the burning comes 
 into contact with the atmosphere under its new con- 
 dition and becomes separated into its four compo- 
 nent parts which we call oxygen, hydrogen, nitro- 
 gen and carbon. The oxygen and hydrogen unite 
 and descend again to earth as water. The nitrogen 
 and carbon unite and form the tissues of a plant 
 and again you find the original elements united, with 
 consciousness embodied in the new form, which is 
 now a plant. 
 
 Passing on to the vegetable kingdom we see here 
 the same law manifesting, but in a more pronounced 
 manner; for as consciousness becomes more indi- 
 vidualized more of God's plans must be mani- 
 fested through it. As Winter approaches, the life 
 force, which is the animating principle of vegeta- 
 tion, passes down into the roots. The leaves fall 
 to the ground and the consciousness which mani- 
 fested throughout the plant withdraws itself from 
 the external to the internal and lies dormant and 
 resting, waiting for the impulse which comes with 
 Spring to awaken and arouse it again into action 
 to bring it into the external that man's heart may 
 
The Law of Re-embodiment. 107 
 
 be gladdened by the beauty of its expression. As 
 the life force rises slowly from root to branch in the 
 bush or tree, we see the law at work bringing forth 
 new forms of life in the shape of leaf and bud and 
 we know that re-embodiment is taking place among 
 the shrubs and grasses and trees. 
 
 In the bulb family this same law works. The life 
 force sinks into the tiny bulb at the beginning of 
 Autumn and there it lies in silence and in darkness, 
 within that tiny sphere, till the soft breath of Spring 
 warms and raises its vibrations and arouses within 
 its center a desire to again express itself, to appear 
 once more in a newer and a more beautiful form 
 than that of the bulb. And so it begins to re-clothe 
 itself; it draws from earth and air such chemicals 
 as it needs to give material expression to its beauti- 
 ful soul or self, and "behold the lilies of the field; 
 they toil not, neither do they spin, yet Solomon in 
 all his glory was not arrayed like one of these," in 
 its re-embodiment. 
 
 Passing on to the animal kingdom we find the 
 tadpole and caterpillar. Both of these little crea- 
 tures are good examples of the working of this law. 
 They are individual consciousnesses; and before 
 your eyes the tadpole gradually changes its form 
 until it has a distinctly different body from the one 
 it had at first. Yet the new frog body that can 
 leap and swim and croak is animated by the same 
 consciousness that animated the wriggling little 
 form of the tadpole. The caterpillar, having a lim- 
 ited and loathsome form, desires a fuller and a bet- 
 
io8 The History and Power of Mind. 
 
 ter expression of itself and passes into a stupor or 
 sleep. Then slowly its old atoms give place to new, 
 which build a better form, until at last the same 
 consciousness which crawled and crept upon the 
 earth has re-clothed or re-embodied itself and with 
 wings of a golden hue it soars from earth to air. 
 And the re-embodiment of the butterfly from the 
 caterpillar is not only an illustration of the working 
 of the law of re-embodiment, but it is typical of the 
 evolution of the soul or mind of man which rises 
 from the lowest depths of ignorance or so-called sin, 
 to manhood and to godhood. 
 
 This same law is operative in the higher forms of 
 animal life and in the life of man ; for a law that is 
 a law of nature must persist throughout the Uni- 
 verse. The fact that we do not see the operation of 
 a law is no proof that the law has ceased to act. 
 Nor is the fact that this law manifests differently in 
 different kingdoms and forms evidence of the limita- 
 tion or non-existence of the law. Every law mani- 
 fests in each class or forms alike, but differs in its 
 manifestation in different classes of forms because 
 the consciousness within the form restricts but does 
 not prevent the manifestation. For example, the 
 law of gravity manifests the same in all iron, but 
 manifests differently in different kingdoms and sub- 
 stances. 
 
 Individualized consciousness not only re-embodies 
 itself constantly during earth life, but it re-embodies 
 itself after it drops its entire body. In other words, 
 it reincarnates. During the space of every seven 
 
The Law of Re-embodiment. 109 
 
 years, according to some schools of medicine, man 
 undergoes a complete change of body. Is he not 
 therefore in the process of re-embodying himself by 
 this constant renewal of his atoms? According to 
 his rates of vibration or as his thoughts are elevated 
 or debased does he draw new atoms into himself. 
 And after he has dropped one physical body that he 
 has drawn to himself is it surprising that he should 
 have the power to draw to himself another? Is the 
 fact that most men do not remember their past lives 
 a proof that they did not formerly exist? If so the 
 majority of men did not exist between the first and 
 third years of their present lives nor in a pre-natal 
 condition. The Occultists say that man does re- 
 member his past lives when his subjective mind con- 
 trols his objective mind and can function through 
 it for in the subjective is stored the memories of 
 past experiences. What we call "Conscience" is 
 but this memory of past experiences warning us not 
 to repeat former follies and mistakes. 
 
 Since we have spoken of the re-embodiment of 
 man by the term popularly known as reincarnation, 
 it may be well before we take up other aspects of 
 it to answer a question which is now in the minds 
 of a number of you, and that is: what becomes of 
 man between the times of his embodiments or incar- 
 nations? 
 
 As there are different states of matter in this ob- 
 jective physical world of ours, such as gases, liquids 
 and solids, so there are different states of matter 
 in the subjective world ; and these different grades 
 
no The History and Power of Mind. 
 
 do not lie separate and distinct from each other. 
 For example, on the physical plane there are condi- 
 tions where substances interblend, as it were, as they 
 do in a syphon bottle of aerated water, or in a water- 
 soaked sponge, where each substance occupies the 
 same space while lying within the other. Again, 
 we have the solid earth with certain waters within 
 and on the earth. Outside the earth we have water 
 or vapor in clouds and yet within both the earth and 
 the clouds is air or gases which extend still further 
 out into space. 
 
 On the subjective side of life there are finer forms 
 of matter which interpenetrate our earth, water and 
 gas. Around our earth there are belts or zones com- 
 posed of finer matter very much like the rings 
 around Saturn, and the densest of these rings inter- 
 penetrates our earth, while each of the other rings 
 extend further and further into space according to 
 its rarity and size. These rings are material, but 
 each is of a different tenuity of matter caused by 
 its different rates of vibration. We might crudely 
 picture our world as a porous wooden ball floating 
 in a tub of water. The water would correspond to 
 the first subjective plane and would not only sur- 
 round the ball, but it would be through the ball as 
 well. Outside the water and surrounding it would 
 be a belt of atmosphere representing the second 
 subjective plane and outside of that would be a belt 
 of ether representing the third subjective plane. 
 
 It is to these several belts that man goes between 
 his incarnations ; and it is to the first belt, that one 
 
The Law of Re-embodiment. in 
 
 which interpenetrates the earth, that the souls or 
 minds of the animals go. According to a man's 
 rate of vibration or specific gravity is he drawn into 
 one or another of those inner belts or spheres which 
 corresponds to, or is harmonious with, his own vi- 
 brations. The subjective belts or spheres are not, as 
 many think, for the growth and development of 
 man, but are places of rest where he reviews the 
 experiences and assimilates the knowledge gained 
 on earth. For it is impossible for man to pass be- 
 yond the photosphere of this earth and incarnate 
 upon other planets as some modern metaphysicians 
 claim he does until his vibrations, which control 
 his specific gravity, have become so high, so god- 
 like, that the law of gravity operating here can no 
 longer confine him to the earth or to the subjective 
 planes surrounding it. 
 
 A man's thoughts are the cause of his vibrations, 
 hence a man who is material, sensuous and sensual, 
 is by harmonious vibration drawn to the first sub- 
 jective plane and becomes earthbound. He can- 
 not rise higher than any other animal, and so he 
 remains in the first belt which surrounds and in- 
 terpenetrates the material world until he is ready 
 to reincarnate. But as a man's mentality over- 
 comes his emotions, in his course of evolution, and 
 as his subjective mind learns to control his object- 
 ive mind, he becomes more spiritual; his rates of 
 vibration become higher, and then when the time 
 comes to rest between incarnations he is drawn to 
 the belt which is of a higher rate of vibration, and 
 
U2 The History and Power of Mind. 
 
 goes further away from this earth. So, according 
 to the theologians, there is a Heaven and according 
 to Occultism there are several Heavens. 
 
 And now comes a very important point in the 
 mental aspect of this law of re-embodiment, which 
 is the practical side of it. Man is not only a center 
 of consciousness, but he is a center of self-conscious- 
 ness. He has free will within certain great lati- 
 tudes, and he has freedom of choice, and that fact 
 holds him to a great responsibility. Man, by his 
 choice, or thinking, determines not only his Heaven, 
 but also his earth life. He directs both the time of 
 his incarnation or re-embodiment and the environ- 
 ment of his re-embodiment. The less developed 
 an ego, the more rest does it require between earth 
 lives. This is a general truth and applies to every 
 living thing. For example, you would not expect 
 a child to work as hard or as continuously as a man ; 
 you would not expect so much of an undeveloped 
 man along any line as you would of a developed 
 man ; and so it is that the thought or development of 
 a man determines the length of time which must 
 elapse between re-embodiments for him. Weak, 
 tired, disappointed souls, they who are ignorant of 
 the laws of life, require a long time between incar- 
 nations. It is said by those who know, that the 
 average period between incarnations at this time 
 in our evolution is five hundred years for the great 
 mass of men who are not developed. According to 
 the strength of an ego and its desire to evolve, and 
 therefore its desire to have a vehicle through which 
 
The Law of Re-embodiment. 113 
 
 to evolve, does the period of time between incarna- 
 tions lessen or lengthen; and I am informed that 
 among progressive egos the time between incar- 
 nations averages now about one hundred years. You 
 can readily see that the shorter the time between 
 re-embodiments, the more experience must be 
 gained ; and the more knowledge carried over from 
 one embodiment to another, the more rapid is our 
 progress on our evolutionary journey. Occultists 
 believe it to be advantageous for a soul to keep his 
 body for a very long time; or, in other words, to 
 prolong each of his incarnations to as great a length 
 as it is possible to do. It is a great mistake to cast 
 aside a body before it has become so old and worn 
 that it is no longer of any use as a vehicle. 
 
 Every moment of our lives we are changing our 
 bodies and are making them better or worse by our 
 thoughts. We are also creating our environment, 
 liberating or enslaving ourselves, according to the 
 quality of our thoughts and emotions. We create 
 ties between ourselves and other souls through hat- 
 ing as much as through loving because whatever our 
 minds dwell upon, that we draw to us. For ex- 
 ample: If I think of you, immediately there is a 
 vibration in the ether between you and me. If I 
 continue to think of you, this vibration becomes 
 intensified until a blue magnetic cord becomes es- 
 tablished between us a mental telegraph wire, if 
 you choose over which my thoughts pass to you, 
 and by which yours come to me. This connec- 
 tion is visible to the clairvoyant, but not to the 
 
 I 
 
H4 The History <md Power of Mind. 
 
 physical eye, and can only be destroyed by disuse 
 for a greater or shorter lapse of time according to 
 its size and strength. As a spider spins his web 
 from one point to another, so do men constantly 
 spin thought webs connecting themselves for good 
 or ill with persons or things. If you hate a person, 
 you are continually sending hateful thoughts to 
 that person and by so doing you keep a constant 
 vibration of the ether between you. After a time 
 this vibration becomes a real pathway for your 
 thoughts to travel upon and it binds you to the ob- 
 ject of your hatred with a bond invisible yet strong- 
 er, and harder to break, than a bond of steel. This 
 is the reason groups of egos come back to earth 
 and incarnate in families and communities. Those 
 who love each other are drawn again and again into 
 the closer relationships of life, not because "blood 
 is thicker than water," but because of the ties formed 
 in past lives. 
 
 Then there is the great law of equilibrium, the 
 law of Justice that we are constantly putting into 
 action by our thoughts. This law modifies our 
 evolution, and limits our scope of free will under 
 certain conditions. There is a law of absolute jus- 
 tice and it is man's unjust thoughts which lead him 
 to believe otherwise. Perfect love is synonymous 
 with absolute justice and God is love. If equilib- 
 rium were not maintained on all planes, then chaos 
 would reign supreme; it could not be otherwise. 
 On the physical plane we see the manifestation of 
 equilibrium if we look for it. For example, throw 
 
The Law of Re-embodiment. 115 
 
 a stone into a pool of water, and watch how the 
 disturbance caused by displacing the water at a 
 certain point is adjusted by the movement on the 
 surface of the water from that point to the extreme 
 edge of the pool, and back again to the point of 
 disturbance below the surface. We saw the tiny 
 waves that were created by throwing the stone into 
 the water, but we did not understand that it was 
 the great law of equilibrium working to adjust the 
 water of the pool to the new condition we had cre- 
 ated in it. It is through equilibrium that the great 
 law of justice brings back to man precisely what he 
 has sent forth, and this is why he often finds in his 
 every-day life that he must re-adjust himself. "Be 
 not deceived; God (the law) is not mocked; for 
 whatsoever a man soweth that shall he also reap." 
 In the city of Chicago there is a unique court, 
 called the Infants' Court. It is the only court of 
 the kind in the world and is where infants or minors 
 are tried. Sometimes there are fifty cases tried 
 there in one day, and never less than one hundred 
 in each week. There are cases where parents have 
 abandoned children, or where children have left 
 their parents. Investigation is made into the char- 
 acter and condition of all the children who are 
 brought under its jurisdiction, and an effort is made 
 to place them in the particular walk of life where 
 they may become the best citizens. To a careless 
 observer it would seem that when the Infants' Court 
 had disposed of the child deserted by its parents 
 that would end the matter, but it does not. The 
 
n6 The History and Power of Mind. 
 
 Divine Law of Equilibrium caused the child to in- 
 carnate through those parents because of associa- 
 tions in a past life. Those parents owed to that 
 child the care and attention it should receive until 
 it should reach an age when it could care for itself; 
 and in order that a perfect equilibrium should be 
 established between those three individuals this 
 child was brought to them to receive that which 
 belonged to it by right. Perhaps the parents did 
 not wish to pay their debt to the child and aban- 
 doned it, thinking they were rid of the responsi- 
 bility; but they were mistaken. Equilibrium, jus- 
 tice must and will prevail, and if it be not estab- 
 lished in this life then it must be in another. That 
 invisible cord created by their thinking in a past 
 life has not been broken by this attempt to shift 
 their paternal responsibilities. Again it will bring 
 these three souls or minds together, perhaps in the 
 relationship of master and slaves, or of mistress and 
 maids, "For verily I say unto you, till heaven and 
 earth pass, one jot or one tittle shall in no wise pass 
 from the law till all be fulfilled." 
 
 The same law holds good in the betrayal of trust, 
 whether of affections, or of a fiduciary nature. If 
 a person wrongs another, the thought of the 
 wronged one goes forth to that other and binds the 
 two souls or minds together with a bond that can- 
 not be broken until full justice has been done be- 
 tween them. 
 
 The general character of a man's thoughts de- 
 termine his general environment, such as the class 
 
The Law of Re-embodiment. 117 
 
 into which he will be born ; and his special thoughts 
 determine the family in that class which will give 
 him his body. For example, here is a man who 
 cultivates only that which pertains to the so-called 
 evil side of life; this is the side of life that he pre- 
 fers. He will reincarnate into an environment suit- 
 able to the character he has made for himself. He 
 will be born into criminal circles. There is no use 
 wasting tears about him or his depravity; God is 
 just, and this universe is governed by law. When 
 a man comes back into slum life he has put him- 
 self into that condition ; his own thoughts have car- 
 ried him just where he belongs. It is quite com- 
 mon for a soul or mind to incarnate in a respect- 
 able circle of society in one life, yet by dissipation, 
 neglect of opportunities, and cultivating the animal 
 side of its nature, to become a social outcast in 
 its next earth life where it will be able to indulge 
 its unfortunate propensities unrestrained by respect- 
 able friends or relations. 
 
 If a person is born and reared under favorable 
 circumstances, it is because the character of his 
 thoughts brought him into that environment. He 
 was attached by the Great Law to the parents who 
 were able and willing to give him the advantages he 
 received. We could save ourselves much misdi- 
 rected or wasted force and sympathy if we would 
 recognize the fact that nothing ever happens in this 
 world, but that everything is governed by law. I 
 do not say leave unfortunate souls where you 
 find them, but I say do not attempt to quarrel 
 
n8 The History and Power of Mind. 
 
 with the law which is giving to them precisely what 
 they have desired some time in their career. If you 
 see a soul who wants help, then help it ; but do not 
 weep over those who are enjoying the fruits of 
 their own thought labors, and do not be dissatis- 
 fied, or criticise God because some souls have placed 
 themselves in certain unpleasant walks of life, or 
 have brought upon themselves unhappy conditions. 
 
 Man not only determines his birth and the qual- 
 ity of his body at birth, but he modifies his body 
 every moment of his life. Take the dissipated, sen- 
 suous and sensual criminal, thinking only of that 
 which pertains to the external side of life; he ex- 
 carnates, and after a time is brought back to earth 
 into an environment where he is pre-natally marked 
 with the very characteristics that his own mind 
 indicates. He takes that kind of a body which is 
 the best expression for him. It is quite unusual 
 for such a soul to succeed in getting out of that en- 
 vironment in one life, because its body and brain 
 express so strongly those particular characteristics. 
 It is possible, however, for it to do one of two things ; 
 indulge in the vicious propensities till the depths 
 of degradation have been reached, and it learns that 
 the price is entirely too great to pay for such pleas- 
 ures and decides to reform; or it may commence 
 to fight for self-control from the beginning and 
 gradually change its body and invironment by 
 changing its thought. 
 
 In the sense of making his own character, man 
 is his own maker. He has the free will to think, 
 
The Law of Re-embodiment. 119 
 
 and his every thought is a tendency in a given di- 
 rection. One thought does not make a character, 
 but one thought is a tendency toward a character, 
 since once the initial impulse is given, it has a ten- 
 dency to repeat itself until a habit is formed, and 
 habits make character. Therefore every thought a 
 man thinks has its effect upon his destiny, not only 
 in shaping his present life, but also his future in- 
 carnation. Perhaps you were never made aware 
 of how intense a man's thought may be and how 
 immediate is its action upon his physical body. If 
 you are suddenly startled, the effect is instantaneous 
 upon your body, and the entire system may be de- 
 ranged by the fright. 
 
 The majority of men make their physical bodies 
 and their environment unconsciously, but I have 
 known men who have consciously made their bod- 
 ies over so completely and entirely that their friends 
 did not recognize them afterward. I have seen 
 women change their figures through the power of 
 their thoughts and make them precisely what they 
 desired them to be. Persons who showed the marks 
 of age have brought back the flush of youth, and 
 I have known men and women to prolong their lives 
 far beyond the three score years and ten that the 
 individuals of our race are supposed to have allotted 
 to them. 
 
LECTURE SIX. 
 COLORS OF THOUGHT VIBRATION. 
 
 In lecture one we saw that in some of the tem- 
 ples of India there are colored figures and sym- 
 bols. These played an important part in the occult 
 history of that nation, and depict the forces of 
 man and of nature ; but the world has no record left 
 concerning these teachings, and it is only students 
 of mysticism who can read in those colors occult 
 truths. In those Indian temples man is depicted 
 as radiating from himself various colors; but what 
 does that mean to the average mind? 
 
 Among the ancient Europeans little was known 
 concerning color. Coming down to more modern 
 history, we find that among the Greeks there were 
 no teachings regarding colors. Greek development 
 ran more particularly to sculpture, arts, archi- 
 tecture and to the use of pigments, rather than to 
 what we call science, and hence they had no knowl- 
 edge of the nature of vibrations. Passing on to the 
 Romans, we find that they, too, lacked in a large 
 measure any knowledge concerning the nature of 
 color. Seneca seems to be about the only Roman who 
 wrote anything along this line, and he only went 
 so far as to show that the primary colors of the 
 rainbow were the same as the refraction of sunlight 
 through broken glass, but he was not able to explain 
 
Colors of Thought Vibration. 121 
 
 the cause of the identity of the phenomena. Then 
 passing on to the Middle Ages, we find that those 
 who had commenced to investigate this subject 
 of color from a scientific standpoint, i. e., from the 
 standpoint of light, accepted the theory that all light 
 is the result of certain colors emitted from objects. 
 But about 1665 Robert Hook, for the first time cer- 
 tainly in historic ages, formulated a theory of wave 
 motions which Christian Huygens, in 1690, ac- 
 cepted and elaborated and made the basis of the 
 vibratory or wave theory of light and color. But 
 the great Newton threw his weight of opinion with 
 the old emission theory; consequently the wave 
 theory became heterodox and unpopular, and it was 
 not heard of again for almost a century. Then 
 once more the scientists began to talk about the 
 wave theory of light and of color, and we find 
 the old emission theory disappearing and the wave 
 theory meeting with the acceptance of the scientific 
 world. This is the predominating theory of our 
 scientists at present; but it seems not to have oc- 
 curred to many of them that there is an element of 
 truth in both theories and that by blending parts 
 of the cardinal ideas of both, an hypothesis might 
 be formulated which would cover all facts and phe- 
 nomena. 
 
 We find a diversity of opinion concerning color 
 among those who study from the standpoint of pig- 
 ments and those who study from the standpoint 
 of light, as well as some difference of opinion on 
 this subject in each of these several schools. The 
 
122 The History and Power of Mind. 
 
 modern scientist bases his hypothesis upon the 
 wave theory using for his basis the solar radiation, 
 or the visible so-called white light. And yet he tells 
 you that in point of fact there is no white light, 
 meaning the sum total of all the solar radiation. He 
 tells you that the great emission of light or elec- 
 trical vibration, whichever it may be, that comes 
 from the sun as a greenish-blue color, is refracted 
 by our atmosphere and manifests itself to our eyes 
 as prismatic colors. But he also says that as the 
 sunlight comes into the world's atmosphere, large 
 proportions of the blue and green rays are withheld 
 by the atmosphere, which has a selective absorption 
 for those colors. 
 
 Starting with what must admittedly be largely 
 a hypothetical premise, modern science advances 
 a theory concerning colors based entirely upon such 
 of the solar radiations as reach this earth and are 
 not absorbed by atmospherical conditions, for it 
 does not seem to have occurred to the modern sci- 
 entist that there is a vibratory force in the earth 
 itself which modifies the solar radiation. 
 
 The Occultist has great respect for the indefa- 
 tigable energy of the modern scientist, and appre- 
 ciates the painstaking care with which he collects 
 his facts; but he recognizes that the physicist is 
 only working on the plane of effects and hence 
 causes are but guesses with him. These guesses 
 change from decade to decade as new facts are 
 discovered by further research, and hence the Oc- 
 cultist does not feel bound to follow the orthodox 
 
Colors of Thought Vibration. 123 
 
 theories of any particular decade relative to any 
 branch of knowledge; because he has his own sci- 
 ences, which have existed for ages, and have been 
 verified by all who have studied along these lines. 
 For this reason we shall not enter too far into the 
 discussion of how near right the modern scientist 
 may be. But the Occultist says this: he does not 
 accept wholly the views of the modern scientist 
 as to primary colors based upon visible solar light 
 The accepted prism, you know, consists of the 
 colors red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo and 
 violet; and these are considered to be the primary 
 colors. The Occultist says the color you call yellow 
 in point of fact is not yellow, but is the higher rays 
 of the orange, and that the human eye does not 
 record the true primary yellow, because it is be- 
 yond the vision of the ordinary eye, even when as- 
 sisted by mechanical devices. The physicist tells 
 you that your eye cannot detect the ultra violet 
 rays, and that on the other end of the spectrum 
 it cannot follow the lowest vibrations of the red. 
 The Occultist accepts that statement, but adds that 
 you do not detect all the rays or shades of any one 
 of the colors contained even in your spectrum. 
 Again, he differs from the modern physicist in re- 
 gard to the question of indigo and violet. The Oc- 
 cultist says that indigo and violet are not primary 
 colors, but are only some of the higher and lower 
 rays of the blue, which, in registering themselves 
 upon the human vision, appear as separate colors. 
 Nor does the Occultist agree with those who make a 
 
124 The History cmd Power of Mind. 
 
 study of pigments artists and chemists who con- 
 sider blue, yellow and red as the primary colors, 
 and that all the other colors are but modifications 
 or blendings of these primary ones. The Occultist 
 says that here also the yellow pigment is not the 
 yellow of the basic vibration, but is merely a modi- 
 fication of the vibration of the orange, and, more- 
 over, that in limiting the primary colors to blue, 
 yellow and red, you leave out entirely the orange 
 and green which are both primary colors. So much, 
 therefore, to show you the lines of divergence be- 
 tween Occultism and the present scientific concep- 
 tion relative to color. 
 
 By primary colors, from the standpoint of Oc- 
 cultism, is meant those basic vibrations that appear 
 at the beginning of time, and manifest throughout 
 all planes of nature. Before discussing these, it 
 may be well to enlarge upon some of the points 
 of agreement between modern science and Occult- 
 ism, which we touched upon in lecture three. First, 
 you will remember that whatever is manifested 
 must have form and color; nothing could manifest 
 if there were a lack of these two qualities, because 
 manifestation means a rate of vibration which par- 
 cels or separates a portion of atoms from the mass 
 of matter. Therefore, vibration is the parent of 
 form and color, and manifestation means that there 
 must always exist these two qualities. Take, for 
 example, the flowers ; why do they have their vari- 
 ous forms? Why do they have their peculiar pig- 
 ments? Is it not the rate of vibration which de- 
 
Colors of Thought Vibration. 125 
 
 termines the size, color and form of the flowers? 
 You remember that when you went to school you 
 were taught that form is the result of vibration, 
 and the fact was illustrated by placing a quantity 
 of fine feathery seed upon a drum head, and 
 then prolonging the notes of a violin over it. The 
 seed gathered into various forms, according to the 
 vibration or sound which was given, and this illus- 
 tration proved the truth of the teaching. Then you 
 remember the illustration given of the hot poker 
 which changed its color according to its change in 
 vibration. These illustrations were given to show 
 that the so-called inanimate things vibrate, and that 
 their vibrations can be changed according to the 
 will or desire of man. And now we will go a step 
 further, and learn something about the vibrations 
 which determine the form and color of man him- 
 self. 
 
 Man being an individualized manifestation of na- 
 ture, must naturally have his form and color. When 
 I speak of man, I refer to both the physical and 
 mental man. Place the human body in an easy 
 position, with feet together, and with arms at the 
 sides; then draw a line around it, touching each 
 extreme outer point of the body, and you will find 
 that the line forms an ovoid. You remember 
 when we discussed the subjective and the objective 
 minds we found that the two interblended and en- 
 souled the physical man. These two united minds 
 not only fill the interstices of the physical body, and 
 hold together all the physical molecules, and keep 
 
126 The History and Power of Mind. 
 
 them in place, but it also extends beyond and around 
 the body to the distance of several inches. If you 
 should draw a line around this inner or mental man 
 you would find that it, too, is oval, or egg-shaped, 
 which seems to be the best form for the highest 
 and largest expression of individualized conscious- 
 ness as, witness man, world, or sun. 
 
 Into each center of consciousness flows the mag- 
 netic force called the life principle, and by reason 
 of that inflow into all forms there is a constant 
 pushing out of old atoms and a replacement of them 
 with new elements. And this is true whether the 
 form be on the subjective or objective side of na- 
 ture. This passing in and out of the atomic life 
 force, makes a fluidic sphere around each man and 
 around everything. In electricity we call this fluidic 
 sphere the electric field; in the sun we call it the 
 photosphere; around a magnet we call it the mag- 
 netic field or field of attraction. Baron Karl Von 
 Reichenbach, through sensitives, rediscovered in 
 modern times this magnetic field around men and 
 animals, and even around minerals. This magnetic 
 field he called "od," or "odic" force. His discovery 
 is confirmed now by clairvoyants, by seers, and in 
 France by sensitives under hypnotic influence. Per- 
 sons from each of these classes of investigators 
 have seen around each person, tree and mineral 
 this field of light or color. This is one reason for 
 that law of physics which says that no two masses 
 can approach each other without being mutually af- 
 fected, because, being brought into juxtaposition, 
 
Colors of Thought Vibration. 127 
 
 there is an attraction and repulsion due to the flow 
 of the life forces, and the exchange of atoms which 
 is constantly taking place between them. There 
 is essentially nothing in inert matter to attract; 
 but the inflowing of the life force and the throw- 
 ing off of old particles make a change of atoms be- 
 tween masses that are near each other, and they 
 attract or repel according to their similarity or 
 dissimilarity of vibration. 
 
 It is the existence of the magnetic field of an 
 animal or a man which enables a dog to follow the 
 scent of either. As a physical, animal body passes 
 over the ground it throws off from itself particles 
 or atoms with each effort or emotion. A certain 
 quantity of these particles is left imprinted upon 
 the earth ; and since every individualized conscious- 
 ness possesses its own distinct odor or perfume 
 due to its condition of development or rate of vibra- 
 tion it is not at all difficult for the dog to keep 
 the scent of the creature he is following. The atoms 
 left upon the earth are impregnated with the odor 
 of that person or thing which the dog is able to 
 distinguish from any other. 
 
 When we come to the higher centers of conscious- 
 ness, as in man, we not only have the life force as 
 an element which builds, but we also have a thought 
 force which is constantly manifesting, and by its 
 vibratory flow is modifying, the life force. Each 
 person radiates from himself not only the physical 
 atoms which he has used, and which have lost his 
 vibration, but also the finer forms of matter which 
 
128 The History and Power of Mind. 
 
 go out with his thought force; and therefore there 
 is a continuous stream flowing out from each indi- 
 vidual to other centers, and these streams leave their 
 impress upon everything the person thinks about 
 or touches. A sensitive coming in contact with a 
 part of the outflow from a man, can read his char- 
 acter as well as a scientist , by taking up a piece of 
 coal, can tell you its chemical constituency, or its 
 probable age and formation; and this faculty is 
 now called psychometry. 
 
 In ancient times, the sphere surrounding man 
 was called the aureola when it encircled his whole 
 body; when it only radiated from his head and 
 shoulders it was called the nimbus. Later, this 
 magnetic field in either aspect was called the aura 
 by Western Occultists, while in the East it was 
 called the sacred Auric Egg. The ancient masters 
 of art always represented their saints with a nim- 
 bus about their heads and were accustomed to 
 paint their most divine characters as surrounded 
 by an aureola. In the pictures of Christ there is a 
 radiation from the entire body, while in those of 
 his disciples there is usually but the nimbus to be 
 seen. And these old painters were right in their 
 conceptions; they were sensitives and either had 
 the intuitive knowledge of an occult fact, or they 
 were clairvoyants and saw that according to the 
 development of the ego was the extent of its emana- 
 tions. The Occultist says that in the ordinary 
 man this radiation extends from two to six inches 
 from the body; but as man develops in thought, 
 

 Colors of Thought Vibration. 129 
 
 power and capacity to draw into himself cosmic 
 forces, his radiations expand until they may ex- 
 tend from six inches to several feet outward. 
 
 This aura is one of the chief causes for the un- 
 accountable likes and dislikes that we have for per- 
 sons whom we meet; for, if one is at all sensitive, 
 one can feel very distinctly the auras one comes in 
 contact with. If we meet with a person whose vi- 
 brations are very much higher than our own, we 
 will be likely to either almost worship that person 
 or dislike him for being so far in advance of us. 
 We will be greatly disturbed by the higher vibra- 
 tions proceeding from him, which will very likely 
 call forth all the good in us, or bring all the sedi- 
 ment in our nature to the surface. Knowing this, 
 and being sensitive to these sudden likes and dis- 
 likes for persons, you may save yourself much dis- 
 comfort by keeping a good distance between your- 
 selves and those who disturb you. A distance of 
 three or four feet will be sufficient to prevent you 
 from feeling so plainly the vibratory force of 
 another. 
 
 This aura will also account for the great deple- 
 tion that many persons feel when they come in 
 contact with other persons ; for it is very true that 
 there are human sponges who, unconsciously per- 
 haps, maintain their own lives by drawing all the 
 magnetic force or life they can get from others. 
 This is what the Occultist calls vampirization. You 
 may have observed that invalids are most anxious 
 to have young, strong people about them. They 
 
130 The History and Power of Mind. 
 
 will often take the hand of a healthy person and 
 hold it for hours, if they are permitted to. It is 
 pleasant for the invalid, but quite trying sometimes 
 for the visitor, because with the blending of the 
 auras the magnetic force flows from the stronger 
 to the weaker. Old people are very fond of chil- 
 dren, and often insist upon sleeping with them. This 
 is very dangerous for the child, because of the de- 
 magnetization which must always follow so doing. 
 
 There are several ways by which you may save 
 yourselves from being demagnetized by others. The 
 first is to spend much of your time alone. Another 
 is by declaring positiveness for yourself and by 
 keeping your mind on your own magnetism, and 
 thus retain it within your own body. Again, you 
 may save yourself considerably by letting your feet 
 touch each other lightly, and by clasping your 
 hands together when you are sitting near other per- 
 sons; this is a means of closing your circuit and 
 preventing your magnetism from flowing out. In 
 the last-mentioned practice it is not alone the physi- 
 cal act of closing your circuit, but the mental atti- 
 tude you take at that time which protects you from 
 vampirization. 
 
 The size and color of the human aura changes 
 according to the intensity and quality of the 
 thought. We have seen that all vibration is either 
 the direct or indirect result of thought; and this 
 is true from the first Divine impulse down to every 
 thought of man. It can be demonstrated in a num- 
 ber of ways. Telepathy, which I believe scientists 
 
Colors of Thought Vibration. 131 
 
 now accept as a fact, is the transmission of thought 
 or vibratory force from the mind of one person to 
 that of another without the use of material signs, 
 using as the medium of communication the ether 
 or Universal Consciousness. If there is a vibration 
 or emanation that goes forth from you every time 
 you think, and it passes to the point it is sent, then 
 it is reasonable to suppose that according to the 
 intensity of the thought is the emanation projected. 
 If you sit quietly day dreaming, or thinking in an 
 indefinite, incoherent manner, the emanation does 
 not proceed far from you; but if your thought is 
 definite and intense, then its vibration must proceed 
 according to its own intensity. By intense thinking 
 I do not mean that you should clench your fist, nor 
 corrugate your brow while doing it; but I mean 
 that your thought must be clearly held in mind and 
 distinctly sent forth. 
 
 I understand that Dr. Baraduct, a French physi- 
 cian, has invented a disk so delicately sensitized that 
 it registers the vibrations of a human being brought 
 in contact with it. If an angry man puts forth his 
 hand toward the dial, the needle on it immediately 
 registers the intensity of his vibrations. If the 
 opposite hand of the same man is extended, the dial 
 immediately shows the difference in vibrations be- 
 tween the positive and negative sides of his body. 
 When a clear, distinct thinker tests the machine, 
 there is a greater number registered upon the dial 
 than when a negative person tests it, and thus we 
 are fortunate in having a recently invented median- 
 
132 The History and Power of Mind. 
 
 ical instrument which proves the claims of Occult- 
 ism concerning the vibratory emanations from the 
 human body. 
 
 The intensity of the thought determines the size 
 of the aura, and the quality of the thought deter- 
 mines its color. For example, you may have an in- 
 tense vibration of a low color, which would cause 
 your emanation to project for three or more feet 
 from you, or you might have an intense thought of a 
 higher nature which would reach the same distance. 
 Its size would depend upon its intensity, but its 
 color would be determined by its quality or rate of 
 vibration, or its moral and intelligent degree of 
 excellence. 
 
 According to the Occult system in reference to 
 mind or man, the spectrum, as applied to this par- 
 ticular planet, would include what is generally 
 known as the absence of color at one end and the 
 synthesis of color at the other, or black and white. 
 But because neither of these has a practical bear- 
 ing upon this course of lectures nor will it have 
 in your lives at this point in your evolution I shall 
 omit them from this course. Both colors indicate 
 abnormal conditions of mind, and we do not desire 
 to waste our time studying the abnormal. The Oc- 
 cultist says that red, orange, green, blue and yellow 
 are the normal primary colors, and can be seen and 
 known upon each inner plane of being according 
 to the development of the investigator. The or- 
 dinarily developed person cannot see the pure yel- 
 low ray with his physical eyes any more than the 
 
Colors of Thought Vibration. 133 
 
 ordinary American can see the many delicate col- 
 ors in an Indian shawl that the specialized vision 
 of an expert can distinguish. 
 
 The inner man, usually called the soul or ego, 
 the real man, always has a color as distinctly his 
 own as has the outside man. Each individual has 
 his particular color according to his quality of 
 thought, character and development. During his 
 first incarnation on the earth the normal color of 
 the subjective mind was blue, and the natural color 
 of the objective mind was green; therefore, when 
 these two first came together, and united as one 
 mind, and incarnated in a human body, the com- 
 bined colors became a green-blue. This very quick- 
 ly changed to lower rates of vibration, because sen- 
 sation immediately commenced to manifest in the 
 place of reason, in the newly incarnated man. The 
 green predominated over the blue because the blue 
 was the product of the subjective side of life, and the 
 green was the product of the objective side which 
 was stronger upon its own plane of development. 
 But even these green-blue color vibrations were lost 
 through the excitation of the emotional nature, 
 which came quickly into the ascendency in man's 
 nature. This was due to the great desire for the 
 physical enjoyments of life, for in those days man 
 was in his absolutely normal, animal condition. He 
 had a new body, had not put into action causes 
 which reacted upon it, and his power of thinking 
 was limited, and therefore not likely to have much 
 influence on his body during those first incarna- 
 
134 The History and Power of Mind. 
 
 tions. So there was nothing for man at that time 
 but the mere physical enjoyment of existence. 
 
 Before we take up the study of the emotional na- 
 ture and its colors, it may be well to examine that 
 force which built man's physical form, and which 
 builds all physical forms the force we call "life." 
 This force manifests as orange vibration. If life is 
 a force, if it is something, then it must have a rate 
 of vibration of its own to distinguish it from every- 
 thing else in the universe. We speak of the Gulf 
 Stream. It is a current of water which vibrates at 
 a higher rate than the body of water through which 
 it flows, and we call this current of water the Gulf 
 Stream to distinguish it from the rest of the ocean. 
 So in this great sea of consciousness there are cer 
 tain definite and distinct currents of force which 
 play very important parts in man's evolution, and 
 that which we call "life" is one of them. I cannot 
 prove this statement to you because of the limita- 
 tion of your vision, but you can prove it for your- 
 self as you can prove every other statement I shall 
 make in these lectures if you develop to that point 
 where your inner senses permit you to function upon 
 that plane of existence where forces are visible as 
 forces, as causes, and not as effects or phenomena. 
 
 On this physical plane you see life as form ; on the 
 subjective or mental side you see life manifesting as 
 a separate and distinct thing which is building the 
 form you see with your physical eyes. Seeing life 
 on the subjective side, it is an orange color, or a 
 force which vibrates as orange, sweeping into every- 
 
Colors of Thought Vibration. 135 
 
 thing and giving vitality to all forms. All physical 
 bodies have this vital force manifesting in them 
 according to the capacity of each to express it. You 
 do not see the orange force permeating the invalid 
 to the same extent that it does an athlete, because 
 the invalid cannot express it so well. And now 
 that you understand something about the force 
 which fashions and preserves the physical body, let 
 us turn to man himself and study the other forces 
 expressed in him. 
 
 The lowest force in psychic man is that which 
 we designate as his distinct animal propensities, and 
 these are red in their manifestation or vibration. 
 You remember we found the four cardinal emo- 
 tions upon which all the other human emotions were 
 based, and the first three of these were red; there- 
 fore, when the animal nature is in the ascendency 
 in man, when it dominates the intellectual side of 
 his nature, the red vibrations become the domin- 
 ating ones and permeate the entire man and his 
 aura. If you strike a tuning fork upon the table, 
 the sound produced is the vibration which emanates 
 from that tuning fork. If you put a weight upon the 
 fork the sound ceases, because the low rate of vibra- 
 tion which you bring in contact with the tuning 
 fork causes its vibrations to be lowered, and finally 
 to cease ; thus the vibrations of the weight overcome 
 those of the tuning fork. It is the same with 
 thought; when the animal nature becomes intense 
 it gives its lowering vibrations to every part of the 
 man, and consequently the intellectual nature ceases 
 
136 The History and Power of Mind. 
 
 its activity for the time being, and takes the color 
 of the dominating emotion. When the emotional 
 nature is in the ascendency, man's color is red, and 
 according to the intensity of his emotions is the 
 color intensified; but if he struggles to control his 
 emotions there will be a change of colors in his aura. 
 
 In the course of time man's lower intellectual 
 nature began to be more prominent, and when his 
 emotions were not over-stimulated it began to be 
 something of a factor in his life ; and as time went 
 on what was originally the red in the psychic man, 
 and the orange of his body, became tinged with 
 the green of his objective mentality, and then he 
 had the three colors blended, which gave him a 
 brown vibration. This color, unfortunately, indi- 
 cates the condition of the mass of men at the pres- 
 ent day, because they have not developed beyond 
 that point. The intellectual side of man is very 
 weak as yet; even the objective mind is not well 
 individualized, and as for the subjective mind, it 
 is not active in one person in a thousand. 
 
 After many centuries some men, for one reason 
 or another, began to control their emotions some- 
 what. This may have been brought about by laws 
 being enacted which said: If a person gives sway 
 to his emotions, and kills another, or becomes too 
 avaricious, and robs his fellow man, he shall be 
 punished. Or it may have been because social life 
 required the suppression of the emotions at times. 
 As man began to control more and more his emo- 
 tional nature, the green vibrations became more 
 
Colors of Thought Vibration. 137 
 
 prominent. First in its deeper shades which indi- 
 cate intense selfishness and subsequently in its 
 lighter shades, indicating individualization. 
 
 Green is the color of the objective mind of man 
 when he first begins to individualize as a perma- 
 nent center of consciousness in Deity. It is the 
 color of the manifested, lower, intellectual nature 
 which is sometimes called the brain consciousness. 
 Self-consciousness in the growing man was neces- 
 sarily an evolutionary step ; and when man, for his 
 own purposes and his own interests, began to use 
 his intellect even on a low plane, he began to con- 
 trol his emotional nature. This in itself helped to 
 strengthen his intellectual nature and made his 
 emotions more or less subservient to it. Green 
 vibrations are desirable because no soul can mount 
 very high in its evolution unless it becomes properly 
 individualized. Then will come the time when our 
 subjective minds, or the diviner portion of our na- 
 tures will fight for the ascendency as the lower 
 intellectual is now fighting the emotional nature. 
 At that time the original color of the subjective 
 mind will begin to manifest itself and the blue 
 vibrations will commence to tinge the inner man. 
 At first there will be but occasional flashes of the 
 blue in his aura ; later, it will become suffused with 
 the blue vibration. 
 
 Raising the vibrations of the developing man is a 
 slow process. Where his higher intellect and in- 
 tuition begin to manifest, and where reason com- 
 mences to overpower desire, there is the battle 
 
138 The History and Power of Mind. 
 
 ground for the objective and subjective minds. This 
 is where most of the progressive men and women 
 are to-day; and if you were clairvoyant, you could 
 see the auras changing from green to blue, with 
 often a flash of red, and then back again to green, 
 or perhaps to purple, a combination of the blue 
 and red. I know of no better comparison than to 
 liken the progressive inner man, in his appearance, 
 to an electric fountain. One moment you may see 
 the fountain all blue, at another green and blue 
 mingling; then perhaps it will change to purple, 
 with now and again a flash of red, or with red suf- 
 fusing the whole. So man, according to his thought, 
 is always radiating these beautiful colors which are 
 in each human soul or mind. 
 
 In the course of time, when his spiritual nature 
 becomes awakened and his intuition becomes act- 
 ive, the yellow vibrations begin to interblend with 
 the blue. You will see the well-developed man pos- 
 sessed of all the colors properly regulated and con- 
 trolled. The lower vibrations, the red, will then 
 appear as a beautiful rose pink, and will be seen 
 more particularly about that portion of the body 
 where the generative organs are located. The or- 
 ange vibration will suffuse the entire body. The 
 green will be the individualizing band outlining the 
 body, and the blue and yellow will blend and extend 
 beyond the green forming the outer border of the 
 aura. 
 
 There are two classes of these colors which may 
 be designated as positive and negative. There is 
 
Colors of Thought Vibration. 139 
 
 the positive yellow and the negative yellow, the 
 positive green and the negative green. And when 
 you see man's aura composed of negative colors you 
 may know that the negative side of his nature is 
 dominant. A man may be negatively good, and be 
 neither wise nor strong. He may seem to control 
 his objective mind and you may believe him to be 
 a well-developed man, when really his objective 
 mind is but a poor vehicle for his subjective mind. 
 Or you may find persons with the negative blue 
 and yellow vibrations, those whose intuitional na- 
 tures are only partially awakened, but who have not 
 the force aspect; neither has the higher intelligence 
 become active in them. A person may be nega- 
 tively good because he has not been tempted in 
 this life to be otherwise ; his environment may have 
 been such as to guard him against temptation, and 
 his nature being negative, he had not the desire to 
 overcome. Some time in some life he must be tempt- 
 ed and learn to be positively good before he be- 
 comes a perfected ego. 
 
 There is a practical side to this lecture, as there 
 has been to all the other lectures of this course. Ac- 
 cording to your knowledge of these forces or vibra- 
 tions, and according to the intensity of your 
 thought, will you have the power to use the Occult 
 forces of nature, and become conscious upon other 
 than the material plane, and to put yourself in touch 
 with certain cosmic currents or forces. For illus- 
 tration: A man with an emotional nature goes to 
 the theater. There is a cry of "Fire!" and a wave 
 
140 The History and Power of Mind. 
 
 of fear sweeps over the audience. Every mind in 
 the house has become attached to the red cosmic 
 current of fear. Having tapped this great current, 
 waves of fear come into every center of conscious- 
 ness in that house, and the emotional man loses 
 his reason and rushes like a maddened brute to save 
 himself, regardless of everyone else. He tramples 
 upon women and children, and fights like a wild 
 animal to liberate his body from the struggling mass 
 of human beings around him. There may or may 
 not be a fire, but this man has connected his ob- 
 jective mind, through thought, with this current of 
 fear, does not control the emotion as it sweeps over 
 him, and you see the result. 
 
 These cosmic currents which surround our earth 
 correspond in color and rate of vibration to each of 
 the colors in the aura of men and animals ; and all 
 living creatures use these currents, either conscious- 
 ly or unconsciously. When man learns to vibrate 
 harmoniously with the color or cosmic current he 
 desires to use, then his development will be much 
 more rapid than when he uses the currents, as the 
 animals do, unconsciously and without a knowledge 
 of what he is doing. It is according to the color 
 of a man's vibrations that he connects himself with 
 these cosmic forces; and some of the lower forces 
 bring disaster to him when he uses them. Take 
 the current of fear for example. If a man is con- 
 stantly fearing something, or someone, he thus con- 
 nects himself with the current of fear, and it con- 
 stantly plays upon him. He never can gain success 
 
Colors of Thought Vibration. 141 
 
 in anything he undertakes until he raises his vibra- 
 tions above this current, and in this way discon- 
 nects himself from it. It is indeed of the most im- 
 portance that man should learn to control his 
 thoughts and his vibrations. 
 
 There are also different planes of consciousness, 
 and it is according to the rate of man's vibration 
 that he can function upon them. As a man may 
 be able to see no color but red, because his optic 
 nerves are at so low a rate of vibration that they 
 cannot record any color of a higher rate, so some 
 men have a much broader apprehension of the laws 
 of life than other men, because their vibrations are 
 high enough to permit vibrations coming from other 
 and higher planes to impinge upon their conscious- 
 ness. A genius is a man whose consciousness has 
 become expanded through his evolution until he 
 can contact more planes of cosmic consciousness 
 than other men. You remember the lines, 
 
 "A primrose by a river's brim 
 A yellow primrose was to him, 
 And it was nothing more." 
 
 One man sees in a primrose nothing more nor less 
 than a vegetable growth ; another thinks what a 
 pretty yellow flower ; still another sees in that same 
 primrose the secrets of the Universe ; he sees in that 
 flower the vibratory effect of the Divine Idea that 
 God has geometrized, as the scholars of Pythagoras 
 were accustomed to say. 
 
142 The History and Power of Mind. 
 
 There are forty-nine states of consciousness, but 
 the minds of average men only function upon ten 
 or twelve. There are a great many doors to knowl- 
 edge, which we may open if we will ; but if we con- 
 tinue to think in the lower states of consciousness, 
 and never rise above them in aspiration, these other 
 doors will remain forever shut to us. If we always 
 live in the cellar of our house we will never see God's 
 sunlight streaming into our upper rooms. The sun 
 shines, but not for us because we will not go where 
 it can reach us. 
 
 All the world's great teachers have substantially 
 taught the same rules for conduct and morality. 
 Ethics is not founded on police regulations nor 
 sentiments of moralists, but is established on the 
 immutable laws of nature. "Love your enemies" 
 was one of the precepts taught by Jesus, and it has 
 puzzled many of his followers to find the reason for 
 the teaching. Many persons think, if they do not 
 say: What sense is there in loving one's enemies? 
 This precept has a purely scientific basis. Love is 
 not an indefinite sentiment, it is something real; it 
 is the highest and greatest dynamic force on this 
 planet, and is one that manifests on all planes. Since 
 it is a force, it is something we can feel on this plane 
 of effects and see on the mental plane, if we are able 
 to function on that plane. When pure love is sent 
 forth from the subjective mind, it manifests as a 
 constructive force, having its own particular high 
 yellow rate of vibration. Anger being an emotion, 
 and proceeding from the objective mind of man, vi- 
 
Colors of Thought Vibration. 143 
 
 brates at a lower rate, which is red. A person who 
 hates you an enemy sends a red current of 
 thought toward you ; but if you send loving thoughts 
 in return, you are projecting a yellow rate of vibra- 
 tion which is infinitely higher and more forceful 
 than the red, and the yellow vibration deflects the 
 lower vibration so that it never reaches you. 
 
 The higher rates of vibration will protect you 
 from harm, and if you live according to ethical prin- 
 ciples, a high quality of thought or vibration is at- 
 tained. When we come to consider Spiritual Forces, 
 we shall see how, by the control of our thoughts, 
 we can use the cosmic forces. 
 
LECTURE SEVEN. 
 
 MEDITATION, CREATION AND CONCEN- 
 TRATION. 
 
 All religions invent modes whereby the mind of 
 man is directed to Deity. In the Eastern philoso- 
 phy these modes are called Yoga, and are supposed 
 to be methods of yoking the individual mind to the 
 Universal Consciousness. There are two principal 
 kinds of yoga, which may be described as mental 
 and as physical. The first is a process of meditation, 
 by which the individual mind is brought into closer 
 relationship with the Universal Consciousness ; the 
 second or physical yoga, is of various kinds, and 
 includes methods of artificial breathings and un- 
 usual and unnatural postures of the body. These 
 postures and breathings are for the purpose of 
 drawing into the physical body certain forces which 
 develop psychic powers. It is believed by those 
 who practice them that a step nearer Deity is gained 
 by so doing ; but in point of fact only certain psychic 
 centers in the physical body are awakened, which 
 enable these persons to function upon the first plane 
 beyond the material. The ecstatic conditions into 
 which the Yogi are often thrown by indulging in 
 these practices are not spiritual states of conscious- 
 ness, as many persons believe, but are entirely due 
 to paroxysms of emotion to which they yield, and 
 144 
 
Meditation, Creation and Concentration. 145 
 
 which are disastrous to those who indulge in them. 
 
 Another system devised for the purpose of relat- 
 ing the individual consciousness to the Universal 
 Consciousness is ritualism, and we find this method 
 almost, if not quite, perfected in the East. In the 
 elaborate ceremonials of Brahminism and Buddhism 
 there is as complete a ritual as exists. In Buddhis- 
 tic ritualism there are various steps, from the wor- 
 ship of the Supreme in meditation, to the attempt 
 to reach and propitiate the intermediate forces, gods 
 or devas. 
 
 In Judaism we find again a great system of rit- 
 ualism, which is second only to that of Buddhism ; 
 but the ritualism of Judaism was established for a 
 material people, it used material processes for car- 
 rying out its ritual and never reached the point 
 where it operated upon mental lines. For example, 
 in Judaism we find the cutting of the throats of ani- 
 mals and the flowing of blood. This was a sacri- 
 ficial rite and was supposed to attract the attention 
 of the Deity, through His love for the shedding of 
 blood, to propitiate Him, and induce Him to give 
 to whoever made this sacrifice something of much 
 more value than were the animals slaughtered. It 
 was not for the sake of spirituality that these rites 
 were performed, but for material gain only. 
 
 And then came Christianity, represented in the 
 West by the two great sects of Catholicism, on the 
 one hand, and Protestantism on the other. These 
 also use a process to relate the individual conscious- 
 ness to the Universal, which is called prayer or peti- 
 
146 ' The History and Power of Mind. 
 
 **' 
 
 tion. The ritual in Catholicism is on the same gen- 
 eral lines as in Buddhism, because many of its rites 
 were obtained from Buddhism. For example, there 
 are three forms of prayer in Catholicism : the Latria, 
 or prayer direct to Deity ; Hyperdulia, or prayer to 
 Deity through the intercession of the saints or the 
 Virgin Mary, and the Doulia, or prayer to a special 
 patron saint; in Protestantism the prayer is made 
 directly to Jehovah. Whether we consider the old 
 religions of the world, or the most modern, each 
 has invented a process for relating the mind back 
 to the Universal Consciousness, and all these rites 
 are for one purpose personal gain. 
 
 Some of you may be shocked by this declaration, 
 but upon close analysis you will find it true. In 
 Buddhism the object of relating the individual mind 
 to the Universal Consciousness is the hope for lib- 
 eration from rebirth ; it is purely a question of bene- 
 fit to the individual. In Judaism a bargain between 
 the individual and the Universal was made. In re- 
 turn for prayers and praise and sacrifices, God was 
 supposed to give men things which they wanted. In 
 Catholicism, in exchange for prayers and chanting, 
 God gave men mental or spiritual qualities and per- 
 sonal salvation; but they, too, can obtain material 
 things by doing a Novena. This last process of 
 prayer is not made to God direct, but to Saint An- 
 thony, and if the conditions required by this Saint 
 are all fulfilled, the prayer is answered. In Protest- 
 antism the prayer may be for personal health, for 
 a person going to sea, or for the kingdom of heaven, 
 
Meditation, Creation and Concentration. 147 
 
 or for something else all comes back to a matter 
 of personal benefit. 
 
 The Christian and Mental Scientists have adopted V 
 from the Orient a process of meditation called "go- 
 ing into the silence." This attitude of mind is for 
 the purpose of harmonizing the individual mind 
 with the Universal, in order that the individual may 
 receive thoughts and things that it desires, and is 
 a form of prayer along more rational and scientific 
 lines. Occultism, too, has its processes for the pur- 
 pose of relating the individual mind to the Universal 
 Consciousness, in order that it may draw such spir- 
 itual, mental and material things as the individual 
 needs or wants. 
 
 The question arises, how can this relation be 
 brought about, because we all need something spir- 
 itual, mental or material, and in our hearts we wish 
 to know how to use our minds in order to obtain 
 the qualities or things desired. The three working 
 tools or methods of mind that the Occultist takes 
 for the purpose of connecting his consciousness with ^ j a !. 
 the Universal, are the processes known as Medita- / 
 tion, Creation and Concentration. 
 
 We have spoken repeatedly of mind, and now 
 we will say something about thought. Thought is 
 the product of mind; it is a rate of vibration sent 
 forth from mind, and therefore is force. This thought 
 force is continually being used or misused, because 
 to live is to think, either rightly or wrongly, with 
 the objective or subjective mind. Thought, per se, 
 is neither good nor bad, but, like any other force, 
 
148 The History and Power of Mind. 
 
 the use of it determines its character. Electricity is 
 a force, and can be used constructively to dissipate 
 disease and to prolong life, or it can be used to de- 
 stroy life, as the State of New York destroys the 
 lives of criminals at Sing Sing. 
 
 Thought has one chief characteristic, I might al- 
 most say but one characteristic, and that is vibra- 
 tion. From this standpoint we may divide thought 
 into two general classes, that of the positive and 
 negative. Positive thought is a high rate of vibra- 
 tion sent forth from the mind, and negative thought 
 is a low rate of vibration. 
 
 You remember that ttie will is the positive side 
 of the subjective mind, and corresponds to the de- 
 sire or the positive side of the objective mind. The 
 will plays a very important part in human affairs, 
 whether it becomes active in the subjective mind as 
 will power, or whether it operates in the objective 
 mind as desire. In connection with thought the will, 
 has three functions: 
 
 First. It determines the nature of the thought sent 
 forth from the mind, whether it be constructive or 
 destructive. 
 
 Second. Will determines the intensity of the 
 thought, whether it shall vibrate at a high rate and 
 travel with great rapidity, or whether it shall pro- 
 ceed at a low rate, and reach but a short distance. 
 In other words, the will determines whether the 
 thought shall be positive or negative. 
 
 Third. Will determines the direction of thought ; 
 that is, the person, place or thing to which it shall 
 
Meditation, Creation and Concentration 149 
 
 be sent and how long it shall remain in each place. 
 
 Knowing the functions of this tremendous force, 
 which in its higher aspects is latent in most per- 
 sons, you can see how essential it is that it should 
 be awakened ; for, like the muscles of the body, will 
 grows stronger with use. It is left with each of us 
 to determine whether we shall remain infirm of pur- 
 pose and weak in will, or awaken, and arouse this 
 force and use it for our upbuilding. Without the 
 activity of will no one can hope to become an 
 Occultist, because his mental force is to him what 
 the engine is to the engineer. 
 
 The first mental mode to cultivate in order that 
 the mind may draw to itself whatever it desires is 
 Philosophical Meditation. (I use the word philo- 
 sophical as qualifying this state of mind, because 
 there are various other modes of so-called medita- 
 tion.) 
 
 Philosophical meditation is a receptive condition 
 of mind, assumed for the purpose of receiving from 
 Deity knowledge concerning a selected subject. 
 
 In order to understand more fully the elements 
 which compose this kind of meditation, we will 
 analyze them. The first condition of mind is a re- 
 ceptive one. In using the word "receptive" I do 
 not mean negative. Never, under any circum- 
 stances, permit yourself to be in a negative condi- 
 tion, because the moment you become negative you 
 become subject to malevolent subjective entities and 
 influences which may control or obsess you and 
 perhaps dominate your mind throughout this life. 
 
150 The History and Power of Mind. 
 
 The Occultist insists most vehemently that the 
 passive negative meditation taught by many schools 
 in the Orient as well as in the Occident is most 
 harmful to the ego. Since immortality means the 
 preservation of the individual consciousness, a per- 
 fect individualization can come only through the 
 continued effort to remain in a positive condition of 
 mind. It therefore follows that to remain negative 
 is detrimental to one's evolution. Negativeness 
 also has its effects upon the physical body by its re- 
 flex action producing sickness and often dissolution. 
 If there is one idea that will be emphasized more 
 than another during this course of lectures it will 
 be the necessity of being mentally positive. Sta- 
 bility is the result of positiveness and the Biblical 
 assertion is true in Occultism as in everything else 
 that : "unstable as water thou shalt not succeed." 
 
 A receptive condition of mind is the same mental 
 condition that you are now in. A quiet, listening, 
 expectant attitude; not intense but waiting, giving 
 positive attention to what I am saying while your 
 bodies are in a relaxed but comfortable position. No 
 one could control any mind in this room at this 
 moment because each one is positive and is in an 
 active instead of a passive condition. 
 
 Having placed yourself in this receptive condition 
 you desire to receive knowledge. Knowledge is the 
 second element in our definition and is all that you 
 can receive through meditation ; since qualities or 
 things are brought through other modes of mind. 
 
 Now direct your demand or prayer to the Uni- 
 

 Meditation, Creation and Concentration. 151 
 
 versal Consciousness not to an individual, for there 
 must be no intermediary ; prayer must be directed to 
 Deity as in the highest form of Christianity. You 
 go into meditation for the purpose of receiving 
 knowledge from the highest source of knowledge, 
 and this is the third element in our definition. 
 
 To demand scientifically and well from Deity is 
 a very hard thing to do unless you have entirely 
 outgrown the idea of an anthropomorphic God, be- 
 cause at first it seems difficult to address Universal 
 Consciousness. It may seem that your demand or 
 prayer has gone into space somewhere to diffuse 
 itself throughout the great Consciousness. It may 
 be of help to you to consider the Universal Con- 
 sciousness as another individual mind near you that 
 you may speak to as you would to another person. 
 Or better still, you may picture it as a golden sun or 
 center of vibrating light within your own heart 
 for the heart center is one of the chief points of con- 
 tact between the individual and the Universal mind. 
 
 I wish to impress upon your mind the thought of 
 your nearness to this Universal Consciousness. 
 Many persons feel so far away from God and when 
 they think of Deity at all they think of It as a being 
 somewhere far away in space. God is difficult to 
 reach only because you make it so with your wrong 
 conceptions of your separateness from Him. You 
 should take the great Consciousness into every 
 thought and act of life; whisper to It in the dark- 
 ness of the night and It will hear and answer you. 
 See It in a mental picture of golden yellow light 
 
152 The History and Power of Mind. 
 
 and It will fill your body with Its uplifting vibra- 
 tions. Depend upon It, instead of persons and 
 things, to bring you what you need and your de- 
 mands will never fail to be met. 
 
 There are two reasons why your demands should 
 be made of the Universal Consciousness. First be- 
 cause if you do not address your demands to the 
 Highest your objective mind will immediately as- 
 sert itself and assume the responsibility of answer- 
 ing you. It will pretend to be God and give you 
 back something purporting to be the particular 
 knowledge you demanded. By making your de- 
 mand direct to Deity it has a tendency to prevent 
 the action of the lower objective mind. It is only 
 a tendency, however, and nothing but perfect self- 
 control will ever fully prevent the attempted inter- 
 vention by the objective mind. 
 
 The second reason for addressing your demand 
 to the Supreme Consciousness, as if it were an- 
 other mind, is that you thereby have a tendency to 
 cut off communication with all other individual 
 minds who are thinking along the same general 
 line with yourself; otherwise you may get into a 
 current of thought and be as likely to get wrong 
 thoughts as right ones. 
 
 Many persons "go into the silence," or try to 
 meditate by sitting and waiting for any thought to 
 come to them. In this way they receive any im- 
 pressions that may sweep into their minds, believ- 
 ing such impressions are Divine Inspiration. But 
 all this is not Philosophical Meditation and cannot 
 
Meditation, Creation and Concentration. 153 
 
 possibly bring the good you desire. The 'proper 
 way to meditate is to get your subject before going 
 into meditation and then ask for knowledge con- 
 cerning it and wait patiently for your impression. 
 It is absolutely necessary that you should have a 
 concrete subject because concreteness is the secret 
 of success along mental as well as along all other 
 lines. The subject for meditation may be anything 
 concerning which you desire knowledge. It may be 
 knowledge pertaining to any plane of being, the 
 Spiritual, Mental, or Physical; but it must be con- 
 crete. 
 
 The majority of persons do not think, they merely 
 dream. You often hear the remark, "A penny for 
 your thoughts," and the reply usually comes, "Why, 
 really I don't know what I was thinking about." 
 People think they think, but in point of fact they 
 jump from subject to subject as a bird flits from 
 one limb of a tree to another. There is no logical 
 sequence to their thought, there is no continuity. 
 Many persons think of words, not of concepts or of 
 concrete mental things ; and this is sometimes true 
 even with persons who are called scientific. What 
 concept do most persons have of Love, Force, 
 Mind, Thought? If these words mean anything 
 then these are things. It is possible to have thoughts 
 without words and this kind of thinking is mental 
 picture making, or concrete thought which is the 
 real, creative thought. Your careless thinking has 
 very little or no results, while your concrete 
 thoughts have absolute mathematical results. 
 
154 The History and Power of Mind. 
 
 Returning to the subject of meditation we should 
 first consider the best time for this practice, for in 
 the beginning it is better to have a definite time set 
 apart for it after awhile you will be able to medi- 
 tate at any time or place. The early morning hours 
 are the best for meditation because at that time 
 great forces of nature are sweeping through you 
 and through that part of the world where the sun 
 is beginning to shine. At that time all your own 
 magnetic forces have been drawn back to you dur- 
 ing the previous sleep and you have not as yet been 
 drawn into the world's thought. If you can de- 
 vote some time to meditation before you rise you 
 will get the best results; besides you will con- 
 sciously bring yourself into a closer relationship 
 with Deity and thus establish harmony for yourself, 
 which will better enable you to undertake the duties 
 of the day. 
 
 When you demand knowledge from the Universal 
 Consciousness there goes forth from you, according 
 to the intensity of your thought, many little mag- 
 netic lines into the ether. These lines look like blue 
 rays of light and connect you with the person or 
 thing which will be the best instrument to answer 
 your demand. Sometimes this instrument is another 
 ego who consciously through telepathy sends you an 
 answer to your question. Or perhaps Deity may 
 use a material agency and connect you with a treat- 
 ise on the subject you desire information; or you 
 may have an invitation to attend a lecture which 
 
Meditation, Creation and Concentration. 155 
 
 would give you the knowledge you have de- 
 manded. 
 
 There are various ways through which your de- 
 mand may be met and Deity provides the best way 
 for you according to your development and ability 
 to receive at that time. It is true the answer does 
 not always come immediately after the demand is 
 made, and you may continue to demand for a day, 
 a week or a month before it comes. The 
 concreteness and intensity of your thought deter- 
 mine the promptness of the response. And if there 
 should be a delay it will be through no fault of the 
 Universal Consciousness or of the law of supply 
 and demand, any more than an error in your cal- 
 culations would prove wrong a rule in mathematics. 
 The fault will be in yourself; because you do not 
 think clearly enough or hold your thought picture 
 sufficiently long. If you will persistently follow the 
 rules given in this lecture, your impressions will 
 always come in time for you to use them. 
 
 Most beginners make their demand of Deity and 
 then go and ask some person for advice and opin- 
 ions along that particular line. As a consequence 
 several answers are received and none may be right 
 because Deity did not make the connections. The 
 impatient beginner did not wait for Deity to make 
 his connections, but ran around and made them 
 himself, and perhaps long after he has acted upon 
 his erroneous information the correct answer will 
 come from Deity. 
 
156 The History and Power of Mind. 
 
 Here are some rules which may help you in your 
 work: 
 
 First. Mistrust all immediate answers; because 
 the chances are that when your reply comes at 
 once, your objective mind is speaking to you. In 
 the beginning of your Philosophical Meditations 
 you have not had sufficient practice to enable you 
 always to determine the difference between the im- 
 pressions from your own objective mind and those 
 from Deity, and so it is well to repeat the question 
 at each period of meditation for several days in 
 succession. 
 
 Second. Examine the answer closely when it 
 comes in the form of words, and consider it well be- 
 cause the objective mind invariably expresses itself 
 in words and sometimes in a long dissertation. The 
 Universal Consciousness usually conveys the answer 
 to your mind in an impression or conviction. 
 
 Third. Test the answer by your reason until your 
 intuition has become fully awakened and can tell 
 you where the answer came from. For example, 
 suppose you ask if it is best for you to do a certain 
 thing and the answer comes back "yes," and shocks 
 your sense of justice or of truth, of expediency or of 
 probability. Sit in judgment upon it with your rea- 
 son until your intuition is awakened and do not act 
 hastily. 
 
 Fourth. You will find that Deity will usually an- 
 swer your question at an unexpected moment, when 
 your objective mind is off guard. By receiving an 
 
Meditation, Creation and Concentration. 157 
 
 answer at such a time you get it uncolored by your 
 objective mind or desire. 
 
 If you will remember these four suggestions or 
 tests and apply them to your work in Philosophical 
 Meditation you will receive the knowledge you 
 desire; and if mistakes should be made in the be- 
 ginning, your implicit trust in Deity will render 
 such mistakes harmless and ultimately turn them to 
 good. 
 
 The second mode of mind is Creation. Thought 
 creation is the imaging or putting into concrete 
 form a selected subject. By concrete form is meant 
 a mental picture of the selected subject invested 
 with all the qualities of that subject in its natural 
 state. Mental creation will bring you any quality 
 or any thing you want, except knowledge, which 
 comes through meditation. Imagination is not 
 fancy; it is the image-making faculty which is used 
 for the purpose of making a concrete picture of the 
 thing we desire. Do you want love? What is love? 
 If you are going to create a thing you must have a 
 concrete picture of it. Love is a force. Being a 
 force it must have a. rate of vibration, and having 
 a rate of vibration it must have a color. Therefore 
 when you picture love you must picture it accord- 
 ing to your highest conception of what that force 
 would be, and the color of the highest force upon 
 this planet is yellow. 
 
 If it is Divine love you want, see yourself stand- 
 ing in a flood of this golden vibrating force; see It 
 bathing you in Its rays, penetrating every part and 
 
158 The History and Power of Mind. 
 
 particle of your being till your body and you vibrate 
 in response to It, and until the atmosphere around 
 you pulsates and throbs with Its golden glow. If 
 you desire to send love to another, picture the Uni- 
 versal Love flowing into yourself and then see it 
 passing from your heart's center as a golden stream 
 flowing outward till it reaches the heart to which it 
 is sent. Some of your own being will enter and 
 warm the heart of the one to whom you send that 
 love force, and you will have the joy that comes 
 through loving and being loved. If you wish to 
 demonstrate love from another, see that golden 
 current of force flowing from that other person to 
 you. 
 
 If you wish to work upon the mental plane, if you 
 wish to demand a greater mentality, picture the 
 blue Cosmic Force flowing into you. Picture yourself 
 as suffused with this blue force until your whole 
 being vibrates with it. Let it magnetize your brain 
 and thrill you through and through with its uplift- 
 ing force. After a demonstration of this kind you 
 will feel capable of accomplishing any mental under- 
 taking. Do not deceive yourself into the belief 
 that one treatment with this blue Cosmic Force will 
 make of you a genius, because it will not. But con- 
 stant treatments of this kind will gradually increase 
 your mental power, which you can direct into any 
 channel you desire, and the picture you make 
 creates the center or matrix into which the Universal 
 Consciousness can bring that which you demand. 
 
 On the material plane the same picture-making 
 
Meditation, Creation and Concentration. 159 
 
 faculty is used. Do you want to build up a fine law 
 practice ? Then picture your clients coming in large 
 numbers to your office, engaging your services and 
 paying you liberally this last part of the picture is 
 an essential portion of the whole. Do you wish to 
 develop a business? Then see crowds of people 
 coming and waiting for you to serve them. But 
 good, bad and indifferent business will come unless 
 you limit your creation to a certain class ; then that 
 kind or class of business which you have created 
 will come. But while you are waiting for your 
 creations to materialize, for your demands to be met, 
 you should do cheerfully and faithfully such duties 
 as are presented to you to do. In this way you will 
 co-operate with the Supreme because you will never 
 know till a duty is done what good may come to you 
 from doing that duty well. 
 
 Do you want money? Then make a concrete pic- 
 ture of the amount you want say a one-hundred- 
 dollar bill ; or if you do not want your money all of 
 one denomination picture a sufficient number of 
 bills, of the denomination you want, to make the 
 amount you desire. But in any event make a pic- 
 ture of a definite amount and after making it, hold 
 to it till it stands out as distinct as though it had 
 materialized and you could see it before you. Then 
 say to the Universal Consciousness, "Give me this 
 creation," and repeat this demand day after day and 
 many times a day if you want to. You can do this 
 instead of dreaming or reading the signs in the 
 street cars, etc. The concreteness of your picture 
 
i6o The History and Pozver of Mind. 
 
 makes your creation a mental reality and the more 
 tenaciously you hold to the mental creation the 
 sooner will the material reality come. Creative 
 thought is always in pictures. This is true from 
 a higher or a lower standpoint. For example: the 
 Universe is the materialization of the Divine Idea; 
 the Spiritual plane received the impress of the 
 Divine Mind when creation commenced and the 
 Planetary Spirits seeing the picture, poured into it 
 their own vibratory force and so worlds were 
 brought into existence. Everything that is, existed 
 first on the mental plane, even to the clothes you 
 wear and the chair you sit on. 
 
 Let us further examine the working of the law, 
 and will take for example the concrete picture of a 
 bundle of money one hundred dollars. You have 
 made a mental picture or image of this creation and 
 now you are sending your force, which is simply 
 thought vibrations, into that picture until it becomes 
 clearly defined in the ether which surrounds your 
 own aura. The clearness of your thought and the 
 intensity of your picture make a photograph, as it 
 were, in the Universal Mind, and this is your matrix 
 or plan. If the matrix of your thumb nail should 
 be destroyed you could never have another thumb 
 nail in this life, but so long as the matrix is there, 
 although the nail may be for the time being de- 
 stroyed, another will grow. And so it is with your 
 mental matrix, so long as it is not destroyed it will 
 sometime draw to you the material thing pictured. 
 The constant or frequent vibration which your 
 
Meditation, Creation and Concentration. 161 
 
 thought causes, sets the Universal Consciousness 
 surrounding you and your picture into action. Then 
 out from you goes the small magnetic cord which 
 the Universal Consciousness directs to the sum of 
 money you have demanded. This money is some- 
 where upon the material plane when you make your 
 demand for it, and the Universal Consciousness di- 
 rects your demand, with its tiny magnetic cord at- 
 tached, to this amount of money. It is no affair of 
 yours where this one hundred dollars shall come 
 from. The avenue through which it may come is 
 for the Universal Consciousness to select, and, be- 
 ing Justice, It will bring it from the source whence 
 it should come, and no one will be unjustly treated 
 by the transference of it to your possession. 
 
 That the matrix is a reality and is the image of 
 a mental thing, is testified to by all Occultists, seers 
 and good psychics. This testimony was corrobo- 
 rated last week by the press dispatches, which stat- 
 ed that Doctor Baraduct, of Paris, has now per- 
 fected a photographic plate so sensitive as to catch 
 the image of thought pictures. The report of his 
 invention went on to state that a noted French nat- 
 uralist was requested to think of, or image some- 
 thing of his own selection while the plate was ex- 
 posed. After the negative was developed, there 
 was the picture of a rare specimen of eagle which 
 the naturalist declared was the image he had held 
 in his mind. He had been studying this unusual 
 bird for some time previous, and was able to 
 make his mental picture very clear in consequence. 
 
1 62 The History and Pozver of Mind. 
 
 The report also stated that many imperfect pictures 
 were taken from the thoughts of other persons. 
 From the general public Dr. Baraduct got the best 
 results from women who were in love. He said they 
 seemed to be able to hold in mind a very clear pic- 
 ture of those they loved. Whether these reports 
 are true or not, I am not prepared to say ; but sooner 
 or later physical science will establish this claim 
 of the Occultists. 
 
 In making your demands, you must make them 
 of Deity and not of any person. You have no right 
 to use coercive force upon another individual mind; 
 but since everything that exists belongs to Deity 
 and Deity is the source of your supply you have 
 a perfect right to demand of It. At this point of 
 our evolution we create mental pictures of things 
 already in existence and draw them to us accord- 
 ing to the operation of the law I have just explained. 
 But the time will come in our development when we 
 can image a thing and have the power to draw to- 
 gether the particles necessary to its composition, 
 and create the thing itself. This power is called 
 precipitation, and is really the highest form of crea- 
 tion. 
 
 Mental Concentration is the third mode of mind. 
 It is not in its nature creative, but it is the direction 
 of force which hastens the materialization of crea- 
 tions. Concentration is holding the mind on one 
 subject to the exclusion of every other subject. 
 Here, again, you must have a specific subject to 
 concentrate upon, and it may be any quality, thought 
 
Meditation, Creation and Concentration. 163 
 
 or thing. This mode of mind is perhaps the most 
 forceful of the three modes mentioned in this lec- 
 ture. It is therefore always an active, positive con- 
 dition of mind. The habit of concentration is not 
 acquired in a short time, but is a matter of growth, 
 a matter of practice. You will be surprised to know 
 that the average person cannot or does not, per- 
 haps I should say hold his mind for ten consecu- 
 tive seconds on one subject. 
 
 For example, take this creation we last selected, 
 the bundle of money. Try to hold your mind on 
 that one-hundred-dollar creation for a moment. Af- 
 ter a few seconds you begin to wonder whether that 
 creation is really coming, and then you bring your 
 mind back to your subject, and look at that mental 
 picture for another couple of seconds. Then you 
 suddenly remember that there is a magnetic cord 
 attached to each demand that goes forth from you, 
 and you wonder if that magnetic cord is all right; 
 then you try to see the cord and the first thing you 
 know you have lost sight of the money, and are 
 creating a magnetic cord attachment to your de- 
 mand. Suddenly you become conscious that your 
 mind is wandering and you wonder if you are con- 
 centrating right; and thus your thoughts skip from 
 one thing to another and you learn by experience 
 that concentration is gained only by patient and 
 constant practice. 
 
 Knowing something about the law of periodicity, 
 which makes and unmakes habits, you may take 
 advantage of it in learning how to concentrate. 
 
164 The History and Power of Mind. 
 
 Some suggestions may be helpful to you in acquir- 
 ing this art of concentration and making it a habit 
 of thought. Select an hour in the morning, or take 
 a part of the same hour that you give to meditation ; 
 give the first ten or twenty minutes to meditation 
 and the remainder of the time to concentration. If 
 this practice is persisted in for several days in suc- 
 cession you will find your concentration becoming 
 easier, because the law of periodicity will be oper- 
 ating with you ; and the impetus thus given to con- 
 centration soon makes the practice a habit of mind. 
 
 Look at your mental creation quietly, but in- 
 tensely. Think of the picture say the money 
 for about twenty minutes. Concentration means 
 looking at your picture. It is not very hard work 
 to sit and look at one hundred dollars; indeed, it 
 can be made a very pleasant thing to do, if you 
 realize that it is yours. Concentration should al- 
 ways be a pleasant exercise of will, a quiet but posi- 
 tive condition of mind. Let the mind rest entirely 
 upon your mental picture and claim it by saying or 
 thinking "that is mine, because I have created it." 
 
 Many persons make hard work of trying to con- 
 centrate. This is a mistaken waste of physical force. 
 When you see a pretty flower and look at it admir- 
 ingly, you are thinking of that flower and are con- 
 centrating upon it, because for the moment you 
 are thinking of it to the exclusion of everything 
 else. When you go to the theater, and become ab- 
 sorbed by the acting, you are concentrating upon 
 the acting. With most persons, in trying to con- 
 
Meditation, Creation and Concentration. 165 
 
 centrate, the tendency is to imagine that they are 
 placing themselves in a false or unnatural condition 
 of mind; they feel that they are going to do some- 
 thing they have never done before, or something 
 they are not accustomed to do. Perhaps they will 
 shut their teeth together, and whisper tragically, 
 "Now I am going to concentrate," and then, with 
 clenched fists and corrugated brows, they knot their 
 muscles till the perspiration starts, and the breath 
 comes hard and fast. Dismiss the mistaken idea, 
 for that is an artificial condition of mind. Concen- 
 tration is not a fiery ordeal; it is a natural and a 
 pleasant recreation, or should be. 
 
 Put your body in an easy position, and whenever 
 your attention is attracted to your body you may 
 know it is getting tense; then relax and forget 
 about it, because all your force is needed in looking 
 at your picture. But after awhile your mind may 
 grow tired of looking at any particular form. For 
 instance, in concentrating on that bundle of money, 
 you may not be tired of the money, or of the con- 
 centration, but you may become tired of that par- 
 ticular form of picture. If you have been looking 
 at greenbacks, change your picture to gold or silver 
 for awhile. It does not matter what kind of money 
 you have, so long as you get the amount you de- 
 sire. In this way you see your matrix is not de- 
 stroyed, but only the form of your picture is 
 changed. Another very good aid to concentration 
 is to form the habit of concentrating your thoughts 
 upon everything you do in your daily life. If you 
 
1 66 The History and Power of Mind. 
 
 are tying your shoe, think of tying that shoe until 
 it is tied; do not be tying your shoe and trying 
 to read a newspaper at the same time. If it is dress- 
 ing for dinner, think of your dressing; do not be 
 dressing and practicing a solo at the same time. 
 This regular practice of concentration will greatly 
 quicken your power, and enable you to do thorough- 
 ly and speedily every thing you undertake. The 
 successful men of the world are those who have 
 practiced, and have acquired, the art of concentrat- 
 ing upon special lines. 
 
 Hundreds of Mental Scientists and Christian Sci- 
 entists of our time, and the Occultists throughout 
 the Ages, have demonstrated the truths given in 
 this lecture. You may believe these principles, but 
 you will never know them until you demonstrate 
 them for yourself. If you persist in practicing the 
 rules given, you can draw to yourselves anything 
 you care to picture. If you desire success, social 
 position, any spiritual, mental or physical thing, 
 it can be gained by simply creating and holding the 
 picture in your mind. It makes no difference 
 whether the thing you create is good for you to have, 
 or whether you use or misuse it after you get it, you 
 will get whatever you clearly picture. If you want 
 a thousand dollars for the purpose of helping a 
 poor family, or to hire a man to murder another, it 
 makes no difference with the operation of the law. 
 Your demand will be met if you make your picture 
 of the thousand dollars. But if you misuse your 
 powers or direct your forces to the detriment of 
 
Meditation, Creation and Concentration. 167 
 
 another, you must take the consequences and these 
 are very direful, because the law of Justice acts 
 much more quickly upon persons who consciously 
 misuse mental forces than upon those who do wrong 
 in a half conscious manner. 
 
 It is always well to meditate before you create 
 a thing. So many persons are continually creating 
 and demanding things they do not really want. . Ask 
 the Supreme Consciousness, God, Father, whatever 
 you choose to call the Great Source, if there is any 
 reason why you should not have the thing you de- 
 sire; and when the impression comes, "there is no 
 reason why you should not have it," then make 
 your picture, claim it for your own, and then con- 
 centrate upon it until it comes. But suppose you 
 think you would like to go to Europe, and, without 
 meditating upon it, or asking if it is best for you 
 to go, you make a picture of yourself on the steamer 
 with your ticket for Europe. You will go to Eu- 
 rope, but you may be very ill after you get there, 
 or you may be shipwrecked going or coming, or 
 many things may happen to make you miserable on 
 your trip. If you had meditated upon the matter, 
 and asked for the knowledge of what it was best 
 to do, you would have received the impression that 
 it was not best to go at that time. Then had you 
 acted upon that impression, and stayed at home, all 
 these calamities would have been avoided. 
 
LECTURE EIGHT. 
 
 LESSER OCCULT OR PSYCHIC FORCES AND 
 THEIR DANGERS. 
 
 At this period of our history most people make 
 the word Occultism synonymous with psychism. In 
 reality there is a vast difference between the two. 
 The meaning of the former word you have hereto- 
 fore seen, and now it remains for us to examine one 
 of its sub-divisions, which is psychism. It is very 
 essential that we should know something about the 
 psychic realm, if for no other reason than that we 
 may be able to avoid it. It is rather a dark side 
 of nature; nevertheless, it seems desirable that you 
 should know the truth, though it may offend 
 and even frighten some of you. The necessity for 
 this lecture is due, first, to the fact that people who 
 take up this line of study are, for this very reason, 
 in a position where they must contact very closely 
 the psychic realm; and second, that humanity as a 
 whole, in its evolutionary career, is now beginning 
 to approach the psychic plane. The psychically ad- 
 vanced members of the human race have contacted 
 it already, much to the detriment of some of them, 
 and for these reasons it is the imperative duty of 
 someone who knows the facts of nature to reveal 
 them, even though the revelation should excite the 
 incredulity and scorn of the ignorant, and possibly 
 
 168 
 
Lesser Occult or Psychic Forces and their Dangers. \ 69 
 
 the enmity of those who, in their researches, have 
 contacted the psychic side, and have fallen under 
 its deceptive influence. 
 
 Those of you who are familiar with Bulwer's 
 writings know that there is a vein of mysticism run- 
 ning through them. "The Coming Race," for ex- 
 ample, depicts the sixth race that is now being born 
 in America ; and his other mystic novels, such as "The 
 Strange Story/' "Haunted House," and that great 
 Occult novel, "Zanoni," all reveal much to those 
 who are interested in Occultism. The novel, "Za- 
 noni," is really the story of one-half of a soul trying 
 to find its other half, and it portrays the dangers of 
 different kinds that beset the student on his evo- 
 lutionary journey. Zanoni finds the woman the 
 other half of his soul but she is engaged to marry 
 a person who is anxious to study Occultism. Za- 
 noni seeks an old Occultist, who agrees to accept 
 the young man as a student, providing he gives up 
 his lady love to Zanoni. The youth has pursued 
 his studies but a short time when he comes in con- 
 tact with the "dwellers upon the threshold," which 
 in the novel are depicted as being tremendous forces 
 and entities that were turned loose upon the defence- 
 less boy. We read how all the sediment of his na- 
 ture was brought out, how he was tempted, and 
 how he yielded to temptation, and at last went to 
 moral destruction. 
 
 These "dwellers on the threshold" are what we 
 all have to face when we contact the psychic realm, 
 and not only do the students of Occultism have to 
 
i 70 The History and Power of Mind. 
 
 meet them, but the whole human race, as it de- 
 velops, must come in contact with this realm. So 
 let us see who and what these "dwellers on the 
 threshold" are. Many of them are detached object- 
 ive minds. We have seen in another lecture how 
 the objective and subjective minds were united and 
 became men. We also saw that a battle has to be 
 waged between these two minds when the subject- 
 ive awakens, and undertakes the control of its af- 
 fairs. In the course of time the fight between these 
 two minds of man becomes so tremendous that there 
 sometimes comes a cleavage between the two, and 
 the subjective conquers its lower mind, making of 
 it a tractable vehicle. But sometimes the object- 
 ive mind is stronger than the subjective, and re- 
 fuses to be governed. Then it is that a separation 
 comes, and the objective mind, strong in its vic- 
 tory, becomes detached from its subjective. The 
 subjective, being unwilling to remain under the 
 dominion of its objective mind, leaves it to its ulti- 
 mate destruction, and goes back into the Infinite, 
 to rest until another Cosmic Day shall come, when 
 it can start forth with a new objective mind. 
 
 This rebellious objective mind is so strong that 
 it may continue to occupy its physical body for 
 several years after the separation, and goes through 
 the remainder of that life the semblance of a hu- 
 man being, but devoid of moral character. When 
 it excarnates and its body is destroyed, it may or 
 may not be strong enough to reincarnate. If it 
 does, then it will be of an intellectual animal nature, 
 
Lesser Occult or Psychic Forces and their Dangers. 171 
 
 with no conception of morality or spirituality. In 
 case it is not strong enough to reincarnate, it be- 
 comes a "dweller upon the threshold/' an individ- 
 ualized consciousness upon the subjective side of 
 life, invisible to the physical eyes of men, but active 
 in its destructive desires and purposes. It becomes 
 one of the many unpleasant forces or entities which 
 we have to come in contact with when we reach 
 the psychic realm. 
 
 In your study of mankind you will find many of 
 these objective minds without their subjective or 
 higher principle, and this is especially true among 
 the older races and sub-races. We find them here 
 in our own country, but not in such large numbers 
 as in China, Japan, and in Egypt. These are the 
 persons whom we are pleased to designate as de- 
 generates and perverts, also many of our most 
 hardened criminals. Such entities seem to be ma- 
 liciously wicked, and persistently destroy and pull 
 down everyone with whom they associate. These 
 are they who excarnate and go to the first plane 
 of the subjective world and become the dwellers 
 upon the threshold. 
 
 But there are other denizens of that plane. Every 
 soul that excarnates, if it is not able to pass into 
 the planes beyond, by reason of its undevelopment 
 and strong animal nature, must remain there, and 
 become a dweller on the threshold also. Then there 
 is the third class of dwellers called elementals. 
 These centers of consciousness and force have not 
 developed to the point where incarnation is possible 
 
172 The History and Power of Mind. 
 
 for them. They are the fairies, goblins, brownies 
 and undines. These entities are not fanciful crea- 
 tions of the imagination, as many persons suppose, 
 for they do exist in elemental forms; and when 
 they have been seen and described by persons 
 whose psychic sense made them conscious of them, 
 they were realities. Man cannot imagine that which 
 does not exist, for no one can make a picture of the 
 non-existant. 
 
 Elementals are created by the thoughts of men. 
 As man develops he thinks more and more force- 
 fully; and as he thinks, he creates little centers of 
 consciousness within Divine Mind. These centers 
 of consciousness assume different forms according 
 to the quality of the thoughts which created them. 
 The elemental grows very much in the same manner 
 that the embryo grows while living off its mother. 
 These centers which man creates draw strength 
 and vitality from him, and remain within the pho- 
 tosphere of their creator. But since whatever is 
 created upon the mental plane must, in course of 
 time, objectivize, or embody itself in a physical 
 form, some time these elementals must take on ma- 
 terial bodies of some kind. There are the so-called 
 good and bad elementals and when they become 
 embodied in animal or insect form, that form will 
 be assumed which corresponds to the nature of the 
 consciousness seeking embodiment. If the elemen- 
 tal be of a mischievous, destructive nature, then it 
 was the result of mischievous, destructive thoughts 
 of man, and will take upon itself the form of an 
 
Lesser Occult or Psychic Forces and their Dangers. 173 
 
 animal or insect that will annoy man and destroy 
 his property. Because it is a law that whatsoever 
 man sends forth mentally must and will return to 
 him. 
 
 Then there is still another kind of thought crea- 
 tions of men which become embodied soon after 
 they are born. These are the licentious, obscene 
 thoughts of both sexes, that become the creeping, 
 crawling bugs and vermin which infest untidy 
 homes, second and third-class hotels and public 
 houses. Then there are the biting, stinging thoughts 
 which embody themselves as flies, wasps, bees and 
 mosquitoes; and the poisonous thoughts which be- 
 come spiders -and reptiles. These miserable crea- 
 tures born of man's lower mind, cannot use the 
 atoms of a higher rate of vibration for their bod- 
 ies, but must use those atoms which they vibrate 
 harmoniously with. They gather up the diseased 
 atoms, the dirty atoms, those atoms which can no 
 longer be used by men or beasts, and through forms 
 composed of these, express themselves upon the ma- 
 terial plane. And thus man himself creates the de- 
 structive things of earth which turn and wage war 
 against him ; for "God saw everything that He had 
 made, and behold it was very good." 
 
 When an entity has attained a sufficient density 
 within the subjective realm to be ready for embodi- 
 ment, it has come to a point where it can have a 
 direct influence upon human life, and it then reacts 
 upon its creator according to the nature that was 
 given it. When these elementals separate from the 
 
174 The History and Power of Mind. 
 
 photosphere in which they were created, they often 
 leave their creator, and impinge upon the auras 
 of other persons. Sometimes they are utilized in 
 magic, particularly in that form known as ceremo- 
 nial magic, and students of Occultism sometimes use 
 them for the purpose of producing psychic phe- 
 nomena. The transference of material substances 
 from one room to another through closed doors and 
 solid walls, or the disintegration and reintegration 
 of so-called solid things are performed through 
 utilizing these elemental forces of nature. 
 
 Then there are the minds of animals, or animal 
 souls, if you choose to so designate those centers 
 of consciousness, which have been embodied, have 
 excarnated and have passed on to the subjective 
 side of nature to await another opportunity to be- 
 come re-embodied. These subjective entities still 
 possess all their animal propensities, but have no 
 physical means of expressing them and they belong 
 to the vast multitude of dwellers upon the thresh- 
 old. 
 
 Where is this threshold? In Catholicism it is 
 known as Purgatory; in Protestantism it is Hades. 
 You remember the words of the Creed: "He de- 
 scended into Hades." Hades is the place for de- 
 parted spirits. It is the sidereal realm of the me- 
 dieval mystic ; it is the astral or psychic plane of the 
 modern mystic and theosophist; it is the first plane 
 of the spiritualist, the plane for earth-bound souls. 
 It is here interpenetrating this physical world of 
 ours. We have seen in another lecture that this 
 
Lesser Occult or Psychic Forces and their Dangers. 175 
 
 earth is surrounded by five belts or zones which 
 extend out into space, according to their color and 
 vibration. This threshold is the first of the sub- 
 jective planes, and is called the threshold because 
 it is the crossing over point from objective life into 
 subjective life, and is the doorway through which 
 egos re-enter earth life. All souls must pass through 
 it, but the higher developed ones stay there but a 
 very short time and never a moment after they 
 are liberated from their physical bodies. This is 
 one of the reasons why Occultists advocate crema- 
 tion of the physical body, because by this process 
 the man in a few moments is free to go to the plane 
 where he belongs instead of being chained to his 
 body on the threshold for weeks, months, or years, 
 as the case may be. Souls are magnetically bound 
 to their bodies, and until "the silver cord is loos- 
 ened" they cannot be free. Catholics say masses 
 for the souls of the dead that these souls may be 
 released from the threshold, or purgatory. Years 
 ago, when many of the priests were Occultists, a 
 mass was written or chanted in the musical key 
 which corresponded to the color of the deceased. 
 The sound of the chanted mass disrupted the "sil- 
 ver cord," as a prolonged sound upon the physical 
 plane will disrupt a material mass, if its keynote be 
 sounded long enough. 
 
 As man's vibrations are raised he necessarily con- 
 tacts with this first subjective realm ; and the influ- 
 ence of the four classes of entities, previously men- 
 tioned and popularly known as the psychic forces 
 
176 The History and Power of Mind. 
 
 of nature, are exerted upon him. The unconscious 
 sensitive is always susceptible to influences which 
 produce moods that other persons do not have. At 
 times he feels great depression, fears impending 
 calamities and is influenced in various ways by the 
 denizens of the next plane. And when an excar- 
 nated objective mind who has lost its higher mind 
 finds a sensitive person whom it can control in mind 
 and body, it immediately commences to manage his 
 affairs. It enjoys by proxy, as it were, the intoxi- 
 cating liquors that it forces its victim to drink. It 
 gratifies its lusts by controlling its victim, and com- 
 pelling him to sin. It revenges itself, through its 
 ignorant victim, upon persons whom it hates. Fear- 
 ful crimes are many times committed by persons 
 who are almost or quite unconscious of what they 
 are doing, and who waken to consciousness inside 
 prison walls to be told of their terrible deeds. In 
 cases of emotional insanity, where a man tempo- 
 rarily loses self-control and murders another, could 
 the matter be investigated from the psychic side 
 of life, it would be seen that the murderer was often 
 but an unconscious victim of a disembodied fiend, 
 who desired to commit the murder, and used the 
 unfortunate sensitive as an instrument. 
 
 The denizens of the next plane, and especially 
 the excarnated minds of depraved men and women 
 and the detached objective minds, utilize mankind 
 for the purpose of vicarious enjoyment. A drunk- 
 ard does not lose his love for liquor when he leaves 
 his physical body. There is nothing in the process 
 
Lesser Occult or Psychic Forces and their Dangers. 177 
 
 of the change called death which changes character. 
 "In the place the tree falleth, there it shall be." It 
 is natural that a drunkard should wish to enjoy 
 what he considers the pleasure of drinking, and so he 
 selects a subject that he can influence. This sensitive, 
 whose will is not strong enough to resist this 
 strange influence which is thrown upon him, yields 
 to the temptation, and is overpowered. He indulges 
 what he believes to be his own appetite for rum 
 and the more he drinks the more he wants. When 
 he is overcome with the fumes of liquor he is crowd- 
 ed out of his body by the controlling entity, who 
 takes possession of it, and enjoys a vicarious drunk 
 at the expense of his sensitive victim. A love for 
 gambling, intense sex desire, civic wrongs and all 
 kinds of crime are often traceable for their cause 
 to what many persons call at this time "spirit con- 
 trol." When we read of a horrible murder or crime 
 being committed by some man who declares "God 
 spoke" and told him to do it, you may know the 
 cause was just behind the scenes, and the crime was 
 instigated by a dweller on the threshold. 
 
 There are semi-conscious sensitives who are in- 
 fluenced by the denizens of the next plane. By 
 semi-conscious sensitives I mean persons who have 
 reached a point in their development where they 
 are conscious of the existence of a psychic plane, 
 but do not know the nature of it. They are con- 
 scious of psychic forces, but do not know the nature 
 of those forces. Most persons, when they reach 
 this point in their development, begin to investigate 
 
178 The History and Power of Mind. 
 
 psychic phenomena immediately. A student of Oc- 
 cultism who is a conscious sensitive, is required to 
 develop upon the mental plane before he is per- 
 mitted to study the psychic realm. He must first 
 attain the proper poise and development by learn- 
 ing to think clearly. Then he is taught how to use 
 Cosmic Forces, and to surround himself with pro- 
 tecting currents, before he is taught how to func- 
 tion upon the psychic plane. After this has been 
 accomplished he can look down upon the psychic 
 realm and can penetrate into it without fear of at- 
 tracting to himself unpleasant companions, or get- 
 ting into unfortunate or compromising situations. 
 It is impossible for ignorant or semi-ignorant 
 persons to investigate the psychic realm without 
 being more or less influenced by it, and perhaps it 
 will be well for us to examine the various classes 
 of investigators, and see something of the dangers 
 to which they are subjected. I think we may safely 
 group the investigators of spiritualistic phenomena 
 or spiritualism in the first class, and this class should 
 also include the members of the Society for Psychi- 
 cal Research, and kindred organizations, because 
 these are nothing more nor less than investigators 
 of Spiritualism under the guise of science. Spirit- 
 ualism is necromancy revamped, and is a practice 
 that has been inveighed against by those who knew 
 the dangers attending it, and by those who wrote 
 the sacred books, since mankind came upon this 
 earth. Its six chief aspects are automatic writing, 
 inspirational writing, inspirational speaking, trance 
 
Lesser Occult or Psychic Forces and their Dangers. 179 
 
 mediumship, independent slate writing, and mate- 
 rializing mediumship. In all of these, passivity is 
 the sine qua non of success, because mediumship 
 is the end in view, and passivity is the means by 
 which it is to be attained. 
 
 And after mediumship is attained, what does it 
 mean? Simply that this person has become an 
 instrument through whom these excarnated, unat- 
 tached objective minds and other denizens of the 
 psychic plane, may speak or write, or perform like 
 clowns in a circus. And what good comes from it? 
 These entities, many of them, have become detached 
 from their own higher principle, and must live on 
 someone in order that their existence may be pro- 
 longed. Because without its subjective, the object- 
 ive mind slowly deteriorates, and after a time fades 
 out. These ignorant or malicious lower minds per- 
 sonate our departed friends, and glibly give us in- 
 structions about our domestic and business mat- 
 ters. They advise us when and where to buy and 
 sell stocks; they give us long lectures on religion, 
 and advise us about the training of our children. 
 Think of such a creature as Jack the Ripper giving 
 us a lecture on morality! Sometimes these "angel 
 guides" for so they insist upon being called as- 
 pire to fame, and pose as Lincoln, Shakespeare, or 
 Napoleon, forgetting that at that moment, at a 
 dozen places in different cities of the world, alleged 
 Lincolns, Shakespeares and Napoleons are doing 
 the same thing. They urge us to become mediums 
 and organize developing circles in order that they 
 
180 The History and Power of Mind. 
 
 may teach us political reforms or all about the eter- 
 nal progression of the soul. And all the time we 
 are studying under them and are worshiping at 
 their seances, they are absorbing our magnetism 
 and are ruining, mentally, morally, physically, and 
 often financially, those persons who become their 
 mediums. For mediumship soon becomes either 
 possession or obsession, and both these conditions 
 lead to insanity. In discussing this question here- 
 after, the term obsession will be used to designate 
 all classes of cases where a human body is wholly 
 or in part controlled by a disembodied entity. 
 
 Most of the insanity of the present day is due to 
 obsession; and insanity increases as humanity be- 
 comes more sensitive to the influence of these dwell- 
 ers upon the threshold. There are cases of hallu- 
 cination when an insane person believes he has ex- 
 changed his personality for that of another ; or who 
 fancies he is a distinguished personage, and insists 
 upon being treated with great homage. Epilepsy 
 is nearly always attributable to obsession, and the 
 best treatment for all these cases is mental treat- 
 ment. Making the patient positive will restore self- 
 control and health where medicine and confinement 
 will utterly fail. 
 
 An investigator of the psychic plane, of the first 
 class, must either become a medium himself, or use 
 a medium for the purpose of studying that plane. In 
 either case he is subjected to imposition relative to 
 the cause of the phenomena obtained. It is a well- 
 known fact that a large percentage of the communi- 
 
Lesser Occult or Psychic Forces and their Dangers. 181 
 
 cations received from so-called spirits are untrue, or 
 are of a nature one would not expect from the inhab- 
 itants of that plane. Mediumship usually leads event- 
 ually to insanity or to the premature death of the 
 medium. Even when there seems to be a controlling 
 entity of a comparatively higher order than is usu- 
 ally found on that plane, there is necessarily a con 
 stant diminution of the medium's forces. And as 
 the vital forces of the medium diminishes, he becomes 
 unreliable, and frequently has to resort to fraud 
 and pretence in order to continue his exhibitions. 
 Everyone who knows anything about this subject 
 cannot deny that there are sometimes genuine phe- 
 nomena, but more often they are simulated. But 
 one result can come from such fraudulent practices, 
 and that is degeneracy of the moral character of the 
 medium and of all who associate with him in his 
 dishonorable business. Many mediums become hab- 
 itual drunkards as a consequence of having to take 
 intoxicating liquor to stimulate their failing strength 
 after being vampirized into a weakened condition by 
 the entities that control them and absorb their mag- 
 netism. 
 
 It is admitted by unprejudiced investigators of 
 psychism that the majority of "Spirit Controls" are 
 of a "low order." But this is explained by their 
 statement that "like attracts like," and that medi- 
 ums and investigators attract "spirits" of a nature 
 kindred to themselves. It is also admitted by all 
 investigators that a positive, strong character is 
 incapable of becoming a medium, and frequently 
 
1 82 The History and Power of Mind. 
 
 prevents phenomena from taking place at a seance 
 when he is present. Taking these two statements 
 into consideration, it is logical to conclude that there 
 are no positive, strong characters who attempt to 
 control men, as the Occultists who have a knowl- 
 edge of the subjective planes of being have always 
 maintained. 
 
 And after all, what has been gained from all the 
 phenomena from any one of the five sources men- 
 tioned? Has any new philosophy been presented, 
 or any great discovery been made, through these 
 "spirit guides?" "By their fruits ye shall know 
 them," and the result of the investigations of the 
 Society for Psychical Research along these lines 
 have merely verified the phenomena given by the 
 Spiritualists since 1849, and not one of the investi- 
 gators has as yet discovered the true cause of the 
 phenomena, or formulated the law under which they 
 occur. One of the greatest tests given by these 
 mediums is this. Some entity speaks or writes 
 through them to someone concerning matters that 
 were known only to the departed and to the inves- 
 tigator. But. this is no proof that the controlling 
 entity is the soul of the dear departed, because any 
 disembodied entity can read the mind of the inves- 
 tigator, and can see the thought pictures that are 
 in his aura. In this manner the past of any person 
 may be read, because it is written around him in 
 his photosphere, and goes with him wherever he 
 goes. 
 
 A local preacher says he receives communica- 
 
Lesser Occult or Psychic Forces and their Dangers. 183 
 
 tions from his dead son and cites facts only 
 known to himself and that son. These communi- 
 cations he declares are proofs of the identity of his 
 deceased son. He says his son revealed to him 
 where certain articles and papers were after he, 
 the son, had passed from this life, and that he him- 
 self did not even know of the existence of them. 
 This is no proof that the information came from the 
 man's son, because any disembodied entity could 
 have done the same ; and it is just as likely that the 
 information was given by the objective mind of 
 Captain Kidd as it is that it came from the preach- 
 er's, son. 
 
 The second class of investigators may be known 
 as passive clairvoyants, or those persons who cul- 
 tivate passive mediumship for the purpose of func- 
 tioning upon the subjective plane. Such a clair- 
 voyant permits an entity to enfold or envelop his 
 body while it impresses a mental picture upon his 
 mind and then the medium describes the picture 
 he sees. This is not true clairvoyance, because the 
 entity that impresses the medium is responsible for 
 the picture, and it may be nothing but a fanciful 
 creation of its own. The medium has not seen a 
 reality, but has looked at the mental creations of 
 another; and when we consider the character of 
 most controlling entities, we feel safe in saying that 
 possibly their pictures may not be altogether re- 
 liable. 
 
 The third class of investigators may be called 
 artificial clairvoyants and is composed largely of 
 
 
184 The History <md Power of Mind. 
 
 crystal gazers, magic-mirror gazers, etc., who, by 
 these practices, throw themselves into a self-induced 
 semi-hypnosis. In this state or condition they be- 
 come susceptible to psychical influences, and men- 
 tally impressed pictures are the result. Vanity, or 
 the desire for money-making, is usually the cause 
 for this kind of practice, rather than a desire for 
 growth or development, and the dangers from psy- 
 chic influences are fully as great as in the classes 
 before mentioned. 
 
 But there is a true clairvoyance or seership which 
 depends upon two things a well-developed subjec- 
 tive mind that rules its objective mind, and a pecu- 
 liar physiological condition. Nearly in the center of 
 the brain of every human being is situated a tiny or- 
 gan called the pineal gland, and this is the chief cen- 
 ter through which the mind must function, in order 
 that man may possess the X-ray vision that enables 
 him to look beyond the material plane, upon the in- 
 ner or subjective planes of consciousness. This gland 
 can be attuned to finer vibrations than register in 
 any of our other senses, and these vibrations relate us 
 to the inner worlds or planes. The student of Occult- 
 ism, at a certain point in his progress, is taught 
 how to direct special cosmic currents of force into 
 this gland to enlarge and raise its vibrations. When 
 this has been accomplished, the student can func- 
 tion upon the subjective plane by an effort of his will 
 as easily and well as he can see on the objective plane 
 by opening his physical eyes. With this class of 
 clairvoyants there is no passivity or trance condi- 
 
Lesser Occult or Psychic Forces and their Dangers. 185 
 
 tion, but there is a conscious shifting of the con- 
 sciousness from one plane to another; and it is ac- 
 cording to the development of the man whether or 
 not he is able to function upon many or few of the 
 subjective planes of being. 
 
 The unattached student of Occultism is one with- 
 out a Master or Teacher. He is one who knows 
 of Occult powers and forces, and longs to possess 
 them, and he courageously faces the dangers with- 
 out assistance. This great desire for growth leads 
 him to seek quick development, which is natural. 
 The great majority of people, when they first hear 
 of Occultism, and Occult teachers, immediately want 
 a teacher, and their cry goes up : "Give us a teach- 
 er." Then they begin to think they are developing 
 rapidly in Occultism and when certain subjective 
 influences come about and they feel their peculiar 
 vibrations, they immediately conclude that a Master 
 has come to teach and help them. These subjective 
 entities, wishing to gain control of ambitious 
 students, impress them with the thought they love 
 to entertain, and soon these students of Occultism 
 are under the influence, and perhaps under the ab- 
 solute control of the dwellers upon the threshold. 
 
 Let me tell you now and let it always remain 
 with you, that no teacher of Occultism will ever 
 try to control you in mind or body. You are divine 
 because you are a part of Deity and therefore your 
 body and your life is yours. A teacher has no more 
 right to control your mind than he has to violate 
 your body and no student, teacher, or Master of 
 
1 86 The History and Power of Mind. 
 
 Occultism will ever attempt it. So when you feel 
 peculiar influences around you, or if you hear voices 
 saying, " We have come to help you, you are pro- 
 gressing rapidly," you may know it is the dwellers 
 of the threshold who are talking to you. All stu- 
 dents of Occultism, whether attached or unattached, 
 are helped by the Great Ones, but only when they 
 are earnestly trying to help themselves. They are 
 never touched or coerced, or worked upon subject- 
 ively. 
 
 If you are trying to work out a problem, you may 
 suddenly receive an idea which will make everything 
 plain to you. If you are ill, you may suddenly re- 
 ceive a suggestion to go somewhere, or do some- 
 thing which will help you to recover your health. 
 If you are out of a position and need money, some- 
 thing or someone may be brought forward to help 
 you. The student who is studying along these deep- 
 er lines is always watched and will be helped when 
 he deserves help. The student who declares that 
 he is going to work out his own salvation, that he 
 is going to develop, and uses the knowledge he has 
 gained to live according to his ideal, is a probationer, 
 and if he persists in this course for a period of seven 
 years he will draw to himself a teacher in physical 
 form. That teacher may be a Master, an Adept, 
 or an advanced student, but a teacher who is best 
 suited to him in his development at that time. And 
 during the seven years of probation, help will be 
 given to him in various ways. 
 
 It does not follow that everyone who thinks he 
 
Lesser Occult or Psychic Forces and their Dangers. 187 
 
 is ready for the higher Occult teachings is really 
 prepared for them. For example, during the last 
 century a number of persons heard of the Masters 
 and Adepts, and seventy-two curious individuals 
 started out to become students. An Adept whom I 
 know promised to give them one year of proba- 
 tion on the condition that those who successfully 
 stood all the tests given during that year should 
 be accepted students. The first thing he did was to 
 tell each aspirant after Occult teachings what kind 
 of life he had lived, and was living at that time. He 
 told them about their faults, and how those faults 
 should be corrected. He took away their wines 
 and all kinds of intoxicating liquors and also their 
 pipes and tobacco; he forbade gambling and im- 
 moral associates and ordered certain hours set apart 
 for meditation and concentration. In less than one 
 week one-half the number of aspirants for Occult 
 knowledge turned their backs on Occultism in in- 
 dignation. The others struggled on for awhile, but 
 were so badly beset by their old habits and by the 
 subjective entities that were aroused by the new 
 order of things and who immediately set about 
 trying to drag these students back into their old 
 habits of living, that one after another fell out of 
 line, till at the end of the year only one person out 
 of the seventy-two had succeeded in living up to 
 his promises. This man was given permission to 
 withdraw from the world and go into a lodge, where 
 he was taught Occultism. 
 
 Let those who desire to push on in their evolu- 
 
188 The History and Power of Mind. 
 
 tion take the attitude that they will not study psy- 
 chic forces at all ; that they will not look for a Mas- 
 ter in that realm of being; that they will begin 
 work by building up character and by practicing 
 what has been taught ; for I tell you truly, the psy- 
 chic realm can offer you absolutely nothing of value 
 at this time. It is the higher and better knowledge 
 that you can utilize, that you should desire; the 
 true Occultism which teaches the laws of being. 
 
LECTURE NINE. 
 
 HYPNOTISM, AND HOW TO GUARD 
 AGAINST IT. 
 
 In 1734 an old student of Occultism re-incarnated. 
 His life was not dissimilar from the life of his as- 
 sociates except that he had the benefit of a better 
 early education, and an opportunity to study medi- 
 cine later on in his life. He attended a medical 
 college in Vienna and graduated in 1766, and soon 
 after that time resumed his study of Occultism un- 
 der the same Master who had taught him in the 
 previous life. It required but a very short time, 
 after he began the practice of medicine, for him to 
 learn something about the deficiencies in the sys- 
 tem of therapeutics, as it was then understood. 
 In 1778 he moved to Paris, which was then the sci- 
 entific world, and began the practice of a system of 
 magnetic treatments of the sick which startled the 
 scientists and brought down upon him the con- 
 demnation of many of the medical men of that 
 time. He cured many cases that the physicians 
 had pronounced incurable and, of course, aroused 
 the jealousy and hatred of many of the medical 
 profession. I am speaking of Frederick Anton 
 Mesmer. 
 
 The cures this man performed were so very re- 
 markable that all the wealth and intelligence of the 
 
 189 
 
190 The History and Power of Mind. 
 
 world went to Paris to be treated by this new sys- 
 tem, and as a result, the medical profession began 
 to wage war against him as they did during this 
 last century against the Christian and Mental Sci- 
 entists and the Osteopaths. For human nature was 
 then no better than now, and the green-eyed mon- 
 ster of jealousy cut a very conspicuous figure with 
 the treatment of Mesmer, as it does with all other 
 persons who innovate old methods. After Mes- 
 mer's fame became unbearable to the scientists, an 
 investigating committee was appointed to look into 
 the new system. It reported adversely to Mesmer, 
 of course, and soon his clientele began falling away 
 from him. 
 
 In 1783 he founded the Order of Universal Har- 
 mony, a secret order built upon the lines of Occult- 
 ism, under the direction of his teacher, who was 
 also in Paris, giving many great demonstrations of 
 his Occult powers. I refer to Count Saint-Germain. 
 This Order of Universal Harmony was the gateway 
 through which all persons could enter who were 
 prepared at that time to take up Occult studies. 
 But as time passed, many of the members dropped 
 out and the Order gradually grew smaller and 
 smaller until but a very few were left. To these 
 faithful ones Mesmer taught the Occult system of 
 therapeutics, Occultism, and the manipulation of 
 that force which he designated as Mesmerism 
 naming it modestly after himself. After the public 
 had deserted him, and most of his students had 
 turned their attention to other things than Occult- 
 
Hypnotism, and How to Guard Against It. igi 
 
 ism, he removed to England where he met with 
 very little success, and finally went back to the 
 Fatherland, where he died in 1815. 
 
 After Mesmer's demise, for many years nothing 
 was heard from his students or from his system; 
 but in 1841 Doctor Braid, of Manchester, England, 
 commenced to investigate along Mesmer's lines of 
 thought, and inaugurated a system somewhat simi- 
 lar in principle, which he called Braidism, but which 
 subsequently became known as hypnotism. Later, 
 some scientific students in Paris and elsewhere be- 
 gan investigating along the lines laid down by Dr. 
 Braid, and just about a century after Mesmer had 
 been condemned and called an imposter by the 
 French scientists, his teachings began to receive 
 the attention they deserved, although many persons, 
 while accepting the teachings, discredited the 
 teacher. 
 
 There was a difference, however, between Mes- 
 mer's and Braid's systems. Mesmer taught that 
 mesmerism is an emanation of certain particles 
 called animal magnetism, from one person which 
 affects the will and nervous system of another. 
 Braid taught that there is no emanation from the 
 operator, but either through the will of the operator, 
 or through mechanical processes, an artificial men- 
 tal condition is awakened in the subject, and that 
 during this condition the volition of the subject is 
 under the control of the operator. In other words, 
 it is the influence of one mind over another. How 
 one mind can affect another without an emanation 
 
192 The History and Power of Mind. 
 
 is beyond the comprehension of the lecturer, but 
 perhaps hypnotists can explain that condition satis- 
 factorily, at least to themselves. These are the sup- 
 posed lines of division between the two systems, 
 but Mesmer really taught two systems in one. First, 
 that there is a flow of magnetic force, which he des- 
 ignated as animal magnetism, and that this emanat- 
 ing force is curative in its nature ; second, that there 
 can be coercion of mind by mind. He practiced the 
 first and warned his students against practicing 
 the other. The world, of course, confused his teach- 
 ings, as it usually confuses anything of an Occult 
 nature, and remembered the second system without 
 his caution. 
 
 At the present time animal magnetism is known 
 as Mesmerism, and Hypnotism is known as sleep, 
 artificially produced. So we shall try to follow out 
 the modern conception of it rather than the presen- 
 tation of Mesmer, although reference may be had 
 from time to time to Mesmer's teachings. He taught 
 that Mesmerism is a Cosmic Force which is a part 
 of the law of love or the law of attraction, and that 
 it flows through man and may be directed by his 
 will, as an emanation from him to another. For 
 example, he showed that the force flowing from his 
 hands was a force that he could draw into himself 
 and then give it to another. He also showed that 
 he could get approximately the same effect by using 
 large magnets, thus proving that this is a general 
 and not a personal force which he used. 
 
 The law of gravitation is a part of this magnetic 
 
Hypnotism, and How to Guard Against It. 193 
 
 force, and so is love in all its gradations, whether 
 it be human love, animal love, or passion. The law 
 of attraction manifesting through an animal body 
 we now designate as animal magnetism. This Cos- 
 mic Force, passing through an animal, is nothing 
 more nor less than the Universal Life Principle, 
 the orange vibration, which you will be taught in 
 the next lecture how to use. Passing through man 
 as human-animal magnetism, it manifests itself as 
 that peculiar vibration or force which his devel- 
 opment permits. 
 
 There is, however, a physiological condition nec- 
 essary to a body in order to make it magnetic, just 
 as there is a physical condition necessary to make 
 any mass magnetic. For example: Glass is not 
 magnetic as compared with iron or steel. The rate 
 of vibration of glass is so different from that of 
 magnetism that it does not make a good conductor 
 for that force as it flows over it. The condition 
 necessary to make a proper basis for the animal 
 or human magnetism to manifest is the excess, 
 above the normal, of the number of red blood cor- 
 puscles in the body; and these red corpuscles must 
 vibrate at a high rate. With these two conditions 
 there is established the physiological basis which 
 enables the Cosmic Force to manifest; and having 
 the proper physiological basis, a person, either con- 
 sciously or unconsciously, draws within himself this 
 Cosmic Force through the left side of his body, and 
 passes it out through his right side. The left being 
 
194 The History and Power of Mind. 
 
 the negative, and the right the positive side of the 
 body. 
 
 Animal magnetism can be utilized by man 
 through the blending of his aura with that of an- 
 other, or through transmission by physical con- 
 tact, laying on of the hands, etc. Most persons, 
 such as faith curers, or magnetic healers, use this 
 magnetic force without an understanding of the law 
 which underlies it. If an Occultist desires to trans- 
 mit this force to another person, he places his right 
 hand on that other person ; then, after drawing into 
 himself the force, he permits it to flow through him 
 into the other. This force can be used advantage- 
 ously in all nervous troubles, because it is the nerve 
 fluid, or life force, which restores depletion; it is 
 also helpful in cases of consumption of any of the 
 physical organs of the body, and if properly di- 
 rected, will build up diseased cells and restore wast- 
 ed tissues. Many persons possess this magnetic 
 force to a great degree, but do not know how to 
 use it, while others perform cures unconscious of 
 the power they possess, and without the action of 
 their own will. 
 
 A person who makes a practice of using his ani- 
 mal magnetism or life force for the treating of dis- 
 ease must become greatly depleted at times, since 
 the natural inflow of life force is never so great as 
 the outflow. If the natural inflow of the life force 
 were as great as the outflow, our bodies would last 
 forever, because this would make an even exchange 
 of atoms, and no robbery could be perpetrated. 
 
Hypnotism, and How to Guard Against It. 195 
 
 There is an actual emanation from one person to 
 another, and this emanation causes an exchange 
 of physical atoms. Remember, please, that I am 
 not speaking of the higher Cosmic forces which can 
 be used for healing purposes without depleting the 
 healer, and which I shall teach you how to use in 
 a subsequent lecture ; but I am speaking of the natu- 
 ral life force within the physical body, that can be 
 used as a curative agency, as Mesmer used it. 
 
 It is because of the outflow exceeding the inflow 
 of magnetism that many Osteopaths suffer so much 
 from depletion after their professional manipula- 
 tions which are very good for the patients, but 
 hard for the Osteopaths. Sometimes the Osteopath 
 absorbs the old diseased atoms from his patients, 
 through manipulating with both hands at the same 
 time, thus forming a complete circuit for the mag- 
 netic force, which carries from him his best atoms 
 and returns the cast-off ones from his patients. It 
 is not conducive to the good health of the Osteo- 
 path, or magnetic healer, to use both hands while 
 treating the sick ; but in severe cases, where it seems 
 that a life should be kept from going out, it may be 
 done. But immediately afterward both hands and 
 arms should be bathed in hot water, rubbing the 
 arms and hands from the elbow downward to the 
 tips of the fingers. In this way it is possible to re- 
 move, by aid of the hot water, many of the low 
 vibrating atoms which have been taken into the 
 system. 
 
 When a Mental Healer begins to lose his force, 
 
196 The History and Power of Mind. 
 
 or power to heal, as many do, the world says : "If 
 Mind is infinite, why has this healer failed?" The 
 reason is this: First, his brain has become tired 
 by continuous concentration, and its material at- 
 oms have taken a slower rate of vibration because 
 the outflow of magnetic force has been much greater 
 than the inflow. Through his intense interest in 
 his cases perhaps his sympathies have gone out 
 to his patients with his treatments, and here was 
 an expenditure of emotional force. Without un- 
 derstanding the reason for his waning power, he 
 tries to go on with the work of healing when he 
 should rest and sleep, and in this manner draw back 
 to himself the life force he has given away. After 
 a time he finds himself depleted and is compelled 
 to retire from service humiliated and chagrined, 
 perhaps, because of the unkind criticisms he has 
 leceived from those to whom he has given his life 
 force. 
 
 There is a better and a higher way to treat the 
 sick than by the magnetic force which made Mes- 
 mer famous, and that is to remain in a positive 
 condition of mind, control your sympathies, and 
 thus hold your own magnetic force as a basis over 
 which you may draw the higher Cosmic forces, and 
 pass them on to your patients without depleting 
 yourself. If you can control your sympathies, and 
 remain positive, you can treat without depletion as 
 many patients as you can entertain during office 
 hours. But, you may say, this is not the aspect 
 that modern science is investigating. It is true that 
 
Hypnotism, and How to Guard Against It. 197 
 
 it is not practiced along the lines Mesmer laid down, 
 except by the physicians who are beginning to use 
 electricity in their practice, and who attempt to do 
 with their batteries precisely what Mesmer attempt- 
 ed to do with his magnets ; and I am not sure that 
 they are any more successful, because Mesmer also 
 used the greater force of mind to assist these cur- 
 rents. 
 
 And now we come to that particular aspect of 
 the subject which modern science is beginning to 
 investigate, which is known as hypnotism. Hyp- 
 notism is artificial sleep, which may be produced 
 upon one's self or upon another ; and it may be pro- 
 duced by the power of will, by mechanical processes, 
 or by the will supplemented by mechanical proc- 
 esses. The mechanisms that are used to produce 
 hypnosis are revolving mirrors, bright lights, or 
 anything which will serve to excite the optic nerves 
 and raise them to a rate of vibration which will 
 enable the subject to pass into hypnosis, or sleep. 
 Unnatural stimulation of the nerves of the eyes, 
 or of the nerves at the base of the brain, or by 
 focusing the sight at an angle of forty-five degrees, 
 and then gradually raising it until the pupils are 
 turned upward above the upper lids, will produce 
 an abnormal nervous excitation ; and while the sub- 
 ject is in this condition he readily accepts the men- 
 tal suggestion of sleep, and passes into hypnosis. 
 In this manner he is forced out of his physical body ; 
 is under the control of the operator's mind, and is 
 also exposed to any or all influences upon the sub- 
 
198 The History and Power of Mind. 
 
 jective plane which he has abnormally invaded. 
 If the hypnosis is complete, then both minds of 
 the subject are absolutely under the control of the 
 operator; but if the hypnosis be only partial, then 
 nothing but the objective, or lower mind, of the 
 subject is controlled. But while in this condition, 
 and passive to the will of another, the subject must 
 accept as true everything suggested to him by that 
 controlling mind; and whatever command is given 
 to him in sleep he will obey when he wakes, and 
 without knowing why. From the first moment the 
 subject yields his will to another he becomes that 
 others slave, if that one desires to make him so. 
 So long as the operator lives in this world, so long 
 will he be able to control that subject. 
 
 It is contended by the modern hypnotist in France 
 and in America that the mind of the subject is not 
 dominated to the extent of coercion, or beyond the 
 power of the subject to act independently. In other 
 words, that he cannot be compelled to do a wrong 
 against his will. Cases are cited where subjects re- 
 fused to stab a man when the operators gave them 
 real daggers and commanded them to do so. 
 Other cases are cited where the same subjects were 
 given paper daggers and were told to strike desig- 
 nated persons. This command they obeyed with 
 alacrity; and because they obeyed in the last in- 
 stances and refused in the first, it was supposed 
 that they could not be coerced to commit a crime 
 against their wills. The Occultists say these cases 
 do not prove the theory advanced, but only show 
 
Hypnotism, and How to Guard Against It. 199 
 
 that both minds of the subjects were not under the 
 control of the operator; and that if they were, the 
 subjects would have obeyed in the first instances as 
 quickly as in the last. In the East, where men 
 have made a study of the power of mind for hun- 
 dreds of years, it is taught that nothing will pre- 
 vent a hypnotized subject from obeying the com- 
 mands of the operator, or controlling mind, when 
 once the subject is fully under his influence. 
 
 Some of you may have seen the account in one 
 of our local papers where a man was hypnotized 
 and compelled to deed everything he had in the 
 world to another man. After the victim became 
 conscious of what he had done, he appealed to his 
 attorney who took the matter into court, but when 
 the victim appeared to testify, the hypnotist would 
 not permit him to speak and the man's throat was 
 paralyzed in the presence of the room full of peo- 
 ple. The hypnotist was incarcerated in jail until 
 the paralysis passed away from the throat of his 
 victim and when his influence was removed and 
 the true testimony was given, the court decided that 
 the property should be restored to the original own- 
 er. And only a few months ago here in New York 
 City, you remember how Patrick was tried and 
 convicted of the murder of the millionaire Rice. It 
 was proved that it was the old man's valet who 
 had killed him while under the hypnotic influence 
 of Patrick ; and these are only two cases that have 
 come to the public's notice. It is gradually being 
 
2OO The History and Power of Mind. 
 
 understood, however, that morality does not enter 
 at all into the question of control, but that it de- 
 pends wholly upon whether or not both minds of 
 the subject are controlled. Occultists believe that 
 there is no disease, no trouble, or anything in the 
 world that can justify a person in attempting to 
 hypnotize another. If a person consents to be hyp- 
 notized, then it is because he does not know the 
 dangers he incurs by consenting, and his ignorance 
 should not be taken advantage of by one who knows 
 better. 
 
 There is another phase of this mind controlling 
 mind which is more subtle and dangerous than that 
 of mechanical hypnotism, because it can be used 
 without the knowledge of the subject, and without 
 the immediate presence of the operator. This branch 
 is called by the Occultists Mental Dominion, and 
 is just beginning to be understood in the West. Hyp- 
 notism by mental dominion is produced by mental 
 suggestion alone, without physical contact or me- 
 chanical aids. It makes no difference whether the 
 subject be present, in the next room, or in the same 
 State with the operator, he can be reached equally 
 as well at any time or place. The method formerly 
 adopted was to suggest sleep to the subject, or vic- 
 tim, and when he had received and obeyed the sug- 
 gestion, then the operator impressed whatever he 
 desired upon the mind of his subject, who had to 
 obey his will upon waking. But after a time the 
 American Hypnotists discovered that putting the 
 subject to sleep was not essential, and that just as 
 
Hypnotism, and How to Guard Against It. 201 
 
 effective work could be done by repeated sugges- 
 tion until the subject should accept and act upon 
 it, believing it to be his own thought. This process 
 of mental control can only be called hypnotism by 
 courtesy, since hypnosis is now omitted as a neces- 
 sary condition in its accomplishment; however, it 
 will continue to be called by that name until a more 
 suitable one shall be adopted. 
 
 Unless you have made a study of this practice 
 of mental dominion, you have no idea of the extent 
 to which this subtle power is being used in the 
 United States. It is flagrantly and openly taught 
 by "colleges," chartered by various States ; all news- 
 papers, and many magazines, contain their alluring 
 advertisements offering to teach "Personal Magnet- 
 ism," "Hypnotism," "The Secret of Power," etc., 
 etc. Under various names each of these teachers, 
 colleges, professors, and doctors offers for a mone- 
 tary consideration to teach you how to dominate 
 your fellow men, how to enslave another Son of God, 
 and how to "positively enable any intelligent person 
 to exercise a marvelous influence over anyone whom 
 he may wish to control" I quote from one of the 
 largest and most persistent advertisers of this 
 branch of education. Traveling salesmen, doctors, 
 lawyers, brokers, real estate men, and, in fact, per- 
 sons in every branch of business are studying and 
 using mental coercion. 
 
 In my own personal experience, in the practice 
 of law, I have had a dozen or more cases in which 
 the malign influence of persons had been used to get 
 
202 The History and Power of Mind. 
 
 money and property away from others. In three 
 of these cases stock brokers had used mental coer- 
 cion compelling my clients to entrust money to 
 their keeping with the permission to use it as the 
 broker saw fit. The money had been appropriated 
 by the hypnotist stock broker for his own purposes, 
 and my demand for restitution was met with the 
 assertion that it had been lost in speculation by 
 my client. In two of these cases, after the arrest 
 of the respective brokers, the proceedings had to 
 be stopped, because my clients had again yielded 
 to the influence of the men who had coerced them 
 and refused to prosecute them further. 
 
 There is a member of this class who heard these 
 lectures last year and said that such an influence 
 could never come into her life; yet within a few 
 months afterward, while her husband was away 
 and she was 'alone, a stock broker called, and asked 
 her to place in his hands a large block of valuable 
 stock with full permission to dispose of it as he 
 thought best. After urging the matter for an un- 
 reasonable length of time, he finally left her, after 
 gaining her promise to let him call the next day 
 for the stock. After he had gone the woman began 
 to realize that the man had influenced her against 
 her will and judgment and she wrote to him refus- 
 ing to see him or to let him have the stock. Then 
 for three days she had to fight his mental sugges- 
 tions to change her mind and accept his offer, but 
 finally succeeded in saving her property. 
 
 Another member of my class, who heard this lee- 
 
Hypnotism, and How to Guard Against It. 203 
 
 ture last year, thought she was exempt from such 
 influences because of the quiet, retired life she was 
 living. She discovered her mistake when a stranger 
 called one day and persuaded her to give him a large 
 contract for advertising a book she had written. 
 After securing this he called again in a few days, 
 and tried to coerce her into giving to him her rights 
 and copyright to the book ; and had it not been for 
 the sudden recollection of what she had heard about 
 hypnotism and also for the aid of another member 
 of her family, who was a student along this line, the 
 hypnotist would have succeeded in getting what he 
 wanted. As it was he very nearly put her to sleep 
 and she had a hard battle to resist complete hyp- 
 nosis. 
 
 When the Countess Wachmeister was in this 
 country, several years ago, she told of the following 
 case: There were three men in this city who had 
 studied hypnotism and decided to combine their 
 efforts and victimize a wealthy man. They each 
 took a turn in working upon him mentally during 
 each day, sending suggestion after suggestion to 
 him, until he became absolutely under the influence 
 of the trio. After a time he became so sensitive that 
 the picture of the face of each of his tormentors 
 would rise before his mental vision while he was 
 being worked upon. Then he could hear them 
 speak to each other, but continued to resist them 
 until he went to sleep from weariness. But when 
 he awoke he was impelled to write a check and send 
 it to the address that had been impressed upon his 
 
204 The History and Power of Mind. 
 
 mind. This kind of robbery continued for some 
 time and finally the victim went to the Countess, 
 and asked her to deliver him from the power of 
 his tormentors. 
 
 There is no limit to the power of mind, nor to 
 its field of operation through suggestion. In the 
 beginning of the use of Occult forces, suggestion is 
 one of the most powerful of the mind's instruments 
 which the student learns to use. It should not be 
 identified with hypnotism although it can be used 
 to produce hypnosis. Like any other force, it can 
 be used for good or for evil, and the line that lies 
 between the right and wrong use of it is as narrow 
 as the edge of a knife, and is just as sharp. In the 
 practice of magic these two ways diverge, and we 
 find what is called White and Black Magic. The 
 first is a straight and narrow path which leads to 
 the mountain top of power and wisdom, and to reach 
 it is salvation. The other is the broad road which 
 leads to pitfalls and destruction; and I regret to 
 say that many souls are enticed to travel therein. 
 It was the wrong use of this power of suggestion 
 which destroyed us as Atlanteans, and from the 
 present indications it would seem that we did not 
 learn, through that sad experience, that we have 
 no right to enslave the minds of others. 
 
 Mind must be reached by thought, if the thought 
 be constantly repeated, and nothing can prevent a 
 suggestion from reaching its destination, because 
 telepathy is based upon law. But whether the sug- 
 gestion shall be accepted and acted upon depends 
 
Hypnotism, and How to Guard Against It. 205 
 
 upon the recipient to decide; and it is upon the ac- 
 ceptance or rejection of suggestion that the free- 
 dom or enslavement of a mind is determined. There 
 are different kinds of suggestion, two of which are 
 known as audible and silent. Audible suggestion 
 we are constantly indulging in, and is something 
 we should learn to control, because it may be either 
 constructive or destructive, and if the latter, we 
 may do much harm to others. For example: We 
 meet a friend who looks tired, and we say: "How 
 bad you look; are you ill?" This is a destructive 
 suggestion, and may have the effect of really mak- 
 ing our friend ill if he accepts it as a truth. Parents 
 and teachers are constantly making audible sugges- 
 tions to children which have a great effect upon 
 them. If a teacher calls his pupils dunces and dolts, 
 and tells them how stupid they are, he is pretty sure 
 to find in them just what he suggests. If a parent 
 tells his child that if he misses his lesson he will 
 be punished, that child will remember the suggestion 
 of punishment and probably miss his lesson, be- 
 cause the suggestion of punishment brings an ele- 
 ment of fear with it which makes an indelible im- 
 pression upon the child's mind. It is a destructive 
 suggestion, because it destroys the child's ability 
 to learn his lesson. But if the parent were to say 
 "You can learn your lessons, because you are a 
 bright, intelligent child," the suggestion would be 
 constructive, and the child would respond to it by 
 having a desire awakened in him to learn, since the 
 
2o6 The History and Power of Mind. 
 
 mind of a child is plastic, and is easily impressed by 
 audible suggestion. 
 
 The objective mind is always ready to see the 
 dark side of life, and will readily accept any audible 
 suggestion of a destructive nature; and since there 
 are constructive suggestions which can be made to 
 help others, why should we be continually hinder- 
 ing instead of helping our friends? Why is it not 
 better to bring sunshine rather than shadows into 
 their lives? Suppose a friend of yours is about to 
 make a business connection with a Mr. Jones, whom 
 you slightly know, and you say, for the sake of 
 gossip, "Mr. Jones is a dishonest man." This sug- 
 gestion, whether true or untrue, will have a ten- 
 dency to make Mr. Jones dishonest if he hears of 
 what you have said, because the thought dis- 
 honesty has been impressed upon his mind, and he 
 will think he may as well be what people think he 
 is. Then your friend to whom you made the sug- 
 gestion will think of it when he sees Mr. Jones, 
 and the unfortunate man will get both silent and 
 audible suggestions. 
 
 Silent suggestion is of two kinds, Hetro and Auto. 
 The former meaning suggestion to another, and the 
 latter meaning suggestion to one's self. There is 
 greater power in silent suggestion, whether it be 
 used for right or wrong, than there is in audible 
 suggestion, because the silent thought sent to an- 
 other is subtle, and the recipient knows nothing of 
 its source, and is often unable to combat it, think- 
 ing it originated in his own mind. Silent sugges- 
 
Hypnotism, and How to Guard Against It. 207 
 
 tion can be used for the benefit of another so long 
 as it be suggestion, and is not carried to the extent 
 of coercion. For example : You may have a friend 
 who is likely to give way to temptation to do wrong. 
 You would have a right to say to him : "You are 
 good and true; you can resist that temptation be- 
 cause your own divine nature has asserted itself." 
 And your friend will come through his struggle 
 victorious. 
 
 You may always suggest mentally to a person 
 what you have a right to say to him audibly and 
 it is often inexpedient for you to say audibly what 
 you have a moral right to say. For example : If a 
 person calls and is taking up more of your time 
 than you can spare, it is morally right for you to 
 say mentally, "Why don't you go?" You have a 
 right to protect yourself from intrusion upon your 
 work. Or perhaps someone has borrowed money 
 from you, and you do not like to ask him to return 
 it though you really need the money. It would 
 be perfectly legitimate for you to say mentally: 
 "Return the money you borrowed." Again, you 
 may be seeking a position and perhaps several other 
 persons are trying to secure the same position. 
 When you are called into the office to state your 
 qualifications, say mentally to the person who is ex- 
 amining you, "You had better give me a chance." 
 
 You have a right to help yourself through life by 
 the aid of suggestion, when it is not at the expense 
 of another person; and you have no conception of 
 the number of obstructions this silent power will 
 
208 The History and Power of Mind. 
 
 remove from your path, or how much good you 
 can accomplish with it. Like all other forces, this 
 power grows with use, and you can use silent sug- 
 gestion legitimately as a moral stimulus. Suppose 
 a person makes a contract with you agreeing to 
 give you certain things in consideration of certain 
 money. After a time you perceive that the contract 
 is not going to be kept by him. You have a right 
 to say mentally to that man, "You are an honorable 
 man and you want to keep that contract," and in 
 this manner you will create within him a desire to 
 keep it. 
 
 Silent suggestion can be used as a defence. For 
 example: When you are conscious that a person is 
 trying to influence you, refuse to accept his sugges- 
 tions and declare that he cannot accomplish his pur- 
 pose. This will turn his force back upon himself, 
 and render him impotent to affect you. If you know 
 a person in fiduciary matters is trying to take an 
 advantage of you, commence to work upon his moral 
 nature until you quicken into activity all the latent 
 good there is in him. In this manner you are do- 
 ing a double good; you are working for yourself 
 and are also bringing out the best in another. But 
 you have no right to coerce another person under 
 any circumstances. You may suggest strongly, 
 forcefully, but not to the extent of coercion, not 
 even to develop the moral nature of another. You 
 may suggest to a friend, "You do not want to drink 
 liquor ; you never will get any pleasure from drink- 
 
Hypnotism, and How to Guard Against It. 209 
 
 ing. You do not like the taste of it." And in this 
 manner you may help to destroy his desire and 
 taste for drink; but you have no right to say, 
 "You shall not drink liquor ; your hand will be para- 
 lyzed when you try to raise a glass of it to your 
 lips; your throat shall close when you try to swal- 
 low any intoxicating drink," because such declara- 
 tions are coercive. Should you succeed in coercing 
 him to stop drinking, you would but hypnotize him, 
 and it would be your will, not his, which would 
 control his appetite and his body; and as soon as 
 your will is removed his taste will reassert itself, 
 and will remain with him till he overcomes it him- 
 self. You may help him to overcome his desires, 
 if he wants you to, but you have no right to dom- 
 inate his will. 
 
 You may suggest to a person who owes you, 
 "Give me that money you owe me," but you have 
 no right to say, "You shall return to me that money ; 
 you shall never sleep again till you have paid me." 
 You have no right to coerce another, either men- 
 tally or physically; and though the line of de- 
 markation is very fine, yet it is clear. 
 
 It will be well to remember these two rules which 
 may help you in using suggestion. First, when you 
 are suggesting to another to do something for you, 
 speak of yourself as a third person. For example: 
 Suppose Mr. Jones had given you his note, and you 
 wanted him to pay it. He may have given his note 
 to a dozen other persons, and if you were to say 
 mentally to him, "You want to pay that note," he 
 
2io The History and Power of Mind. 
 
 would not know which note was referred to. But 
 if you were to say, "Pay Mr. Blank the note due 
 at such a time," your suggestion would be under- 
 stood, and very likely be acted upon. 
 
 In olden times it was often the custom of physi- 
 cians to meet their patients with a frown and a dis- 
 couraging remark ; but the modern physician is be- 
 ginning to understand the value of suggestion, and 
 meets his patient with a smile, and the optimistic 
 remark, "You are looking better to-day, and are 
 feeling better/' This is an audible suggestion. 
 Suppose a friend says to you, "I am feeling miser- 
 ably," you should reply mentally to him, "There 
 is no reason why you should not feel well." If you 
 were to make this statement audibly, after he had 
 declared to the contrary, he might be offended, be- 
 cause some persons cherish their ills, and resent 
 a refusal of anyone to recognize them. But the 
 silent, optimistic remark helps to make positive 
 those who have favorite ills, and they become hope- 
 ful and healthy. 
 
 Second, whenever you make a mental sugges- 
 tion, suggest doubly. Make one suggestion for the 
 subjective mind and one suggestion for the object- 
 ive mind, and by doing this your object may be ac- 
 complished in a much shorter time. In suggesting 
 to the subjective mind, tell it the truth; when you 
 suggest to the objective mind, advise it along the 
 lines of personal interest. For example: A man 
 has leased an apartment, but finds the owner does 
 not intend to keep his agreement to renovate that 
 
Hypnotism, and How to Guard Against It. 211 
 
 apartment. Having a contract, he has a moral 
 right to insist upon the terms being fulfilled, and 
 he says mentally to the subjective mind of the own- 
 er of the apartment, "You are an honest man and 
 you will be glad to keep your promise to Mr. Blank." 
 Then say to his objective mind, "It is to your inter- 
 est to keep your promise with Mr. Blank; he will 
 be a good tenant and it will be a great loss to you to 
 lose him." The man has been told two aspects of the 
 truth, and each aspect appealed to the mind which 
 was able to appreciate and understand it best. 
 
 Auto-suggestion is suggesting to yourself, and 
 you should always let the auto-suggestion be made 
 by your higher mind to your lower self. Let the 
 subjective mind give, and the objective receive the 
 suggestion. The greatest objection an Occultist has 
 to hypnotism is that it emphasizes the objective 
 mind, and teaches it to make its dominion stronger 
 over its subjective mind. Suppose you wished to 
 break a habit; you should say to your objective 
 mind, "Now you cannot do that thing again." Some- 
 times the objective mind will answer, "Why can't 
 I do that?" You should reply, "Because it is not 
 to your interest to do it, and you do not want to; 
 you have no desire to; all your desire is gone for- 
 ever." And the objective mind will begin wondering 
 where the desire has gone, and at that moment ac- 
 cepts the suggestion made ; and in this manner you 
 can break any habit if you will but persist in mak- 
 ing suggestions. 
 
 Deity does not coerce Its children and no child 
 
212 The History and Power of Mind. 
 
 of God has a right to coerce another, because it is 
 morally wrong to do it. Whatever exists on the 
 mental plane must become embodied upon the ma- 
 terial plane sooner or later, and a man's body is a 
 limited expression of his mental traits, as are also 
 the tendencies and habits of his body. 
 
 Suppose a mother comes to you, crying, "Save 
 my boy from becoming a gambler 1" and you under- 
 take the task of stopping the boy from gaming. You 
 may make your passes, and your mental sugges- 
 tions, and say: "You shall not gamble any more; 
 you shall suffer an agony of fear every time you at- 
 tempt to make a wager or touch a card." You may 
 prevent the boy from gambling, but you have not 
 destroyed his love for it, and you have really only 
 delayed his evolution, since he will have to come 
 back to face the same conditions at another time; 
 if not in the same body, then in another one, in a 
 future life, or whenever your will has ceased to con- 
 trol him. 
 
 Hypnotism or mental dominion never cures dis- 
 ease; it merely prevents the temporary manifesta- 
 tion of effects. The limitation of its so-called cura- 
 tive power depends upon the will of the hypnotist, 
 and the extent of the hypnosis produced. Henry 
 Wood, in "Practical Ideas." for December, 1900, 
 points out the fact that a percentage of the Chris- 
 tian and Mental Science patients have a recurrence 
 of their diseases within a well-defined period after 
 they are cured. This is because either conscious or 
 unconscious mental dominion was employed by the 
 
Hypnotism, and How to Guard Against It. 213 
 
 mind of the practitioner in holding back the mani- 
 festation of the trouble; and these returns occur in 
 periods or half periods of seven-year cycles, accord- 
 ing to the power of the practitioner. Even though 
 a patient be actually cured, not by mental dominion, 
 but by bringing new elements into his body, unless 
 he puts himself into a new condition of mind and 
 bodily habits, the old disease in course of time is 
 likely to return. On the death of a hypnotist the 
 disease he has held in abeyance usually returns, be- 
 cause the magnetic cord which connects him with 
 his subject is then broken, and the stronger influ- 
 ence being removed, the weaker mind, with its old 
 line of thinking, reasserts itself. 
 
 There is a great limitation in the therapeutical 
 use of hypnotism since its best effects are upon ner- 
 vous and kindred diseases. In chronic cases, blood 
 diseases, or independent growths within an organ- 
 ism, such as cancers and tumors, it is not successful. 
 In cases of insanity it is more successful, but even 
 there it is subject to limitation. Continuous hyp- 
 notic influence upon a patient not only destroys his 
 mental poise and makes him a negative, vacillating 
 creature of impulse, but it also depletes his nerve 
 fluid, and while the operator may seem to tempo- 
 rarily neutralize this weakness, there comes great 
 reactions in course of time and the nerves control- 
 ling the circulation of the capillary blood vessels 
 become weakened, and the entire circulation be- 
 comes irregular and imperfect. Cold hands and 
 feet, with sometimes an intense rush of blood to 
 
214 The History and Power of Mind. 
 
 the head, are the physiological evidences of this con- 
 dition. 
 
 It should not be forgotten that hypnotic influence 
 has a reactionary effect upon the operator. For ex- 
 ample, suppose a person attempts to throw his hyp- 
 notic influence upon you and you are so positive or 
 your vibrations are so high that his influence fails 
 to affect you, then as a natural operation of law that 
 force which he sent out, not reaching its intended 
 destination, returns to the sender. If it be a malig- 
 nant force it will do for the sender what it was in- 
 tended to do for his victim. The greatest crime 
 known to the Great Law is the coercion of an in- 
 dividual center or mind to do evil. No one ever 
 coerced another or used suggestion to the detri- 
 ment of another; no one ever brought disease or 
 misfortune upon another, that he did not have to 
 drink to the dregs the cup he held to that other's 
 lips. He may escape punishment from the human 
 law, but it will be impossible for him to escape from 
 the Divine Law. In order to send malignant influ- 
 ences to another the sender must hold in his mind 
 the picture of the disaster he wishes to create for 
 that other. It is impossible to do this without creat- 
 ing a matrix in his own aura and this matrix will 
 draw back to the sender just what he has created, 
 for the Great Law works automatically and impar- 
 tially and irrespective of the fact whether he has 
 succeeded in bringing down disaster upon his vic- 
 tim or not. Did you ever see a person supposed to 
 
Hypnotism, and Hoiv to Guard Against It. 215 
 
 be a witch or a black magician who was handsome, 
 graceful, happy or wealthy? 
 
 Hypnotic influence may last till the operator de- 
 sires it to be broken or till a stronger will than his, 
 at the request of the subject, shall break it. If a 
 person submits to complete hypnosis but once, in 
 the course of time the influence will become dissi- 
 pated; but an intense hatred for the operator will 
 become engendered in the heart of the subject when 
 that influence is destroyed, and it will never be 
 eradicated during the lifetime of either. The law 
 works in the same manner in cases of coerced love. 
 If a person succeeds in compelling the love of an- 
 other through hypnotic influence, that love will turn 
 to the bitterest hatred and then there is nothing that 
 the victim will leave undone to avenge what he be- 
 lieves to be his wrongs. It is right to ask for honest 
 love or to suggest that another person should give 
 you his love; you have a right to picture another's 
 love flowing from him to you, but you have no 
 right to coerce another into loving you. Hypnotic 
 influence can be broken by a person who is stronger 
 than the hypnotist. For example: A may coerce 
 B, but C can break A's influence at B's request even 
 though he is no stronger than A, because C is work- 
 ing for the right and has the Universal Conscious- 
 ness to aid him. 
 
 There are certain conditions of mind which if you 
 will make use of them will make you immune from 
 this malignant force : First. Be mentally positive ; 
 then you are not what the hypnotist calls "suggest- 
 
216 The History and Power of Mind. 
 
 able." A person who is suggestable is in a passive 
 condition of mind and receives suggestion easily. If 
 you make a practice of concentrating your thoughts 
 upon whatever you are doing, your mind is active 
 and positive and thoughts foreign to you cannot 
 find lodgment with you. Few operators are per- 
 sistent enough to continue with their suggestions 
 when they fail in reaching the subject after a con- 
 siderable length of time. 
 
 Second. It is accepting the suggestion which 
 enslaves. You cannot prevent the suggestion from 
 coming to you if the operator is persistent, but you 
 need not accept it. 
 
 Third. Be on your guard against all suggestions. 
 Examine critically all thoughts that come to you, 
 and test each with this question : "Is it true ?" There 
 will be no one who will come in contact with you for 
 many years who will be strong enough to make a 
 suggestion to you and accomplish his purpose im- 
 mediately. The effort must be repeatedly made 
 before he can succeed. If you examine the thoughts 
 which come to you and find them undesirable, repu- 
 diate them and declare you cannot be influenced by 
 them. For example: Suppose you were to sud- 
 denly become dissatisfied with your present home. 
 You have always been pleased with it, but suddenly 
 you are seized with a desire to move from that 
 neighborhood and buy somewhere else. Examine 
 those thoughts and ask yourself why you should 
 change your mind without any apparent cause. And 
 if in a few days or weeks a real estate broker meets 
 
Hypnotism, and How to Guard Against It. 217 
 
 you and offers a piece of property in the neighbor- 
 hood you have been thinking of moving into, it may 
 be well for 3 r ou to consider whether it was his 
 thoughts that have caused your change of mind or 
 whether they were your own. 
 
 Fourth. Do not entertain visiting thoughts until 
 you know their character any sooner than you 
 would entertain persons whose character you know 
 nothing about. 
 
 Fifth. Select only such thoughts as you want, 
 and reject such suggestions as you do not desire. 
 So few people are able to do this, but are constantly 
 being swayed by the influence of those with whom 
 they associate. Other people's manners, words and 
 thoughts mold our lives to a much greater extent 
 than we imagine, and this is because we do not 
 think for ourselves; we do not generate our own 
 thoughts, but accept whatever comes floating along 
 to us. A woman goes shopping. She knows in a 
 general way what she wants, but with her mind 
 full of indefinite thoughts she comes to a positive 
 saleswoman who wants to sell all the goods on her 
 counter. In a vague way the shopper tells the 
 woman she is going to buy a dress and the sales- 
 woman sees an opportunity to dispose of something 
 she is anxious to get rid of. She immediately makes 
 a selection for her customer and impresses her mind 
 with the thought that this is just what she wants. 
 The shopper does not know what she wants, and 
 although this does not seem to be quite the shade 
 or kind of goods she had thought about getting, still 
 
2i8 The History and Power of Mind. 
 
 she is not sure it would not do. She wavers and 
 the saleswoman sells her the dress, and when it 
 comes home and the positive-minded saleswoman 
 is not present, the woman is disappointed and dis- 
 satisfied with her purchase. 
 
 A man goes into a restaurant and an obsequious 
 waiter suggests by his manner that a liberal tip is 
 expected. He gives the man no more attention than 
 the proprietor pays him for giving to any other 
 customer, but he wants a tip and he thinks, looks 
 and acts tip till the man cannot, dare not refuse to 
 give it. He is for the moment under the mental 
 dominion of that waiter and even though he be a 
 Judge of the Supreme Court he must yield to the 
 will of a man who perhaps can scarcely write his 
 own name. 
 
 That no hypnotist can succeed permanently in 
 life is true. No person can retain possession of a 
 thing gained through black art or by dishonest 
 methods. A thief may seem to prosper for a sea- 
 son, but eventually the Great Law will make the 
 proper adjustment and his illgotten gains will be 
 swept from him, because Divine Justice does rule 
 the Universe. 
 
LECTURE TEN. 
 
 HIGHER OCCULT OR SPIRITUAL FORCES 
 AND THEIR USES. 
 
 There is an old saying that "Birds of a feather 
 flock together," which is another way of saying: 
 "Tell me who a man's friends are and I will tell 
 you what manner of man he is." Through both 
 these maxims the same thought runs that like 
 mentalities are found in groups. There are certain 
 groupings of forces and of truths ; there are also a 
 grouping of minds. Literary people are likely to 
 be drawn together; musicians naturally seek musi- 
 cians for their friends, and this is due to the fact 
 that the individuals who compose these groups vi- 
 brate in the same common key. They think along 
 the same general lines; they have what is some- 
 times called sympathetic vibration, that is, they 
 vibrate at the same general rate. 
 
 In physics we see evidences of sympathetic vibra- 
 tions. If you strike a note on the piano you will 
 frequently hear a part of a chandelier, or a wine 
 glass on the sideboard vibrate in sympathy with 
 that particular note. This shows that the mass 
 tone of the glass is identical with that of the note 
 upon the piano. In thought there is sympathetic 
 vibration also, and for this reason it is sometimes 
 difficult to determine who is the real inventor of a 
 
 219 
 
22O The History and Power of Mind. 
 
 thing. For example : Who was the inventor of the 
 telephone? If Bell, then why was it necessary 
 to have all the controversy that occurred between 
 him and those claiming it under Gray? Why was 
 it necessary to have a lawsuit and then to compro- 
 mise their claims? Bell, Gray and Edison were 
 thinking along the same line, had become attached 
 to a certain thought current and developed the same 
 ideas simultaneously. 
 
 We often hear the expression : "I got into a cer- 
 tain current of thought." To the careless thinker 
 this expression means nothing in particular, but to 
 the student of Occultism it means a great deal more 
 than a mere form of expression; for there are cur- 
 rents of thought in the great magnetic sea of con- 
 sciousness in which we live, and we can and do at- 
 tach ourselves either consciously or unconsciously 
 to different currents with definite results. 
 
 Picture to yourself for a moment this magnetic 
 consciousness of which we are a part. It is pulsat- 
 ing with life and is capable of receiving and trans- 
 mitting thought. In this great magnetic sea there 
 are thought currents as clearly defined as there are 
 currents in the air or in the ocean. You know 
 there is a current in the ocean which is called the 
 Antarctic Drift and another called the Gulf Stream, 
 etc. In Universal Mind there are currents of 
 thought which are as distinctly separate as are these 
 two currents in the ocean; and it is as necessary 
 that we should know about the one as that we 
 should know about the other, because a man draws 
 
Higher Occult or Spiritual Forces and their Uses. 221 
 
 from the currents in Universal Mind such thoughts 
 or ideas as he is sympathetically vibrating with. 
 When you and I are thinking along the same gen- 
 eral line we are in a current of thought, which is 
 one of those in the Universal Consciousness; and 
 because your mind and mine are attached to this 
 current, we are for the time being receiving in 
 unison the same general ideas. Plagiarism may be 
 often explained in this manner. Oliver Wendell 
 Holmes wrote the poem, "Man Wants but Little 
 Here Below," and after it was published a friend 
 called his attention to the fact that Adams had 
 written not only on the same theme, but had used 
 the same similies and many of the same expres- 
 sions, many years before; yet no one would think 
 of calling Doctor Holmes a plagiarist. By thinking 
 along that line his mind had become attached to 
 the same current of thought that Adams had been 
 in when he expressed himself in a similar manner. 
 
 Inventors often get into the same current of 
 thought, and work along similar lines, and then 
 suddenly startle the public with inventions of a like 
 nature, each inventor declares himself the sole dis- 
 coverer of the thing invented. During the last two 
 decades or more there has been no great discovery 
 made in physics that can be attributed to the mind 
 of any one man, since several minds have con- 
 tributed towards each and all the discoveries that 
 have been made. Man draws from the Universal ac- 
 cording to his mentality, and groups of men may 
 
222 The History and Power of Mind. 
 
 draw simultaneously the same ideas from the same 
 currents of thought. 
 
 These currents of thought are used by men un- 
 consciously, semi-consciously and consciously. For 
 example, a man desires to possess great wealth, and 
 decides he will have it. He knows nothing about 
 the scientific use of mind, but puts certain natural 
 laws into operation through his desire and decision 
 to gain wealth. If he persists, wealth must come to 
 him because he has set the law into operation which 
 will bring it, but it may be a long time coming, be- 
 cause he does not understand how to use his mind 
 scientifically to hasten it. Another man who has 
 studied along the line of Mental Science and who 
 knows there is power in the individual mind to de- 
 mand from the Universal Mind, says, "Give me 
 wealth." He persists in making his demands fre- 
 quently and earnestly and in time the wealth will 
 come to him. He has used the law semi-consciously 
 and will obtain what he demands more quickly 
 than the first man. The Occultist knows that by 
 making a mental image of wealth and by concen- 
 trating his thoughts upon it he has put into opera- 
 tion a law, and that through the magnetic cord 
 which connects him with his creation he will draw to 
 himself the wealth he has created. He uses the law 
 consciously and therefore realizes his desires much 
 sooner than the other two. To live is to use these 
 currents of force either consciously or uncon- 
 sciously, but men always attribute their successes 
 to external causes until they learn something about 
 

 Higher Occult or Spiritual Forces and their Uses. 223 
 
 the laws which governs success. At this time many 
 persons are using these Cosmic currents of force 
 for therapeutical purposes and are performing cures 
 of bodily ills through mental processes. Each 
 claims to cure through a system of healing different 
 from the others; as witness Christian Scientist, 
 Mental Scientist, New Thought Scientist, Faith 
 Curer, Divine Healer, the priests of the Water of 
 the Spring of Lourdes, Magnetic Healer, Hyp- 
 notists, etc. It makes no difference what the claims 
 of these respective schools may be, the phenomena 
 of healing must be based on the same law. Jesus 
 knew the nature and use of these Cosmic forces, and 
 taught them to his disciples, who produced the 
 phenomena called miracles through the use of them. 
 Apollonius of Tyana and his disciples performed 
 miracles and cures in the same manner; and before 
 these the Essenes, Pythagoreans, Buddhists and 
 Brahmins used these currents of force for the same 
 purposes; and during the early Christian centuries 
 and Middle Ages the Neo-Platonists, Mystics and 
 Rosicrutians used them in their work with mankind. 
 These currents are Spiritual Forces and are a 
 part of the Universal Spirit or Mind. Spiritual 
 force may be defined as motion generated by Divine 
 Mind in contradistinction to motion generated by 
 individual mind or by mechanical processes. You 
 remember the all important fact so often reiterated 
 in this course of lectures that the sensitive etheric 
 mind of the Universe is all around us, as air sur- 
 rounds man or as the ocean surrounds and sustains 
 
224 The History and Power of Mind. 
 
 the fish which live in it. Like the ocean, Divine 
 Mind is always in motion. The ocean has its in- 
 herent motion due to the tides, and also its super- 
 ficial or wave motion due to external causes such 
 as wind, etc. Divine Mind has Its motion, per se, 
 which are the currents within it, and these currents 
 are superficially modified by the thoughts of men. 
 An individual mind cannot permanently work 
 against a Universal current nor misuse it any more 
 than it can keep the tide in the Bay of Fundy from 
 rising; but it can work along the right lines and 
 make use of these great currents to its own ad- 
 vantage, and in this manner work with nature in- 
 stead of against it. 
 
 While it is true that force is one, yet force mani- 
 fests on this planet under different aspects, and we 
 will consider five of these as five forces or five great 
 currents. Remember, all force is one force, but 
 manifests at different rates of vibration according 
 to the media through which it acts, and these differ- 
 ent rates of vibration we will call, for convenience 
 sake, separate currents. Each of these five currents 
 is subdivided into other currents, and each of these 
 sub-divisions, like the great currents, is separated 
 from each other by a difference in their rates of 
 vibration, the same as the Gulf Stream is separated 
 from the main body of water through which it 
 flows by a difference in the rate of its vibrations. 
 
 These Cosmic currents vibrate red, orange, green, 
 blue and yellow, and may be pictured as vibratory 
 currents of color. To illustrate them crudely we 
 
Higher Occult or Spiritual Forces and their Uses. 225 
 
 may compare them with physical things with which 
 we are familiar. The rainbow, for example. Imagine 
 a great rainbow encircling the earth, and suppose 
 it to be in motion and you will have an idea of 
 how these currents look as they encircle this planet, 
 with each force representing one of the colors of 
 the rainbow only instead of the alleged seven 
 colors of the rainbow you will have five distinct 
 colors. It is true that the real currents have been 
 partly or dimly seen by men and are called the 
 zodiacal lights, and the many colored Northern 
 Lights also give us glimpses of portions of these 
 currents, which sweep round and permeate the earth 
 in every part of it. The Cosmic currents sweep not 
 only over the surface of the ground, but through it, 
 passing down on one side of the globe and up on 
 the other side. They also sweep down and through 
 one side of man and up on the other side, for man 
 is but a small world, and so he and every portion 
 of the world is touched by all these currents. Look- 
 ing at them from the subjective side of life they 
 appear as if a great number of ribbons of the five 
 different colors were being waved up and down and 
 wound around and around the earth as if all men 
 and living creatures were being entangled in them. 
 
 Doubtless you have looked out over the hot 
 pavements of a city in the month of August and 
 have seen the heat vibrations rising from them in 
 wavering clouds. Imagine those grayish white heat 
 vibrations to be of five different colors and you will 
 have a very good picture of how the Cosmic forces 
 
226 The History and Power of Mind. 
 
 look. Suppose my hand were full of ribbon stream- 
 ers of these different colors and I should shake 
 them rapidly before your eyes; some of you being 
 partially color blind would see only the red and 
 green ribbons, others might see those two colors and 
 the blue, while some would see the yellow and 
 orange and the other three. Each person would see 
 according to his capacity for seeing, and it is the 
 same with your ability to see and use the Cosmic 
 forces. You see and function in the color with 
 which you are connected by reason of your corre- 
 sponding vibrations. The human mind is related 
 to these currents very much as a telegraph instru- 
 ment is related to the telegraph wires. It may be 
 attached to any wire and repeat all messages that 
 pass over it. The human mind can attach itself to 
 the blue, the red, the yellow or the green current, 
 as the case may be, and receive everything in that 
 current, and it is through its power to tap the dif- 
 ferent currents that it is able to draw anything that 
 it may desire from those currents. 
 
 You may ask, "How can there be a Cosmic cur- 
 rent that we cannot see or feel?" I must call your 
 attention to the fact that because you do not feel or 
 see a force is no reason that it does not exist. You 
 cannot see free electricity and certain conditions 
 must exist before you can see or feel it, yet you do 
 not deny that it is a force and many of you are 
 learning to use it. You do not feel the Cosmic 
 currents because the necessary conditions have not 
 
Higher Occult or Spiritual Forces and their Uses. 227 
 
 been made to make you feel them. If you were 
 shut in a room where you could not feel the wind 
 and it blew very hard outside, the conditions would 
 not be right for you to feel it, and since it is a force 
 which cannot be seen you would not know that it 
 existed. 
 
 The first thing to do to become conscious of these 
 color currents is to image or visualize them, and re- 
 member that nothing was ever imagined by mind 
 that does not exist in the Universe. If you are 
 vibrating green and the blue has begun to tinge 
 your aura then visualize the blue and it will be 
 drawn into you, since whatever you concentrate 
 upon or image you must draw to yourself. If you 
 have developed to the point of the blue vibration 
 tinged with the yellow then you can draw the yellow 
 Cosmic current into yourself. And whenever you 
 are able to draw to you a current that is vibrating 
 higher than your predominating color you raise your 
 own vibrations and receive all the good that you are 
 capable of assimilating from that current. These 
 mental pictures and concentration are the two in- 
 struments we utilize for the purpose of connecting 
 ourselves with Cosmic currents which are constantly 
 flowing around the earth. 
 
 If it is difficult for you to image or visualize the 
 color you desire then secure a bit of ribbon of the 
 proper shade, or a drapery of the color you want 
 and look at it until you have the color impressed 
 upon your mind. This will help you to visualize the 
 Cosmic currents, and when you are concentrating 
 
228 The History and Power of Mind. 
 
 you should realize that they are currents of force, 
 though you speak of them in terms of color. When 
 the blue current is mentioned that force is meant 
 which vibrates at a rate that makes it appear as 
 blue. Electricity is a part of this current and when 
 the proper mechanism is used to condense and 
 conduct it, it manifests as blue to the physical eyes. 
 Commencing with the red current we will study 
 that first because it is lowest in the scale. Red 
 vibrations in anything mean emotion of some sort. 
 In man it indicates that his animal nature is in the 
 ascendency; in animals it is a perfectly natural 
 vibration but can be stimulated by external sugges- 
 tions to an ungovernable or furious extent. For ex- 
 ample; the bull or turkey gobbler are often driven 
 into a frenzy of rage at sight of a red rag. This is 
 because the color red makes a picture in the mind 
 of the creature and by looking at that picture its 
 mind becomes connected with the Universal cur- 
 rent of red. Having "tapped" that force it draws 
 into itself all that it can assimilate of that rate of 
 vibration and is angry. Man, like the animal, some- 
 times uses the red current unconsciously and when- 
 ever he gets angry he connects himself with it 
 whether conscious of it or not, and this is the reason 
 he loses his self-control so quickly. As soon as he 
 becomes enraged his aura changes to the vibration 
 red ; then his aura is vibrating sympathetically with 
 the red Cosmic current and the connection between 
 the two is instantly made. The red current has 
 been tapped, the man's aura is the conducting in- 
 
Higher Occult or Spiritual Forces and their Uses. 229 
 
 strument for that force and immediately the man 
 becomes filled with that vibration. Self-control is 
 swept away and he rages like a mad animal. He 
 has connected himself with everybody in the world 
 who is angry at that moment and he is functioning 
 in these vibrations. He is receiving telepathically 
 all the ugly things that other angry people are 
 thinking about, and he does things while in that 
 condition which he had never before thought of 
 doing. If he commits murder while in this angry 
 condition the legal fraternity call him emotionally 
 insane and he escapes capital punishment by being 
 incarcerated in an asylum for awhile. Red is a low, 
 disruptive, jagged vibration, and when it is drawn 
 into a person it begins its disruptive work upon 
 the physical body of that person, and all the good 
 creations which he has made are instantly repelled 
 from his aura. And not only are good things and 
 good people repelled from him, but he attracts all 
 the so-called evil manifestations and unless he re- 
 covers his mental poise and gets out of that red 
 current nothing but misfortune will come until he is 
 swept out of his body. 
 
 Anger demagnetizes the atoms which compose 
 the physical body. There is a positive and a nega- 
 tive side to every atom as there is to every magnetic 
 thing in the world. When we speak of a body hav- 
 ing magnetic polarity we mean that to the negative 
 of one side stands the positive of the next and that 
 to the negative of one atom stands the positive side 
 
230 The History and Power of Mind. 
 
 of another atom ; and when the body is demagne- 
 tized this relationship is destroyed. 
 
 The higher forces of nature flow rhythmically over 
 these atoms when they are magnetically polarized; 
 but when the red current, which is repellant, enters 
 a body it demagnetizes the atoms and prepares a 
 condition for bacteria to enter and disease to follow. 
 Sometimes the body becomes instantly disrupted 
 by this demagnetizing force and apoplexy is caused. 
 Many times paralysis is produced because the red 
 force is so great that the atoms which compose the 
 nerves of the body become demagnetized and never 
 afterwards regain their polarity. Different shades 
 of the red compose the sub-currents of the great 
 red current. The light shade, called scarlet, indi- 
 cates anger; the darker shade, called crimson, indi- 
 cates sex desire. Fear is indicated by a still darker 
 shade, which is a red-brown and which sometimes 
 deepens to almost a brown-black, and the sense 
 gratification is represented by a shade of wine color. 
 
 The Occultist uses this red current solely for the 
 purpose of restoring the sex functions in a person 
 who has become depleted and who desires to use 
 his powers solely in a creative manner. The black 
 magicians use the red current for the purpose of 
 destruction, for that force can be utilized to destroy 
 and it can also be used to precipitate anything 
 upon the material plane which floats or lives within 
 it. In Black Magic it is used for producing pests, 
 plagues and all kinds of diseases. The White 
 Magician can use it when the law requires or when 
 
Higher Occult or Spiritual Forces and their Uses. 231 
 
 mankind may be helped thereby, as Moses the 
 Occultist and the Egyptian magicians used it when 
 Egypt was made to suffer for her sins. 
 
 The orange current or force is used by everything 
 that lives upon this earth. It is the life current and 
 sustains every plant and animal body that exists. 
 Every creature that breathes inhales it with the at- 
 mosphere, and things that do not have lung capacity 
 absorb this great force through their bodies as 
 sponges absorb water or moisture. If an animal 
 becomes ill it immediately goes out into the sun- 
 light and breathes deeply of this orange force and 
 if permitted to remain in the sunshine and all drugs, 
 such as our sometimes unwise veterinary surgeons 
 give to animals, are withheld the creature will get 
 well. 
 
 The Occultist uses this life force in treating 
 animals, young children and undeveloped persons 
 who have not reached the point in their evolution 
 where they vibrate green. He also uses it in stimu- 
 lating the growth of plants. The Indian Yogi puts 
 a seed into the earth and then condenses this orange 
 force into it with such intensity that while you 
 stand looking at him the plant is forced out of the 
 soil, comes to maturity and bears fruit before your 
 eyes. This wonderful feat is imitated by sleight of 
 hand performers and by hypnotists who deceive 
 people into believing they see it done. But there 
 are men who can and do produce this phenomenon 
 and it is done by using the orange current in the 
 manner I have described. 
 
232 The History and Power of Mind. 
 
 Green is the current of individualization. It also 
 represents selfishness both in its higher and its lower 
 forms. Manifesting in this great current is all de- 
 sire for personal possessions, distinctions and indi- 
 vidual aggrandizement. It is the current of intel- 
 *lectualization without intuition. There are many 
 people who have a great deal of book learning, 
 whose objective minds are trained and who are in- 
 tellectual, and their memory of facts and alleged 
 facts is wonderful; but their subjective minds may 
 be altogether undeveloped and yet these persons 
 pass for very wise individuals. They vibrate green 
 and have but little or no real knowledge. For ex- 
 ample, a lawyer may know thoroughly the laws of 
 the State of New York and may know exactly what 
 decision has been given in a similar case to any 
 proposition you may submit to him ; but to-morrow 
 the legislature may meet and do away with all the 
 old statutes and pass a new set of laws and the 
 lawyer's knowledge would be legislated out of ex- 
 istence. There may be what we call intellectualiza- 
 tion of a very high order and yet it does not rise 
 above the green current. 
 
 Selfishness in its lowest aspect is in a sub- 
 current and belongs in the shade called bottle- 
 green. The desire for personal possessions, for dis- 
 tinction and for aggrandizement is the color of the 
 grass we see in the Autumn, is a very pronounced 
 shade, but not so dark as the bottle-green. Intel- 
 lectualization without intuition is a still lighter 
 
Higher Occult or Spiritual Forces and their Uses. 233 
 
 shade and a wise individualization without selfish- 
 ness is of the shade called pastel-green. 
 
 Individualization manifests as the green vibration 
 everywhere in the Universe and when you look out 
 into the heavens at night and see a star sending forth 
 a green light you may know that it, like our earth, 
 is passing through the period of individualization, 
 and like our own world, is the fourth planet in a 
 chain of seven. The planet of individualization is 
 where Men or Minds become self-dependent, inde- 
 pendent, self-reliant. The grass and foliage upon 
 our earth is green because in the vegetable kingdom 
 Universal Consciousness is making an effort to in- 
 dividualize. The keynote of our world is Fa, which 
 corresponds to the green color and which produces 
 it by its vibration. Animal souls are of this color 
 at birth, but soon take the deeper color red when 
 their bodies become strong enough to express desire 
 for pro-creation. As man develops and becomes 
 more and more individualized he vibrates green in 
 proportion to his development. 
 
 The Occultist uses this color to create for himself 
 and for others wealth, honor, position and every 
 material thing that can be desired. Suppose he de- 
 sires to make a material creation, he would concen- 
 trate upon the green current until every part of 
 his entire being was vibrating green or until he had 
 connected himself with this current. After making 
 his connection he would select the sub-current he 
 desired and in that make the mental picture of the 
 thing to be created. Suppose he wanted some 
 
234 The History and Power of Mind. 
 
 money, he would know that the financial current, 
 which is a part of the green current, was the one to 
 use. After making his connection and the picture of 
 the amount he wants he will no longer think of the 
 color current, but will put all his force in con- 
 centrating upon his creation, and the Great Con- 
 sciousness will bring his creation to him out of this 
 green current. The Occultist gets quicker results 
 than unconscious users of this law because he does 
 not waste his force, but goes directly and scientific- 
 ally to work. He knows what he wants and how to 
 get it and there is no uncertainty or indecision in 
 his efforts, and as a consequence no delay. 
 
 In cases of nervousness, the Occultist uses green 
 to individualize and strengthen the nerves, and 
 when he draws this vibration into the body of a 
 patient he brings in new materials and new atoms 
 which give new life. For failing eyesight and most 
 eye troubles, green is the proper current to use since 
 the optic nerves are revitalized and individualized 
 by its strengthening vibrations. The Occultist also 
 uses this current as an antidote for altruism. There 
 comes a time in the career of every man in some life 
 when he feels that he must be an Atlas and go 
 about carrying the world on his back. He wants 
 to bear everybody's sorrows and thinks it a great 
 privilege to give away everything he has in the 
 world. He becomes a devout believer in poverty 
 and piety and sometimes goes so far as to study the 
 pictures of Jesus of Nazareth and of the martyrs 
 and trims his beard to look like theirs, that he may 
 

 Higher Occult or Spiritual Forces and their Uses. 235 
 
 look the life of sacrifice he tries to live. He dissi- 
 pates himself mentally, physically and financially 
 and sooner or later nervous prostration if not star- 
 vation claims his body, and he goes out upon the 
 next plane of consciousness. For such a person 
 the Occultist uses the green current to restore him 
 to a normal condition of individualization. 
 
 The Occultist is taught never to give more of 
 anything than his surplus, and never to assume the 
 burdens of another, for by so doing he would be 
 robbing that other of the experience he came into 
 this world to get. In every walk of life we see 
 people who have assumed burdens that do not be- 
 long to them and who are crying aloud to Deity for 
 help and are demanding to know why such burdens 
 should be laid upon their shoulders. God never 
 laid upon any of His children anything that was 
 greater than they could bear; and when we find 
 our accumulations of sorrow and care becoming 
 too great to endure, it is time to examine the bundle 
 and see if we have not taken something that does 
 not belong to us, for a mistaken sense of duty often 
 leads us into as great difficulties as a real duty does. 
 
 The color blue represents all the higher mental 
 qualities. In the sub-currents are literature, music, 
 art, the higher education, organization, order, form, 
 harmony, etc. This force can never be used by 
 animals, but only by the subjective mind of man. 
 All inspiration along any line of thought is due to 
 the inflow of this blue current of which men are 
 many times entirely unconscious. Artists in any 
 
236 The History and Power of Mind. 
 
 line express greater things than are in their own 
 minds to express. We often hear it said of another, 
 "He taught better than he knew." This kind of 
 work has been called inspirational, but the real 
 source of inspiration has never been understood or 
 explained. One man believes the soul of his de- 
 parted wife inspired him to write the burning lines 
 of verse that made him famous. Another thinks an 
 old Master stood behind him while he knelt and 
 in the deepest reverence painted his best picture. 
 The musician's soul thrills with the melody that he 
 alone can hear and he tells you in a whisper that 
 the angels came, while he sat alone, and played 
 such symphonies as were never heard on earth be- 
 fore and that in his poor, stumbling way he had 
 tried to reproduce them on his instrument. And 
 none of these knew he had been unconsciously con- 
 nected through concentration with the blue Cosmic 
 current and had received from it a few of the gems 
 that are stored therein. 
 
 Suppose you desire to be a musician; the indigo 
 blue sub-current is the one you should connect 
 yourself with. All great composers have taken their 
 inspiration from this current and it was according 
 to each one's capacity to draw into himself this 
 force and listen to "the music of the spheres," that 
 made him the musician that he was. The musical 
 currents run from the deep indigo blue to the sky 
 blue, but no one known to the world has yet been 
 able to reach the highest sub-current and to bring 
 from it the music that lies there. That soul is yet 
 
Higher Occult or Spiritual Forces and their Uses. 337 
 
 to come and will be the gift of the twentieth cen- 
 tury to the world. But each and everyone can draw 
 inspiration to himself that will enable him to under- 
 stand, to interpret, to execute and to compose music 
 according to his own development. 
 
 The sub-current for literature is a light blue the 
 blue we see in the Autumn sky. Anyone can write 
 if he will be persistent enough to become a good 
 grammarian, master the technicalities of rhetoric 
 and learn to tap the universal current in which the 
 gems of this art are stored. In each human soul 
 lies latent the ability to learn every art and science 
 which is known ; and by aid of these great currents 
 and sub-currents to become perfect in his knowledge 
 of all. 
 
 The Occultist uses the blue current also for re- 
 storing harmony and health to persons who are be- 
 ginning to have a tinge of blue beyond the green. 
 Persons who vibrate between the blue and green are 
 passing in their development from where the object- 
 tive mind no longer has entire dominion over the 
 subjective, but shares with it the honors of control- 
 ling the body and its mundane affairs. 
 
 Yellow is the highest color vibration upon this 
 planet and is therefore the greatest force. It is 
 Spiritual and Creative Love. It is Wisdom, Intui- 
 tion, Divine Harmony and is the highest aspect of 
 Deity that we are capable of understanding at this 
 time. It embraces all the spiritual qualities we can 
 conceive, and I regret to say that man does not pos- 
 sess very many of them as yet. To acquire this 
 
238 The History and Poiver of Mind. 
 
 force man must develop to the point where the 
 subjective mind controls the objective, and when he 
 can attach himself to the yellow Cosmic current he 
 can accomplish anything he may undertake to do 
 upon this planet. An undeveloped person cannot 
 use the yellow current of force because it is a vibra- 
 tion so much higher than his own that there is no 
 sympathy between him and it; and it can be used 
 to help only such persons as are in sympathy with it. 
 In using the Cosmic currents for healing, the 
 Occultist takes the left hand of the patient in his 
 right hand, and after drawing into himself the cur- 
 rent he desires to use he passes it out through his 
 right hand into the left side of his patient. The 
 left side, being the receptive side, the patient re- 
 ceives this force without difficulty; and it passes 
 down his left side and up the right and round and 
 over and through his body until every nerve and 
 fiber of his body is soothed and relaxed by this won- 
 derful divine force. A knowledge of these forces and 
 how to use them gives one almost unlimited power ; 
 for, where the human will alone and unaided is un- 
 able to accomplish its purpose, it can by putting into 
 operation these universal forces have Omnipotence 
 working with it, making an assured success of its 
 every undertaking. 
 
LECTURE ELEVEN. 
 THE CAUSE AND CURE OF DISEASE. 
 
 Disease is as the name indicates, dis-ease, and 
 means an absence of ease. Pathologically speak- 
 ing, according to one of the definitions of the Cen- 
 tury Dictionary, disease is a "deviation from the 
 healthy or normal condition of any of the functions 
 or tissues of the body," and therefore it is necessary 
 to ascertain what the normal condition of the body 
 is before we may know when it is in a diseased or 
 abnormal condition, and to know this we must learn 
 how the body is builded. 
 
 Starting with its lowest aspect we find that the 
 physical body is made up of a great number of little 
 individual lives which the modern physicist calls 
 atoms. These atoms group and form what is called 
 molecules. A number of these molecules grouped 
 together form a complex individual life which is 
 called a cell and the grouping together of a number 
 of cells forms an organ, tissue, muscle, etc., and a 
 combination of the necessary muscles, tissues, 
 organs, bones and fluids, forms a mass or body which 
 has a common rate of vibration and a shape. 
 
 Did you ever stop to think why your physical 
 body holds its form ? Why should not your arm fly 
 off into space in one direction while a foot goes in 
 another direction ? It is because there is a dominant 
 
 239 
 
24 The History and Power of Mind. 
 
 mass vibration which holds together the different 
 portions of the body responding to it. The earth is 
 held together by the law of gravitation; there is a 
 mass tone which holds its component parts together 
 as one, and so long as that vibratory force continues 
 to play upon this planet there can never be a disin- 
 tegration of it. In the same way each person has 
 his own personal law of gravitation or mass vibra- 
 tion which holds all the parts of his body together. 
 
 This magnetic force, personal law of gravitation 
 or mass vibration of the body, is the vibration of the 
 objective mind which ensouls it. Its normal color 
 should be green, but the development of the man 
 determines the color at any time in his evolution; 
 and in the earlier stages of his development, when 
 his desires and passions are dominant, his vibra- 
 tions drop lower than the green and he becomes a 
 dirty brown. 
 
 The objective mind gives the physical body its 
 shape, and it is because of the presence of the mind 
 in the body that the particles, which come from all 
 sources to make up the magnetic sphere, group 
 themselves into the form of the physical man. You 
 have placed a horse-shoe magnet over a quantity 
 of steel filings and have seen them rush together 
 and crowd themselves around the magnet, taking 
 its form. The atoms, like the steel filings, are drawn 
 to the magnet mind and though they come from 
 earth, air, food and water they are held together in 
 the position they occupy by the mass vibration of 
 the objective mind. 
 
The Cause and Cure of Disease. 241 
 
 While there is a mass vibration, still each organ 
 has an individual modification of this vibration, 
 otherwise it could not be an organ separate and dis- 
 tinct from the rest of the body; and while each 
 organ responds as it were to the dominant tone it 
 also has its sub-tone. In the liver, for example, 
 there is the orange life force which has drawn to- 
 gether all the particles which compose that organ. 
 The blood passing through the liver has a tendency 
 to modify the orange vibrations with its own, which 
 is red. The dominant note of the objective mind, 
 which is green, holds together this mass of red and 
 orange vibrations because it is higher and therefore 
 stronger, and you have the three colors blended to- 
 gether in a mass of mixed vibrations which make 
 brown. The color of the liver seen subjectively 
 looks very much as it does objectively. 
 
 When the vibration of the objective mind is the 
 controlling or dominant vibration of all the organs 
 of the physical body then it is in a normal or healthy 
 condition. Disease is the lowering, below the nor- 
 mal, of the vibrations of a part or of all the body 
 except in cases of disruption or misplacement of 
 bones or other parts of the body. For illustration 
 we will take the liver again, which has its own 
 separate organic, complex existence by reason of its 
 construction. Its cells are held together by the 
 orange organic vibration, yet these vibrations are 
 modified and controlled by the higher mass vibra- 
 tion of the objective mind; now suppose the liver 
 instead of responding to the higher mass vibrations, 
 
242 The History and Power of Mind. 
 
 gradually begins to lose them and takes a lower rate 
 of vibration, then you have what is called a torpid 
 liver. 
 
 Diseases manifest in one of two general ways. 
 First, where the vibration of an organ is itself low- 
 ered and it manifests disharmony within itself; and 
 second, where the vibration of an organ is lowered 
 and it becomes demagnetized sufficiently to permit 
 foreign atoms to enter and set up an independent ac- 
 tion. The first condition, if it be not corrected, will 
 cause disintegration or disruption of the entire or- 
 gan ; the second condition results in great relaxation 
 with large interstices between the atoms, where for- 
 eign elements enter and set up a disharmonious sep- 
 arate organization, as for example in tuberculosis, 
 cancer or tumor. 
 
 Occultism teaches that all disease has its root or 
 origin in ignorance. The reason persons do not 
 have long lives is because they do not know how to 
 live. It is reported that Professor Loeb, Dr. Mat- 
 thews and others think that if we could discover 
 the proper electrical conditions we could prolong 
 the human life to more than two hundred years. It 
 is said by physicists that most animals live about 
 five times as long as is required for them to mature. 
 Applying this rule to man he ought to live to be at 
 least one hundred and five years old. That he does 
 not live to this age is because he does not under- 
 stand the laws of life and the real nature of disease. 
 He knows nothing about controlling the atoms 
 which compose his body nor how to use the Cosmic 
 
The Cause and Cure of Disease. 243 
 
 forces with which he is constantly surrounded for 
 the purpose of revivifying his physical body. "The 
 wages of sin (ignorance) is death," and disease is 
 the result of mental conditions. 
 
 For example, take a common cold. In ninety- 
 nine cases out of one hundred, colds are contracted 
 when people are mentally negative. The mind, in- 
 stead of being positive, instead of dominating its 
 physical particles and holding them contracted into 
 a proper shape, becomes relaxed and negative and 
 loses its force. As a consequence, the body re- 
 sponds to this relaxed condition, the molecules be- 
 come abnormally separated, and foreign elements 
 enter, and set up an independent activity of their 
 own. The cause was mental relaxation, or nega- 
 tiveness. 
 
 Why does a piece of glass receive the impression 
 from the point of a diamond when the diamond 
 will not receive an impression from the glass? Be- 
 cause the diamond is of a quick, positive, high rate 
 of vibration, while the glass is negative and of a 
 much slower rate than the diamond. The glass 
 cannot enter the interstices of the diamond be- 
 cause of its intense vibration. Thus it is with the 
 mind that is positive and strong; it can dominate 
 and control its body so well that foreign destruct- 
 ive elements cannot enter into it. 
 
 Some diseases can be traced back to the mental 
 condition which produced them and some cannot. 
 Many cases of heart trouble are directly traceable 
 to fear. The mind working upon the body, causes 
 
244 The History and Power of Mind. 
 
 an irregular flow of blood; the fear, with its con- 
 comitant heart disturbance, commences a vibration 
 of an abnormal rate, and soon that condition, which, 
 in the beginning was a functional trouble, becomes 
 organic disease. Many fevers are due to fear. The 
 first thing you should do for a patient who is suf- 
 fering with fever is to take away his fear, and his 
 temperature will drop degrees at a time. The cause 
 of congestion of different organs of the body can 
 often be traced back to a violent paroxysm of an- 
 ger. Professor Elmer Gates, of Washington, D. 
 C, has found that a large number of acids and poi- 
 sons in the blood are created by the direct action 
 of the mind. 
 
 Sometimes the mental cause cannot be traced, be- 
 cause there have been several different mental con- 
 ditions which combined to produce the material 
 result. Then, too, a disease is often produced men- 
 tally, and before it appears physically other mental 
 conditions have arisen which prevents its being 
 traced to its original cause. Occultism goes so far 
 as to declare that even the so-called hereditary dis- 
 eases are due to the mental condition of the suf- 
 ferer, because it is the mental condition or quality 
 of the mind during a previous incarnation, which 
 brought him into that particular family, and com- 
 pelled him to take the diseased body at birth. 
 
 Disease may be divided into two classes, the 
 imaginary and the real. Imaginary disease is a pic- 
 ture held firmly by the objective mind, which causes 
 more or less physical correspondence. This kind 
 
The Cause and Cure of Disease. 245 
 
 of disease is often created in total disregard of the 
 laws governing anatomy or physiology; and is 
 the hardest to cure, because persons possessed 
 of it hold to it so persistently that an entire re- 
 vision of their mode of thought must be made before 
 it can be cured. It is not at all infrequent to have a 
 patient complain of kidney disease, locating the 
 pain and the organs several inches below the waist 
 line. The spleen is often supposed to be on the 
 right side of the body, and phantom tumors appear 
 and disappear. But all these mental pictures, if 
 held long enough, create matrices or vortices, 
 and draw into them the elements that will bring 
 finally the actual disease that was at first purely 
 imaginary. For example: Sometimes indigestion 
 and gases in the stomach cause a distention of that 
 organ, it presses up against the heart region, 
 causing a functional disturbance of the heart, and 
 the patient becomes convinced that he has organic 
 heart disease. This picture in the patient's mind 
 is the matrix, and his fear of the disease draws it 
 to him in course of time. If the mind holds the 
 picture of anything long enough, whether it be 
 disease or health, poverty or prosperity, that pic- 
 ture must and will materialize. You who have 
 followed Charcot's experiments need no further 
 proof of the action of the mind upon the body. 
 
 The second class or real disease, produced pri- 
 marily by mental causes, and often supplemented by 
 a proximate physical cause, must be cured by con- 
 trolling the imaging faculty. And in this connec- 
 
246 The History and Power of Mind. 
 
 tion let it be understood that the words "cure" and 
 "heal" are used as popularly understood, and will 
 be used interchangeably not in any specialized 
 sense, as some modern metaphysicians use them. 
 To cure real disease is to restore to a normal con- 
 dition the functions or tissues of the body, and 
 to do this the vibrations of the affected part must 
 be raised to their normal rate. In cases of mis- 
 placement, dislocation, or broken bones, the quick- 
 est way to obtain relief is to send for a competent 
 physician or an anatomist and have an adjustment 
 made of the injured member or organ. In cases 
 of disruption of blood vessels, or muscles, a sur- 
 geon's aid should be immediately sought; not be- 
 cause mind is unable to cure any or all of these 
 cases, but because of the fact that at the present 
 time, even among educated people, mind is many 
 times impotent through misuse or non-use. Men- 
 tal treatments should follow these physical treat- 
 ments in order to obviate unnecessary suffering 
 and to obtain rapid recovery. 
 
 In cases where the vibrations of a part of the 
 body have been lowered, or where foreign parti- 
 cles have entered, there are several material meth- 
 ods of restoring health or harmony to the affected 
 parts. One of these is stimulation by physical ma- 
 nipulation, as in the practice of Osteopathy; an- 
 other is stimulation through electrical appliances. 
 Neither of these methods, however, reach the 
 mental cause for the disease, and even though the 
 physical disturbance be removed through either 
 
The Cause and Cure of Disease. 247 
 
 method, it can be only a question of time before 
 it reappears. The electric current is a part of the 
 Cosmic blue current, and by intelligent use it may 
 be made to raise the vibrations of an affected part 
 and restore it to its normal condition; unaided by 
 mind, it can only remove the effects, and never the 
 cause of the disease. The time is not far distant 
 when the two great therapeutical agencies for heal- 
 ing the sick will be electricity, representing the ma- 
 terial school, and mind, representing the metaphysi- 
 cal school. 
 
 A third means of curing disease is by properly 
 prepared non-poisonous vegetable compounds. The 
 Occultist does not believe in the use of mineral 
 drugs, nor does he believe that poisons should be 
 administered to a patient. Most minerals and poi- 
 sons are of such a low rate of vibration that when 
 introduced into the physical body they serve to 
 finally lower its vibrations rather than to raise 
 them. Though they stimulate temporarily, the re- 
 action leaves the patient in a worse condition. Poi- 
 sons sometimes appear to effect a cure because upon 
 their administration the acute form of the disease 
 disappears ; but even a close study of effects teaches 
 us that the disease was not cured ; its expression was 
 changed, but it soon appeared in another form and 
 place, and a new name had to be invented to desig- 
 nate it from the old one. To deny that drugs have 
 an effect upon the human body, as do some of the 
 radical metaphysicians at the present time, is to 
 
248 The History and Power of Mind. 
 
 deny and ignore the observations of daily life, and 
 also the law of physics, which asserts that two or 
 more bodies coming into juxtaposition mutually 
 affect each other; and also excludes consciousness 
 from a part of the Universe. Yet these same meta- 
 physicians eat food to sustain their physical bodies, 
 while denying that matter affects matter. 
 
 The mineral kingdom supports the vegetable 
 kingdom, and the latter supports the animal king- 
 dom; and according to the natural order of things, 
 it is unreasonable to pass over and ignore as impo- 
 tent the very kingdom that supplies our food, and 
 to go among the minerals for our medicines. The 
 vegetables used for remedies must be properly and 
 scientifically compounded, however, if the best re- 
 sults are to be had from their use; but the same 
 care must also be observed with the preparation 
 of our food. In Materia Medica there is never an 
 allowance made for a difference in the vibrations 
 of persons who are being treated. A man vibrat- 
 ing green would receive the same prescription from 
 a physician that one would receive who was vibrat- 
 ing red or brown. This is the reason modern medi- 
 cine is what it is called, an experimental science. 
 When a vegetable remedy has been suitably com- 
 pounded for an individual according to his vibra- 
 tions, a cure will be effected by that remedy. When 
 the same medicine, if it were given to another per- 
 son suffering from the same disease, but whose vi- 
 brations were of a totally different rate or color, 
 would have a different effect. The vibrations of 
 
The Cause and Cure of Disease. 249 
 
 the vegetable remedies must supplement the low- 
 ered vibrations of the person using them, if good 
 results are to be had. 
 
 Let it be understood, however, that Occultism 
 teaches that mind is the supreme power, and, when 
 properly developed and trained, can cure all dis- 
 eases, and that in the course of time it will be the 
 only force that man will use to keep the human 
 body in a normal, healthy and harmonious condi- 
 tion. But until that Arcadian time shall come, it 
 is not well to deny that the Great Consciousness 
 has also provided for Its undeveloped children ma- 
 terial ways and means for their relief from physi- 
 cal ills. 
 
 In curing disease by the power of mind there 
 is the conscious and the unconscious use of the 
 Cosmic forces. All the modern metaphysical schools 
 differ somewhat among themselves in regard to 
 the process by which cures are performed, yet 
 all perform some remarkable ones. Some schools 
 use strenuous denials, and, consciously or uncon- 
 sciously, hypnotize their patients, and while the 
 patients are in this condition change their thought, 
 and in this manner change the manifestation of 
 the disease they are suffering from. Other schools, 
 through repeated suggestion, cause the patient to 
 accept a new line of thought, and with the change 
 of thought the body changes. In both these classes 
 of cases it is the direct action of mind upon mind 
 which brings about the change in the condition of 
 the patients. 
 
250 The History and Power of Mind. 
 
 Other schools, through denials and affirmations, 
 or through affirmations and demand, petition or 
 prayer, and through picturing the desired result, 
 unconsciously put into operation the Cosmic forces. 
 The Occult school uses consciously the Cosmic 
 forces for the purpose of healing. In the two last- 
 named schools there is not only the action of mind 
 upon mind, but new elements are drawn into the 
 physical body of the patient, whereby the old, dis- 
 eased atoms are cast out and new ones are left in 
 their places. 
 
 There are three things that the Occultist attempts 
 to do in making a cure through mental means. First, 
 he destroys the mental picture of disease which his 
 patient holds as a matrix; second, he raises the vi- 
 brations of that portion of the body which has be- 
 come lowered, and makes it vibrate normally, thus 
 forcing out all foreign elements ; and third, he sup- 
 plements the elements driven out with new ele- 
 ments, which are introduced into the system by 
 the Cosmic force flowing through it. 
 
 Here are a few rules that may be helpful to you 
 in demonstrating over disease: First. It is well 
 to avoid seeing the manifestation of the disease, if 
 possible. 
 
 By doing this you will not have the picture of 
 disease constantly in mind and will be able to see 
 more clearly the picture of perfect health you must 
 create for the patient. If you do not see the ob- 
 jective symptoms of an ugly wound, or an artificial 
 growth, it is easier to make a perfect image and 
 
The Cause and Cure of Disease. 251 
 
 to present that picture to the mind of the patient. 
 In cases where there are only subjective symp- 
 toms, never let your sympathies go out to the pa- 
 tient, but hold yourself positive against any emo- 
 tion of fear which he may have. The moment your 
 own emotions become joined with his, your power 
 to destroy his mental pictures of disease is weak- 
 ened ; you have then accepted his creations and are 
 but accentuating the pictures in his mind. 
 
 Second. When you have learned from the patient 
 what his creations are, you are able to destroy them 
 by denying their permanency, if they exist tempo- 
 rarily, or by denying them absolutely if they are 
 imaginary. 
 
 After making your denials, follow them with 
 affirmations of that which is true; create a perfect 
 physical condition for your patient, and hold that 
 thought picture till he himself accepts it. Should 
 a patient come to you claiming heart disease, when 
 the physical disturbance was nothing but indiges- 
 tion, do not deny his claim audibly lest he be of- 
 fended. It is not necessary to give a patient a diag- 
 nosis of his actual condition, because sometimes this 
 would but intensify his fears. 
 
 In actual disease deny its permanency and affirm 
 health. For example, in case of a cold, deny its per- 
 manency and declare positiveness for the patient, 
 and as his vibrations are raised, direct the Cosmic 
 force through his body. As his relaxed condition 
 is corrected and the interstices between the atoms 
 grow smaller, the foreign elements become crowded 
 
252 The History and Power of Mind. 
 
 out or expelled from the system; and under this 
 treatment every part of the body will respond to 
 the positive condition of your mind. Denials de- 
 stroy ; affirmations create. The Christian Scientists, 
 and many Mental Scientists use denials largely and 
 sometimes exclusively, while the New Thought Sci- 
 entists use affirmations alone. It is urged by this 
 last-named class of healers that the denial is con- 
 tained in the affirmation; but to mentally affirm a 
 healthy condition without denying or destroying the 
 pictures of disease held by the patient, is like at- 
 tempting to build a new house on a site already 
 occupied by another building without first clearing 
 the ground. You could take out an old brick and 
 put a new one in its place till the new house was 
 built ; but it would require a much longer time than 
 it would to tear down the old structure first. 
 
 Third. In ordinary treatment, take the left hand 
 of your patient with your right hand, that the Cos- 
 mic Force may enter your left side and pass out 
 at your right, or positive side, into the left, or re- 
 ceptive side, of the patient. 
 
 You should remain in a positive condition of mind 
 while treating in this manner, or your own personal 
 magnetism or life force will be drawn from you with 
 the Cosmic Force into the patient. 
 
 Fourth. In a case of depleted mental condition 
 of a patient, in epilepsy, insanity, and in spinal 
 trouble, place your right hand upon the top of the 
 patient's head while giving the treatment. This 
 
The Cause and Cure of Disease. 253 
 
 position throws the current where it is most needed, 
 and the results will be more nearly immediate. 
 
 Fifth. In cases of cancers, tumors, boils, swell- 
 ings, or any kind of separate growth, cover the af- 
 fected part with a white silk handkerchief, and then 
 place your right hand over it while giving the treat- 
 ment. 
 
 The object in doing this is twofold. First, by 
 covering the growth with the handkerchief, you do 
 not see it and are better able to picture perfection 
 in its place ; and second, by placing your hand upon 
 the affected part you bring the current of force di- 
 rectly into it, and this conserves force. 
 
 Sixth. Keep your left hand off the patient when 
 treating. 
 
 Otherwise you form a complete circuit with him, 
 and as the new life goes into him through his left 
 hand or side, you draw his old, worn-out or demag- 
 netized atoms into yourself, thereby lowering your 
 own rate of vibration, and bringing a physical con- 
 dition upon yourself similar to that which you are 
 trying to relieve. 
 
 Seventh. In separate growths, use the highest 
 shade of the particular Cosmic Force or color you 
 have selected to use for your patient. 
 
 Suppose you desire to use green ; then treat with 
 the ultra ray of green, because that is the highest 
 rate of vibration of that color and will bring the 
 quickest results. Herein lies the great success of 
 the Occultist over the majority of healers, and 
 over those who use mechanical processes. When 
 
254 The History and Power of Mind. 
 
 the X-ray which is now known to be one of the 
 higher shades of green is thrown upon an individual- 
 ized growth, it immediately commences its dis- 
 ruptive process, and much better results are ob- 
 tained than with the knife. Its limitation is like 
 that of surgery, in that it does not reach the blood ; 
 consequently, if the germs are through the blood 
 of the patient, there will be a return of the disease. 
 But if the healer places his hand over the affected 
 part and uses the ultra shade of the Cosmic color 
 selected, and directs the current through the entire 
 system, the germs will be destroyed, and a return 
 of the disease will be impossible. 
 
 Eighth. Concentrate on the aura of the patient 
 to get his predominate color, and then ask of the 
 Universal Consciousness that the color may be made 
 known to you. 
 
 This should be done in case you are not clairvoy- 
 ant, and do not see Cosmic colors at will. Through 
 this practice you will learn to sense the color or vi- 
 bration of a person as you sense his character. 
 
 Ninth. Demand of Deity that you may be used 
 as an instrument for It to manifest through. 
 
 This demand, like any other, must, and will be, 
 met, because whatever is held in mind constantly 
 must sooner or later materialize. If you desire to 
 be a healer of the sick, and to relieve suffering, 
 that thought in your mind makes of you that kind 
 of a center, and if you are honest and faithful all 
 the healing powers in the Universe will flow 
 through you in order that your demands may be 
 
The Cause and Cure of Disease. 255 
 
 fulfilled. It is the mental condition which draws 
 or repels Cosmic Force, and the better life you live, 
 the purer your thoughts, and the higher your as- 
 pirations, the more perfectly can Cosmic forces be 
 used by you to restore health to others. 
 
 Tenth. Always treat yourself for positiveness 
 before treating a patient. 
 
 According to your own positiveness can you be 
 a channel or center through which Cosmic forces 
 can flow. Declare mentally something like this: 
 "Divine Force is made manifest in me. I am posi- 
 tive, positive, positive. I have the power to de- 
 stroy sickness and ignorance." This declaration 
 will raise your own vibrations and make you a bet- 
 ter instrument. If you are not positive, your own 
 animal magnetism is likely to pass from you to 
 your patient, and you will be left in a depleted con- 
 dition. Another reason for becoming positive be- 
 fore commencing to treat a patient is that you may 
 not take upon yourself the pains or disease from 
 your patient, as so many metaphysicians do. 
 
 Eleventh. Always use the color, or shade of the 
 color, next higher in the scale of vibration than 
 the predominating color of your patient. 
 
 Suppose you are going to treat a person who 
 vibrates in the higher shade of green. Then use 
 the blue Cosmic Force, which he must respond to, 
 but which he will react from. But by using a color 
 higher than his normal one, you raise his vibra- 
 tions and when the reaction comes he will not go 
 
256 The History and Power of Mind. 
 
 below the highest shades of his own color; and the 
 relief he receives will be permanent. 
 
 Twelfth. Realize that these Cosmic forces are 
 manifesting as vibrations or color. Do not think of 
 them as color merely. Let their force aspect be 
 predominant in your mind and when treating with 
 them, picture them as sparkling vibrations flowing 
 into you, and through you into your patient. 
 
 Thirteenth. Use suggestion as a supplemental 
 aid to the treatment by color. 
 
 Use it for the purpose of destroying in the mind 
 of your patient the picture of disease, and for cre- 
 ating a new picture of health. For example : First 
 get the full name of your patient, and then call him 
 mentally by that name until you feel you have his 
 attention. Remember, everyone must receive every 
 thought that is repeatedly sent to him whether he 
 accepts it or not is another matter. If your patient 
 has a pet name, one that he hears most at home, 
 use that until he is listening to what you have to 
 say. We will suppose he is called Jim Smith. You 
 should say, "Jim Smith, you are mind, and, being 
 mind, you cannot be diseased." Immediately you 
 have made a distinction in the patient's mind be- 
 tween his mind himself and his body; and now 
 you have his mind working with you to establish 
 the physical condition you desire. Then say : "Your 
 body is constantly changing, but you are mind, and 
 can control your body; you can draw new atoms, 
 new life into yourself, and health can be restored." 
 Suggest the power to control and to bring health. 
 
The Cause and Cure of Disease. 257 
 
 With every treatment say: "You have no fear of 
 disease because you know you are getting well." 
 It is best to repeat each of these suggestions slowly 
 several times in order that the patient may grasp 
 them fully, and when you have removed the demag- 
 netizing low vibrations of fear, the higher vibrations 
 of health will flow into the patient. Destroy fear 
 and all feverish conditions disappear. Suppose the 
 patient has consumption of the lungs. Fear that 
 he has an incurable disease is the first thing to re- 
 move from his mind ; then image for him the picture 
 of perfect lungs with the Cosmic Force flowing 
 through them and use such suggestions, denials and 
 affirmations as your intuition directs. 
 
 Fifteenth. Use as few words as possible to ex- 
 press your thoughts. 
 
 The more clearly and concisely your ideas are ex- 
 pressed the more easily will they be impressed upon 
 the mind of the patient. Instead of saying: "God 
 is love and you are a manifestation of His idea and 
 therefore cannot express anything but love," and 
 instead of giving a philosophical explanation of the 
 relationship between God and the patient, and show- 
 ing how God will answer his prayers for help and 
 health, say something short and decisive, such as 
 "you are not afraid of this disorder; you cannot be 
 afraid, because it is nothing to fear. You are get- 
 ting well. You are mind and can control your 
 body." 
 
 These are a few of the rules and suggestions 
 which may be used in successful mind healing. 
 
258 The History and Power of Mind. 
 
 There are others, but I am now trying to show you 
 those which exemplify the laws which underlie the 
 phenomena of healing. There is a law which lies 
 behind form and if you understand and practice 
 these suggestions I have made, you can gradually 
 change the rates of vibration of your body and also 
 its form until you can make it precisely what you 
 desire. Through this practice will come the power 
 to help others, for with every effort you will grow 
 stronger. 
 
 By attending a course of twelve lectures on har- 
 mony you will not become a great musician, but 
 you may in those lectures be taught how to study 
 and how to practice. It is by diligent practice that 
 a proficiency in anything can be attained, and so it is 
 with Occultism. It is the regular mental practice, 
 the use of Cosmic forces, the imaging, the control- 
 ling, the directing, the thinking that make you 
 strong. Having given you the rules it remains with 
 you whether this knowledge shall be purely intel- 
 lectual or whether you will make practical use of it. 
 
LECTURE TWELVE. 
 
 THE LAW OF OPULENCE. 
 
 In the preceding lectures you were taught how 
 to acquire spiritual perception and mental qualities 
 through the use of Cosmic forces. You have also 
 been taught how, by the power of Divine Mind, to 
 use your mental forces, not only for your own 
 benefit, but for the benefit of others ; and now, hav- 
 ing learned something about the spiritual and men- 
 tal planes of being we shall take into consideration 
 the third and last plane. This is where man ac- 
 quires or fails to acquire an abundance of wordly 
 goods, and where he must understand something 
 about the law of Opulence if he is to succeed. Since 
 many persons believe the possession of material 
 wealth is as essential to happiness as is the posses- 
 sion of perfect health, and since there are no acci- 
 dents in the world and every detail of our lives is 
 governed by law, it seems absolutely necessary that 
 we should thoroughly understand the law governing 
 Opulence, so that we may control our finances in- 
 stead of becoming victims of circumstances. 
 
 If you have not possessions then it is because you 
 have not used the law of Opulence for your own 
 benefit. It is a well known fact in Occultism that 
 everyone has now just what he deserves, and this 
 is as true relative to Opulence as it is to spiritual 
 
26o The History and Power of Mind. 
 
 and mental qualities. But before we discuss the 
 law of Opulence in itself let us consider certain 
 other aspects of the law of evolution which may 
 have a bearing on what I shall say later. 
 
 If you have studied the creatures in the animal 
 kingdom you know how a mother bird will work 
 to feed her young until it reaches a certain age, but 
 when the time has come for each little bird to work 
 for his individual self, she crowds them all out of the 
 nest and throws each one upon his own responsi- 
 bility. Other animals are devoted to the care of 
 their young until they reach a certain age and then 
 desert them or quarrel with and drive them away to 
 learn independence and to act for themselves. A 
 wise man gives to his child a proper education and 
 training during the years when its character is 
 forming; but when it reaches its majority he sends 
 it forth to assume the responsibility it must assume 
 if it is to become individualized. And the great 
 Universal Consciousness, Father- Mother, for the 
 first half of the evolutionary period on a planet, 
 stands behind man as the evolutionary impulse 
 pushing him onward in his career until he develops 
 to the point where he becomes self-reliant. Then 
 this impulse is withdrawn and from that time on 
 man must develop through his own inherent force, 
 and through a knowledge of the laws of nature and 
 their uses. 
 
 According to the Occultist's estimate the first 
 half of the cycle on this planet was reached in 1898; 
 at that time the childhood of the race ended. Be- 
 
The Law of Opulence. 261 
 
 fore that the evolutionary law provided for Its chil- 
 dren, but since that date the Cosmic Consciousness 
 has been gradually relaxing Its effort, and hence- 
 forth each individual must learn to rely upon his 
 own strength and knowledge of law for his success 
 in life. This may seem cruel at first thought, but it 
 is really kind and just, because it gives each man an 
 opportunity to develop his best qualities. 
 
 It is of the greatest importance that we who repre- 
 sent principles somewhat in advance of the race 
 should realize that all things are governed by law 
 and that not one of the least of these is the law of 
 Opulence. Deity does not give attributes or things 
 to us because we are good. It does not give opu- 
 lence as a reward for Spiritual acquirement; but if 
 we want Spiritual qualities we must use certain 
 laws to receive spiritual things, and if we want ma- 
 terial things we must use the laws which govern 
 the distribution of them. 
 
 In the first part of the period which ended in 1898 
 the old Adamic curse was upon humanity. "In the 
 sweat of thy face shalt thou eat bread." But as the 
 race advanced in evolution some men came from un- 
 der that curse and were able consciously or uncon- 
 sciously to use the laws of nature for their indi- 
 vidual benefit. They found that by thinking and 
 planning they were not obliged to earn bread by 
 hard manual labor, but could assume the relation- 
 ship of employer to other men and have the work 
 done by those who had not the faculty for planning 
 
262 The History and Power of Mind. 
 
 and managing. In this manner there arose between 
 men the relationship of employer and employe. 
 Please do not understand me to say that the em- 
 ployer, the thinker, ceased working when he laid 
 down his tools and became the manager of his own 
 business, because I do not wish to be so understood. 
 Cessation from work means retrogression; and re- 
 trogression soon becomes degeneration and stagna- 
 tion. Stagnation whether it be spiritual, mental or 
 material causes death. The great Consciousness 
 Itself works during each Cosmic Day and each and 
 every child of God who desires to progress must 
 also work. 
 
 A great mistake most people make is in limiting 
 the meaning of the word "work," to purely physical 
 labor. Work does not necessarily mean physical 
 effort. Man is mind, and mental strength and 
 growth can come only through the exercise of his 
 mental powers. The misapprehensions of the mean- 
 ing of the Scriptural quotation, and of the laws of 
 life and the law of opulence are due to the miscon- 
 ception of the meaning of the word "work." Last 
 year when these lectures were first delivered several 
 persons said, "It is very wrong to teach that you 
 can draw material things to yourself by the use of 
 mental forces; you should teach that people must 
 work for what they get." 
 
 It is obvious that these cautious souls have not 
 developed beyond the physical plane and are unable 
 to appreciate the fact that there may be mental as 
 well as physical labor. Then there are other persons 
 
The Law of Opulence. 263 
 
 who do not desire to use Spiritual forces to draw to 
 themselves material things and therefore protest 
 against teaching this knowledge. It is quite reason- 
 able to suppose that such persons find it difficult to 
 manipulate spiritual forces and because they do not 
 understand how to use them, they object to others 
 using them. To such persons I have nothing to of- 
 fer except good wishes for their progress along the 
 lines of development they have chosen. 
 
 Man's evolution has enlarged the meaning of the 
 word "work," and we now say, "In the sweat of thy 
 face or through mental effort shalt thou earn bread." 
 Employers, capitalists, and thinkers plan day after 
 day and work very hard mentally, yet many of them 
 never raise a hand to do physical labor, but leave 
 that part of the work to be done by those persons 
 who still believe they must earn bread in the sweat 
 of their faces. 
 
 There are three classes of workers ; first, the phy- 
 sical workers ; second, the physico-mental workers ; 
 and the third, or purely mental workers, and each 
 of these classes mark a period of human evolution. 
 By purely physical workers I mean the hewers of 
 wood and the drawers of water the mass of hu- 
 manity. The physico-mental workers are those who, 
 while recognizing that the laws of mind have a won- 
 derful power to aid a man in his development and 
 resources, use their minds for planning and enlarg- 
 ing their work and drawing Opulence to them- 
 selves and yet use physical means also for the 
 purpose of manifesting it. The third class em- 
 
264 The History and Power of Mind. 
 
 braces all who are purely mental workers, those 
 who have learned to use their minds along all lines 
 and who use mental forces so fully and so completely 
 that they receive whatever they desire without 
 manual labor of any kind. These are conscious 
 users of what is commonly called the Law of 
 Opulence or the law which brings opulence. Some 
 students call this the law of Demand and Supply. It 
 really does not matter what it is called, it operates 
 as unfailingly on the plane of mind as it does in the 
 realm of economics. 
 
 Each person places himself in one of these three 
 classes of workers, according to his evolutionary de- 
 velopment. In the first mentioned class the law 
 of opulence never manifests. Those who only work 
 physically and individually can never acquire 
 opulence. They earn a living, plus a little more 
 than an actual living and that is all. The law of 
 opulence commences to manifest in the second 
 class, the physico-mental workers, and passes by 
 slow gradation up through it to the third class 
 where it manifests in its fullness. Every person in 
 the course of his evolutionary career must pass 
 through each of these three classes, and most per- 
 sons who have reached our point of development are 
 in the second class. This class is working with the 
 laws of nature consciously while having a center 
 through which to draw opulence. By a "center" I 
 mean a certain definite vocation or avocation 
 through which money comes. For example, sup- 
 pose you have a small business a news-stand per- 
 
The Law of Opulence. 265 
 
 haps. You have learned that there is such a thing 
 as the law of mental supply and demand and you 
 desire to use this law for your financial betterment. 
 The small business is your center, and having a 
 center you wish to enlarge it. You make a mental 
 picture of a larger business and see yourself with 
 a cigar and news-stand combined. You continue 
 to look at that picture day after day and mentally 
 demand that it shall be yours. If you never destroy 
 your picture, in the course of time your demand 
 will be met and the ways and means will be provided 
 for you to get what you want. But you should not 
 stop with the news-stand and cigar store combined, 
 because it is never well to be content with a little. 
 You should immediately go about making another 
 picture, as soon as your demand has been met, and 
 in this one you should see yourself supplying other 
 news-stands; you should become a dealer and dis- 
 tributor. 
 
 Or perhaps you do not wish to have a news-stand. 
 You may be engaged in another kind of business 
 and are working for a salary. Perhaps you would 
 like an advancement in your salary and a better 
 position. Then you should make a mental picture 
 of yourself occupying the position you want and 
 drawing the salary you require, and by using this 
 position for your center you will work upward and 
 onward to any height you desire. 
 
 For illustration let us look at a woman who at the 
 present time stands before the public as a teacher 
 of metaphysics. I refer to Mrs. Mary Baker G. Eddy. 
 
266 The History and Power of Mind. 
 
 She began her work as a practicing physician and 
 after studying under Dr. Quimby learned that it 
 was possible to make a practical application of the 
 Berkeleyan philosophy for the purpose of healing 
 the sick. She started with a very insignificant med- 
 ical practice, which gradually grew to large propor- 
 tions because of the remarkable cures she per- 
 formed through mind. By the use of medicine and 
 the knowledge that Dr. Quimby had given her, she 
 proceeded to enlarge her center, to draw more peo- 
 ple to her from different j5arts of the country, whom 
 she healed and taught, receiving large sums of 
 money for her services. Her center grew until, it 
 is said, she is possessed of more than a million 
 dollars. 
 
 If we do not like our occupation there is no reason 
 why we should continue to work at it forever; but 
 we should hold the thought that we shall use it only 
 for the present until we can draw to ourselves a 
 better and a higher one. Faith in the law and the 
 power of mind enables us to demonstrate over ad- 
 verse financial conditions and make them what we 
 desire. 
 
 A master of this art, whom I knew, was once a 
 newsboy. Born of poor parents in one of the poor- 
 est quarters of Paris, he lived like all other children 
 of his class in great destitution. His father and 
 mother were rag-pickers and lived in a cellar. One 
 day when he had reached the age of eighteen or 
 twenty years a great Soul came into his life, and 
 after engaging the boy to do some work for him 
 
The Law of Opulence. 267 
 
 became interested in his welfare, and commenced 
 to teach him something about the power of mind. 
 He also gave him a manuscript and told him to 
 study and practice the teachings he would find 
 therein. 
 
 The boy took the manuscript home and spent his 
 last penny for a candle to give him light while he 
 read about the Law of Supply and Demand ; and as 
 he read he began to believe that he could use this 
 law to help himself out of his wretched condition. 
 Looking around the tiny place which he called his 
 bedroom, with its bare walls and stone floor, he 
 said: "I shall commence now to create opulence 
 for myself and the first thing I need to make me 
 comfortable is a piece of carpet three feet long, that 
 I can stand on while dressing when I get out of bed 
 on cold mornings." He made the mental picture of 
 the carpet and held steadily to his creation. After 
 awhile a piece of new carpet was given him by a 
 woman whom he had served and from the moment 
 his first demonstration was made, his faith in the 
 law never wavered. He became a master at mak- 
 ing demonstrations and when I first met him was 
 possessed of a great many hundred thousand dollars. 
 
 Faith in something we cannot understand is hard 
 to acquire and rarely amounts to anything more 
 than a hope; but faith based upon immutable law 
 grows to be knowledge. The small demonstrations 
 made in the beginning of our work with the law are 
 often the most important, because they prove to us 
 
268 The History and Power of Mind. 
 
 that we have the power to put the law into opera- 
 tion. 
 
 In the class of the physico-mental workers we 
 find the progressive student increasing his center 
 and also attempting to make demonstrations inde- 
 pendently of it. Such persons have made a marked 
 advance in their evolutionary progress. For ex- 
 ample, let us take the attorney who knows how to 
 use the law of demand. He says, "I want a good 
 law practice," and pictures clients coming in large 
 numbers into his office. After a time the clients 
 come as he has pictured, and then he begins to make 
 a distinction between them. He says: "I want to 
 represent only those whose cases I can win," and in 
 this way he works for the mutual benefit of all who 
 are interested. Then he begins to create things 
 separate and distinct from his law practice. He 
 wishes to go to Congress, perhaps, and makes a 
 picture of himself representing his district at the 
 Capitol, and after holding the picture for a while and 
 earnestly making his demands that it shall come to 
 him, an opportunity will be given and his pictures 
 will materialize, because the law has been put into 
 operation by his power of mind. 
 
 In the third class are those individuals who are 
 able to draw to themselves whatever they desire 
 irrespective of any center. Constant practice has 
 made these persons skilled operators of the law and 
 with them faith has grown into absolute knowledge. 
 When a person has reached this point in his devel- 
 opment he may go out of business and go wherever 
 
The Law of Opulence. 269 
 
 he desires because he can draw to himself anything 
 he wants at any time or in any place he may happen 
 to be. Many students pass through the second 
 stage, that of the physico-mental workers, very 
 slowly. A few pass rapidly since some have more 
 faith than others and after all it is largely a ques- 
 tion of faith, for "Whatsoever a man thinketh in his 
 heart so is he." 
 
 Mrs. Helen Wilmans-Post, the leader of the Men- 
 tal Scientists, started, as you know, penniless in the 
 world. She went to San Francisco with but a few 
 dollars in her purse. When she arrived there she 
 demanded and secured her first position on a news- 
 paper, then she gradually drew to herself through 
 that center money enough to enable her to live more 
 comfortably than previously. After awhile, in an- 
 swer to her demands she got a better position. In 
 the beginning she used the law of demand uncon- 
 sciously -by following her own intuitions. Then 
 she began to gain something of a knowledge of the 
 working of the law and soon her brilliant career 
 began as a conscious worker with the law. From a 
 journalist she became an author, wrote several books 
 and finally added healing and teaching to her long 
 list of accomplishments. Through it all she con- 
 tinued to draw more and more opulence to herself 
 until she is now in possession of great wealth and 
 has built a city in the State of Florida. By her 
 own example she has shown that she belongs to 
 the second class of workers and makes the state- 
 ment in her book, "The Conquest of Poverty," that 
 
270 The History and Power of Mind. 
 
 no one can draw wealth to himself independently of 
 physical effort. 
 
 Dr. Emily Cady is a member of the third class. 
 She has performed very remarkable cures and has 
 helped the world through her writings as much as 
 any metaphysician of this time. Dr. Cady had used 
 the law in healing and her faith was great enough 
 to believe she could make other demonstrations of 
 a more material nature. She passed into the third 
 class when she showed her implicit faith in the law, 
 by demanding and receiving a large sum of money, 
 which she needed to reimburse herself for the time 
 and money she had given to suffering humanity. 
 She pictured the amount that she wanted and then 
 claimed it for her own and within a short time after 
 she made her creation, a stranger brought to her 
 what she had demanded. According to her picture 
 and her faith was it given unto her. 
 
 To put this law of opulence into operation it is 
 necessary to realize three things. 
 
 First. That everything you want exists now in 
 Divine Mind. Do you want jewels, gold, silver? 
 They are all in the market ; besides, there are in the 
 mines as yet undiscovered all these things in great 
 abundance. All these things exist and you can put 
 into operation the law which will bring them to you. 
 The history of the world shows that every mental 
 demand of man has been met. Man grew tired of 
 walking and carrying things and the cumbersome ox 
 cart was evolved to supply his needs. But he was 
 
The Law of Opulence. 271 
 
 not satisfied with this crude vehicle and demanded 
 something better. Then came the horse and a 
 lighter wagon, and after that came steam cars, 
 bicycles, and automobiles ; and still man is not satis- 
 fied ; he wishes to fly and flying machines are in the 
 process of evolution. By degrees, from the boat 
 made by burning out the center of an old log, has the 
 modern steam yacht been evolved, and from the 
 slow, tedious process of sending verbal messages 
 by footmen from place to place has been evolved 
 the wireless telegraph. There is no lack of anything 
 in the world; and there should be no envy or jeal- 
 ousy between men, because there is enough of every- 
 thing for everyone who lives. 
 
 Second. Realize that all things belong to Deity 
 and that you can only have a temporary use of them. 
 We should not be so vain-glorious as to think we 
 own anything. We came into the world destitute of 
 everything and go out of it with nothing except 
 character and some even go without that. While 
 we remain here we may borrow of Deity something 
 or nothing according to our manner of thinking. 
 
 Third. We should realize that all things are dis- 
 tributed by the Universal Consciousness according 
 to law. One man is not poverty-stricken and an- 
 other man a millionaire by chance, fatalism or 
 caprice; but everything is distributed according to 
 the law of mental demand, or of asking and receiv- 
 ing. Those of you who are Christians know what 
 the Nazarene said on that subject. Everyone who 
 stops to think knows that the successful man of 
 
272 The History and Power of Mind. 
 
 business has always been, is, and always will be, the 
 man who can demand i. e., make a positive picture 
 of what he desires. If you want anything, create it 
 mentally, demand it and according to your faith be 
 it unto you. 
 
 There are certain rules whereby you may hasten 
 your creations whether you work with or without a 
 center, and your experiences will demonstrate the 
 accuracy of the rules. 
 
 Rule First. Meditate and ask Deity if there is 
 any reason why you should not have the thing you 
 desire to create. 
 
 This removes all uncertainty from your mind 
 about the advisability of creating it. Uncertainty 
 produces a negative condition, disturbs your aura 
 and therefore delays the materialization of your cre- 
 ations. When you have received the answer from 
 the Universal Consciousness that it is right and 
 proper for you to have the thing that you desire, 
 you are then in a positive condition of mind and 
 can forcefully put the law into operation. 
 
 Rule Second. Having decided to create something 
 make your mental picture of it and demand it un- 
 falteringly until it comes. 
 
 A person after having received a favorable answer 
 from Deity often commences his creations, but aban- 
 dons them after a time because his objective mind 
 suggests that he may have been mistaken about his 
 answer from Deity, and it is not best to continue 
 with his demands. Do not listen to the suggestions 
 
The Law of Opulence. 273 
 
 from your objective mind, but once having decided 
 upon your creations go on with them to the end. 
 
 Rule Three. A positive demand accomplishes 
 more and better results than a request or a petition. 
 
 The mental attitude while making a demand 
 should always be reverential but very positive. The 
 Lord's Prayer is an excellent example of the proper 
 attitude of mind to be assumed while demanding 
 and we will analyze that prayer. Jesus said : "After 
 this manner therefore pray ye:" 
 
 "Our Father which art in Heaven, hallowed be 
 Thy name. Thy Kingdom come. Thy will be done 
 in earth, as it is in Heaven." The attitude of mind 
 manifested by the Nazarene while making the first 
 part of this prayer was reverential, and His words 
 expressed His desire for perfect harmony between 
 Himself and the Father. Having established har- 
 mony between His individual mind and the Univer- 
 sal Mind He proceeded to make His demands in this 
 manner : 
 
 "Give us this day our daily bread : And forgive us 
 our debts as we forgive our debtors. And lead 
 us not into temptation, but deliver us from evil." 
 After this manner therefore pray ye. 
 
 There is not one negative thought in this prayer. 
 There is a positive demand for every thing desired 
 rather than a petition. We can almost say that the 
 demand was a respectful command that the things 
 desired should come, and you will find that those of 
 you who ask of the Universal in this manner and 
 
274 The History and Power of Mind. 
 
 with this mental attitude will always receive what 
 you ask for. 
 
 Now contrast the mental attitude that the Nazar- 
 ene Occultist had when He prayed, with the mental 
 attitude of His so-called followers of the present day. 
 He said : "When thou prayest thou shalt not be as 
 the hypocrites are: for they love to pray standing 
 (kneeling) in the synagogues" (churches and cathe- 
 drals) * * * "But when ye pray, use not vain 
 repetitions as the heathens do; for they think that 
 they shall be heard for their much speaking" (chant- 
 ing, litanies and masses). If you wish to witness 
 the contrast between the Master's and the modern 
 forms of worship, go into some of the Churches on 
 or near Fifth Avenue and listen to the words of the 
 modern prayers. On Sunday you will hear Public 
 Confessions of sins something like this : 
 
 "We have left undone those things which we 
 ought to have done ; and we have done those things 
 which we ought not to have done: And there is no 
 health in us." "Health" is defined by the Century 
 Dictionary as meaning in this connection, "natural 
 vigor of the faculties, moral or intellectual sound- 
 ness." 
 
 If we were to say about these same good citizens 
 what they publicly admit about themselves that 
 they are morally and intellectually depraved and 
 are secretly doing things they ought not to do we 
 should very likely be sued for slander. But we do 
 not wish to say or to believe that these good people 
 are guilty of what they unthinkingly say with their 
 
The Law of Opulence. 275 
 
 lips in their forms of worship. The illustration 
 given is but a type of modern prayers, for they 
 are all more or less self-depreciatory if not self- 
 condemnatory. The thoughts behind them are nega- 
 tive and the prayers are repeated as a matter of form 
 more than of faith. Many of these same good per- 
 sons have their prayers answered, but the answered 
 ones were not the formal prayers read from prayer 
 books. They are those that were sent forth from 
 the heart and were expressed in a positive form ; 
 they were whispered in the silence of the night 
 when there was no one near to hear but God to 
 whom they were addressed. These are the prayers 
 that are efficacious, for prayer to be efficacious must 
 be a mental and not an emotional act. 
 
 Rule Four. Demand specifically what you want. 
 
 Every word of this rule is important. First you 
 must make a demand. Then that demand must be 
 specific. Make your mental picture clear-cut. The 
 clearer your picture the sooner will it materialize. 
 Demand specifically what you want not what 
 some one else wants you to have, riot what you 
 think you ought to have, not what you believe it 
 your duty to want but what you, yourself, wish to 
 have. 
 
 The converse of this rule is equally important. 
 Never demand what you do not want. If you want 
 money do not demand work. Almost everyone 
 makes that mistake when he begins to make de- 
 mands, because it is difficult to break the customs 
 of many years. Unpleasant environment is the re- 
 
276 The History and Power of Mind. 
 
 suit of demands we have made in the past for things 
 we do not want now. Diseased bodies and unhappy 
 conditions of mind are but the realizations of de- 
 mands made in ignorance. 
 
 This rule is very likely to be misunderstood even 
 by some metaphysicians. A local teacher of meta- 
 physics who heard this rule given in last year's 
 lectures said it was misleading ; that if a person had 
 a drug store, for instance, and wanted money, he 
 should demand patrons because they would bring 
 money. To an Occultist this is strange logic. The 
 druggist might have a thousand patrons and sell 
 his entire stock. If all his customers bought his 
 goods on credit and neglected to pay for them after- 
 wards, his desire for money would not be fulfilled 
 although his demand for patrons had been fully met. 
 It is best to demand the specific thing you want and 
 then you will make no mistakes. 
 
 A member of last year's class who thought she 
 understood this rule, said to me several weeks after 
 the lecture course ended that she had created a trip 
 to Europe. When I asked her to describe her men- 
 tal picture she said, "Oh, I just created a one thou- 
 sand dollar bill which I shall use for my trip." She 
 had not created a trip to Europe, but had created 
 the money to pay for one. This was no surety of 
 her getting the trip, because when the money came 
 an infinite number of things might occur to prevent 
 her going. She should have created the picture of 
 herself on board ship crossing the ocean ; and should 
 
The Law of Opulence. 277 
 
 have seen herself landing safe and well on the other 
 side. 
 
 Rule Fifth. Only demand when your desire is 
 strong. 
 
 When you feel the need of a thing your desire for 
 it is strongest. Many students begin enthusiastic- 
 ally to make their demands, but soon grow luke- 
 warm. A good way to intensify your desires is to 
 think of the pleasure the possession of the thing 
 would give you, and when the desire for it comes 
 sweeping over you then make your demand for it. 
 Do not demand because the hour set apart for de- 
 manding has come, or because you regard it as a 
 duty you have assumed. Demands made under such 
 conditions amount to nothing, and the time put into 
 work of that kind is wasted. 
 
 Rule Sixth. Mind works best when the body is 
 still. 
 
 If you are drumming with your fingers or swing- 
 ing your feet while making demands, a part of your 
 mental force goes into the physical motions you are 
 making; and your forces being divided the mental 
 work is robbed of much of its power. You should 
 conserve your force. At intervals during the day 
 you may think of your demands and you can hold 
 them sub-consciously in mind much of the time; 
 and while this kind of picture-making does not ac- 
 complish as much as when the body is at rest, yet it 
 does have an effect. 
 
 Rule Seventh. Never demand when excited. 
 
 You may have a strong desire but no excitement. 
 
278 The History and Power of Mind. 
 
 A demand made during intense excitement is always 
 met forcefully. This is an important rule, the 
 observance of which may save you much incon- 
 venience. We are quite likely to become impatient 
 at times and are often tempted to make positive and 
 often violent demands. It is a dangerous thing to 
 do, as I shall show you in an illustration. 
 
 There was a student of Occultism in this city who 
 had met with several misfortunes. Disasters fol- 
 lowed each other till everything he had on the mate- 
 rial plane was swept away. But he was possessed 
 of a great deal of force, and knowing how to make 
 demands for what he wanted he commenced making 
 new creations. He demanded ten thousand dollars, 
 which to him was financial opulence. The demand 
 was not met immediately, and the young man be- 
 came impatient and finally angry. And when he 
 wakened one morning to find himself without money 
 enough to pay for his breakfast, he walked to the 
 park, threw himself upon the ground and lay there 
 for several hours with his teeth set, hands clenched 
 and with the perspiration standing out all over his 
 body, so intense was his excitement while making 
 his demand for the money he had pictured. The 
 next day he boarded a freight train and, after the 
 usual delays and inconveniences attending upon 
 transportation of that kind, the student of Occultism 
 managed to reach a Western town. But he had no 
 sooner entered the place than a cyclone came along 
 and swept it off the face of the earth. When the 
 young man of the violent demands came to con- 
 
The Law of Opulence. 279 
 
 sciousness he was lying on the ground some distance 
 from the place where he was at the last moment of 
 his recollections. His body was a mass of bruises, 
 and when he tried to rise to his feet he found 
 one leg broken. Bodies of dead animals and men 
 lay all around him, and wagon loads of debris 
 were strewn in all directions ; but jtist within reach 
 of his arm lay a plethoric leather wallet. The young 
 man reached his best arm out and got the wallet and 
 immediately examined its contents. There were 
 just ten one thousand dollar bills in it and not a scrap 
 of paper or a card to tell to whom it belonged. He 
 placed his prize in the pocket of his ragged coat and 
 crept on his hands and knees for some distance till 
 someone came to his relief. He was cared for and 
 finally got well. The owner of the money could not 
 be found, and the young man kept it as an answer 
 to his violent demand, which so nearly cost him his 
 life. 
 
 Please do not understand me to say that the young 
 Occult student's violent demand created the cyclone, 
 because it had nothing to do with its creation. But 
 the student was drawn into the cyclone, and suf- 
 fered the horrors of it, because of his own tempestu- 
 ous mental condition when making a demand, which 
 had to be met after the manner that it was made. 
 
 Rule Eighth. Always be deliberate and quiet but 
 positive when demanding. 
 
 Never demand in a hurry. Mental perturbation 
 engendered by hurry, delays the materialization of 
 your creation. 
 
280 The History and Power of Mind. 
 
 Rule Ninth. Avoid speculating on the time when 
 or the way in which your demonstrations will be 
 made. 
 
 When you begin speculating about the ways and 
 means by which your demonstrations will come, 
 immediately your force becomes scattered or divided 
 and a repellent expectancy arises. There is an ex- 
 pectancy that draws and also one that repels. The 
 quiet expectancy, such as is used in meditation, is 
 helpful in drawing to you whatever you have de- 
 manded. But the impatient expectancy of the 
 objective mind is repellent, because it causes your 
 aura to become disturbed and then nothing you 
 want can reach you. 
 
 For example : You have made a demand and have 
 commenced to wonder through whom that demand 
 will be met. Your objective mind suggests Mr. 
 Blank as the most probable person, and if you 
 accept the suggestion when you meet Mr. Blank you 
 are not mentally poised because of your impatient 
 expectancy. Mr. Blank feels your mental condition 
 and if he were inclined to form a business connec- 
 tion with you he would hesitate and become uncer- 
 tain because of your perturbed condition ; thus the 
 ways and means that you expected to bring your 
 demonstration would not be used because of your 
 repellent expectancy. The person who violates rule 
 nine is likely to make very bad investments. 
 
 Rule Tenth. Anger, discontent, envy and lack of 
 self-control repel and delay a demonstration. 
 
 If you make a mental picture of a thing and hold 
 
The Law of Opulence. 281 
 
 it for a time it will materialize, but it will be delayed 
 if you indulge in any of the mental attitudes just 
 mentioned ; because any of these puts your aura into 
 a perturbed condition, which is repellent. Divine 
 Mind may be likened to the ocean which is bearing 
 a boat ladened with your creations to you who are 
 standing upon the shore. If you are perturbed your 
 mind acts upon Divine Mind as the wind off shore 
 acts upon the ocean. It is forever driving back the 
 craft in which are the things you desire. 
 
 This rule is one of the hardest to observe, but like 
 anything else it can be followed. It is the disregard 
 of this rule which leads investigators and beginners 
 to disbelieve in the law or power of mind, and which 
 makes so many students finally abandon in despair 
 their efforts to use the forces of nature. But if we 
 do not use nature's forces then we shall be used by 
 them. 
 
 Rule Eleventh. The earnestness with which a 
 demand is made, the frequency with which it is made 
 and the persistency with which the mental image is 
 consciously held in mind hastens the demonstration. 
 
 In another lecture you were told how your mental 
 picture becomes a matrix, and that from this matrix 
 goes forth a vibratory force like a blue magnetic cord 
 which connects with the thing you desire. The 
 material thing is then drawn by this blue magnetic 
 cord closer and closer to you every time you con- 
 centrate your thoughts upon your creation until the 
 thing finally reaches you. The earnestness, the fre- 
 quency and the persistency of your demands and 
 
282 The History and Power of Mind. 
 
 concentration draw it faster and faster. An Oc- 
 cultist never destroys any of his mental pictures. 
 
 Rule Twelve. The realization that you are using 
 an immutable law hastens your demonstrations. 
 
 Get out of the old theological belief that because 
 you are good God is going to give you a reward. 
 Get out of the thought that you are a chosen child 
 of God and that He is looking upon you with special 
 favor. Get into the thought that you are a student 
 of Occultism and that by working with mental law 
 you are going to be able to make quick demonstra- 
 tions and a better environment. Realize that you are 
 using an immutable law and that what you demand 
 comes to you because you are using a law and that 
 nothing can prevent its coming, that God Himself 
 cannot prevent it without violating His own na- 
 ture a thing inconceivable. 
 
 Rule Thirteen. After your creation is made and you 
 have demanded it, the declaration, "God has met 
 my demand," hastens the material manifestation of 
 the demonstration. 
 
 For example, suppose you have made a picture, 
 have held it, have demanded that it should material- 
 ize and you have followed faithfully all the fore- 
 going rules. But after awhile your objective mind 
 says: "that demonstration will never come." Then 
 I would suggest that you change your form of de- 
 mand, and instead of saying "Give me this," say, 
 "God has met my demand. It is mine now." Claim 
 it. You know your demand has been met on the 
 mental plane, and since it is law that you are using, 
 
The Law of Opulence. 283 
 
 it is yours as much before it has materialized as it 
 will be afterwards. This declaration gives you a 
 positive realization of possession which has a ten- 
 dency to bring more quickly your creations and 
 removes anxiety and perturbation from your mind. 
 
 If this lecture on opulence has been made clear, 
 you will understand that I am not teaching a mental- 
 get-rich-quick affair, nor the getting of something 
 for nothing; but that you must work mentally in 
 order to accomplish whatever you desire. The 
 particular advantage of this system of mental work 
 over physical work is this: you can select your 
 own time to do it, and arrange your own compen- 
 sation. The results are absolutely certain if the 
 law is complied with. But when a person says he 
 has complied with the rules given here and has not 
 got results he has made a mistake somewhere. He . 
 has not complied. 
 
 Your experiences with prosperous business men 
 and all successful persons in the world show that 
 unconsciously they work along these lines. I say 
 unconsciously because the majority of them as 
 yet only unconsciously put the law into operation. 
 Observation of the metaphysicians of the present 
 day who are semi-consciously using the law and 
 their name is legion will show that even with their 
 limited knowledge they are repeatedly making re- 
 markable demonstrations. A large per cent of those 
 who listened to these lectures last season have been 
 enabled to demonstrate health for themselves and 
 many have brought health to others ; some have 
 
 -'. 
 
284 The History and Power of Mind. 
 
 demonstrated happiness, others have enlarged their 
 business and many have drawn to themselves money. 
 All have increased their store of knowledge and a 
 few have become ennobled in character and have 
 gained spiritual qualities. This shows that the law 
 has worked on the three planes of being with this 
 band of students and if a few can accomplish many 
 can. 
 
 If you will but persist in your faith there can be 
 no limit to your possibilities. If you can demon- 
 strate a piece of carpet three feet long you can 
 demonstrate a million dollars. If you can cure a 
 headache you can cure in the course of time any 
 disease ; if you can demonstrate a seat in the street 
 car you can demonstrate a seat in Congress, in time. 
 If you can be happy a week you can be happy for a 
 lifetime, because what can be done in a small de- 
 gree can, with persistency, be done in a large 
 degree. 
 
 It rests with you whether you will or will not use 
 this law consciously. There are some of you who 
 will. There is always a percentage of persons who 
 succeed and a percentage who do not. Each of 
 you can do with your knowledge what you choose. 
 This much is true, if you persist for two years to 
 consciously use these laws in your daily affairs of 
 life, by the end of that time your environment will 
 have changed sufficiently, and demonstrations 
 enough will have been made, to prove to you that 
 you are dealing with Law. 
 
INDEX. 
 
 Accidents, none in the World 259. 
 Acids, Mind in Action Creates 244. 
 Adamic Curse 261. 
 Adepts 19, 23, 26. 
 " Aid Men 27, 64. 
 " as Teachers 19, 23, 186. 
 
 Custodians of Occult Sciences 20. 
 Affinity, Chemical, a Form of Consciousness 34, 35, 89. 
 
 " Sex desire manifests as in Minerals 89. 
 Affirmations in Disease 250, 251, 252, 257. 
 Ages of Earth, 21 to 26. 
 
 " " " Fifth, Present One 21, 25 to 27. 
 
 " " " First 21. 
 
 " " " Fourth 23 to 25. 
 
 " " " Second 21. 
 
 " Sun Cycles Determine 104. 
 " " " Third 21, 22. 
 Aggrandizement, Individual 232. 
 Altruism, Cause of 234. 
 
 Force Dissipated in 235. 
 Green Force Antidote for 234, 235. 
 versus Selfishness 45, 46. 
 America, Ancient Civilization 25. 
 Anesthetics, Man Is Mind Proved by 50. 
 
 Mind is Not Product of Brain Proved by 59. 
 Anger, Caused by Fear 85. 
 " Causes Congestion 244. 
 " Color of 142, 143, 230. 
 
ii INDEX. 
 
 Anger, Control of Others Necessitates Elimination of 79. 
 " Demagnetizes Atoms of Body 229, 230. 
 " Effect on Self-Control 79. 
 41 Red Color of 142, 143, 228, 230. 
 " Repels Demonstrations 280, 281. 
 Animal Kingdom., Consciousness in 35, 69, 70. 
 " " Independence in 260. 
 
 " " Re-embodiment in 107 to 109 
 
 " " Souls in 174. 
 
 " " Vegetable Kingdom Supports 248. 
 
 Animal Propensities, Color of 135. 
 Animals, Blue Force Cannot be Used by 235. 
 
 " Orange Force Used in Treatment of 231. 
 Answers to Demands 152 to 157. 
 
 Rules to Test 156, 157- 
 Anthropomorphism 33. 
 
 Appolonius of Tyanna, Cosmic Forces Used by 223. 
 Art, Blue Force Inspires 235, 236. 
 Asceticism, Moral Reaction from Sensuousness 88. 
 
 Spirituality Not Gained by 88, 89. 
 Assyria 26. 
 
 Astrology, Revival of 17. 
 Atlantis, History of 23, 24. 
 
 " Misuse of Suggestion Destroyed 204. 
 " Occultism Openly Taught in 23, 24. 
 Atlas, Altruist Desires to Become an 234. 
 Atoms, Anger Demagnetizes 229, 230. 
 " Conscious Side of 66. 
 " Dual Nature of 41. 
 Atonement 92. 
 
 Atrophy of Body Not Taught 90. 
 Aura, Animal Magnetism Utilized by Blending 194. 
 " Color and Size of 128 to 130, 132, 138. 
 " Conductor for Cosmic Forces 228, 229. 
 " Creating a Matrix in the 160, 214. 
 " Defined 128, 129. 
 " Development Determines 128 to 130. 
 
INDEX. 
 
 Ill 
 
 Aura, Disturbed by Loss of Self- Control 80. 
 
 " Uncertainty Disturbs 272. 
 Aureola, Denned 128. 
 Auric Egg, Denned 128. 
 Babylon 26. 
 
 Bad Luck, Result of Mental Creation 94. 
 Baraduct, Dr., Inventions of 131, 161, 162. 
 Berkeleyan Philosophy, Mrs. Eddy's Use of 266. 
 Beliefs, Do Not Amount to Much 21. 
 Birth, Man Determines His 118. 
 Black, Abnormality Indicated by 132. 
 Blood, Vibration of, is Red 241. 
 Blue, Color of Aura 138, 139. 
 
 One of the Primary Colors 123, 124. 
 " Normal Color of Subjective Mind, 62, 133, 137 to 139. 
 Blue Cosmic Force, Animals Cannot Use 235. 
 " Art Inspired by 235, 236. 
 " Aspect of Divine Mind 224. 
 " Electric Current Part of 247. 
 " Harmony Inspired by 235. 
 
 Healing by 247, 255. 
 " Indigo Inspires Music 236. 
 " Light Blue Inspires Literature 237. 
 " Literature Inspired by 235, 237. 
 Mental Force 158. 
 
 " Inspiration Caused by 235, 236. 
 " Music Inspired by 235, 236. 
 Order " " -235. 
 Organization Inspired by 235. 
 Subjective Mind Alone Can Use 235. 
 Body, Physical Atrophy of, Not Taught 90. 
 Body Is Not the Man 58. 
 Burial of Dead 55. 
 Change in Conscious 113, 119, 258. 
 Changes Constantly 108, 109, 118. 
 Christian Fear Dissolution of 55. 
 
IV INDEX. 
 
 Body, Physical Composition of 239, 241. 
 
 " < Cremation of 175. 
 
 " " Determined by Soul 118. 
 
 ' < Drugs Affect 247, 248. 
 
 " " Influence on Mind 277. 
 
 " " Man Modifies 1 18. 
 
 " " Objective Mind Holds Together 239, 240. 
 
 " " Should Be Kept Long 113, 119. 
 
 * ' . Soul Chained to 175. 
 
 " " Thought Affects 119. 
 
 " " Why It Retains Its Form 239 to 241. 
 
 Boils, Treatment of 253. 
 Book of Life, Photosphere Is 182. 
 Brahma, Days and Nights of 101, 102. 
 Brahmins Used Cosmic Forces 223. 
 Braid, Dr., and Braidism 191. 
 Broken Bones Should Be Set 246. 
 Brotherhood, Silent 92. 
 Brown, Color of Aura 136. 
 Brownies Are Elementals 172. 
 Buddhists Used Cosmic Forces 223. 
 Bulwer's Writings, Mystecism in 169. 
 Burdens of Others Should Not Be Assumed 235. 
 Cady, Dr. Emily, Mental Worker 270. 
 Cancer Caused by Fear 73, 74. 
 
 " Treatment of 253. 
 Catholic Church Occultism in the 28. 
 
 Prayer in 145, 146. 
 Causes, Occultism Teaches 16, 17. 
 Center, Magnetic, Depletion of 45. 
 
 Duty to Become a Positive 46. 
 " Preservation of 44, 45. 
 
 " Use of to Draw Opulence 264 to 266, 268. 
 Centers, Evolution Carried on Through 63. 
 Chains, Planetary, Evolution on 67. 
 Chaldean Occult Record, Genesis Is 71. 
 Character Effect of Thoughts on 119. 
 
INDEX. V 
 
 Character, Known by Color 62. 
 
 " Man Makes His Own 118, 119. 
 
 Only Thing We Take Out of World 271. 
 Vibrations Indicate Man's 62. 
 Chemical Affinity, Consciousness in 34, 35, 89. 
 Chemistry, Once an Occult Science 12. 
 Chicago, Infants' Court in 115. 
 Children, Orange Force Used to Heal 231. 
 Christian Science, Denials Used Mostly by 252. 
 " " Healing by Based on Law 223. 
 
 " " Malicious Animal Magnetism of, Is Objec- 
 
 tive Mind 76. 
 
 " Mistaken in Not Recognizing Affirma- 
 tions 252. 
 
 " Mistaken in Not Recognizing Drugs 247. 
 " " Matter 40. 
 
 " " " Physical Side 
 
 of Atom 41. 
 " Patients Sometimes Have Recurrence of 
 
 Disease 212. 
 " Patients Sometimes Have Recurrence of 
 
 Disease, Cause of 212, 213. 
 Christianity Esotericism in 14. 
 
 Occult Bodies in 28. 
 Prayer in 145, 146, 274, 275. 
 Christians, Dissolution of Body Feared by 55. 
 Clairaudience, Self Control Necessary in 80. 
 Clairvoyance 60, 113, 183. 
 
 Artificial 183, 184. 
 
 Magnetic Connection Visible in 113, 114. 
 
 Unreliability of 183. 
 Passive 183, 184. 
 
 " Unreliability of 183. 
 Self Control Necessary in 80. 
 Students Taught 184. 
 Subjective Plane Seen in 61. 
 True 184, 185. 
 " Pineal Gland Used in 184. 
 
INDEX. 
 
 CoercionCrime to Use 162, 209, 212, 214. 
 Deity Does Not Use 211, 212. 
 Examples of Mental 202 to 204. 
 " Hypnotism and 198 to 200. 
 
 Mental 202, 203. 
 
 " Students Never Helped by 186. 
 
 " Suggestion and 207 to 209. 
 
 " To Do Evil Greatest Crime 214. 
 
 Colds, Cause of 243. 
 
 Objective Mind Creates 97. 
 Color Ancient Europeans' Idea of 120. 
 " Necessary in Manifestation 124, 125. 
 Negative 138, 139- 
 Of Objective Mind, 62, 133, 137,240. 
 " Subjective " 62, 133, 137- 
 Positive 138, 139- 
 Primary 123, 124, 132. 
 " Quality of Thought Determines 132, 133- 
 
 Theories of 121, 122. 
 " Vibration and 121 to 125. 
 Colored Glass Modifies Light Ray 52. 
 Concentration 147 l & 2 to l6 7- 
 " Aids, in 164 to 166. 
 
 Blood Drawn to Part by 52. 
 Defined 162, 164. 
 " Difficulty of 163. 
 
 Law of Periodicity in 163, 164. 
 " Materialization Hastened by 162. 
 
 Most Forceful Mode of Mind 147, 163. 
 " Not a Fiery Ordeal 165. 
 
 Opulence Created by 234. 
 Power of 166, 222. 
 " Practice of 164 to 167. 
 
 " Practice Required in 12, 166. 
 
 " Quietness Best for 164. 
 
 " Rules for 164 to 166. 
 
 Self-Control Necessary in 80. 
 " Tool of Occultist 147- 
 
INDEX. Vll 
 
 Congestion, Anger Causes 244. 
 Conscience, Memory of Past Events 109. 
 Consciousness Centers in 87, 112. 
 
 Creations Controlled by Dominant 74. 
 Currents in 47. 
 Divine, See Deity. 
 
 " Automatic Action of 50. 
 " Awakening of 102. 
 
 Centers of, Evolution Takes Place 
 
 Through 44, 63. 
 " Men Are 87, 112. 
 " Mice Are-87. 
 " Should Be Preserved 44, 
 
 45, 150. 
 
 Defined 35, 36. 
 
 Forces Are Aspects of 39 to 41, 223, 224. 
 " Man, Assisted by 68, 260, 261. 
 " Manifestation of 34 to 41, 52, 101. 
 Must Rest 101. 
 Thoughts Impress 50. 
 World Managed by 91. 
 Environment Shows Which Controls 74. 
 Immortality Means Preservation of 150. 
 In Animal Kingdom 35, 69, 70, 107, 108. 
 " Chemical Affinity 34, 35. 
 " Gases 35. 
 
 " Mineral Kingdom 34, 35, 69, 106. 
 " Vegetable Kingdom 35, 69, 106, 107. 
 Objective, Manifestation of 34, 52. 
 Planes of 141, 142. 
 Self, Manifested in Man 31. 
 Subjective, Manifestation of 43. 
 Synonymous with Mind 34. 
 Control Of Fear 85 to 88, 92 to 99, 141. 
 ' Sensuousness 88, 89, 92 to 99. 
 ' Sex Desire 89, 90, 92 to 99. 
 " Vanity 90 to 99. 
 
viii INDEX. 
 
 Cosmic Force See Currents. 
 Creation Always in Pictures 160. 
 
 Bad Luck Result of 94. 
 
 Dawn of, Described 101, 102. 
 
 Demand Until Realized 272, 273. 
 
 Destruction of Wrong 98, 99. 
 
 Dominant Consciousness Always Controls 74. 
 " Evil Results of 94. 
 
 Goodness Does Not Affect 166. 
 " Hastening of 272 to 283. 
 
 Ignorance in 74, 276. 
 " Meditation Before 167, 272. 
 
 Mental Brings Everything But Knowledge 157, 
 
 158. 
 " Mental, Concreteness Necessary in 159, 160. 
 
 Denned 157- 
 
 " " Law Practice Built Up by 159. 
 
 " " Matrix Formed in 160, 161, 281. 
 
 " Operation of 160, 161. 
 " Particles Drawn Together by 162. 
 " " Photographs of 161, 162. 
 
 " " Universe Result of Divine 160. 
 
 " Objective Mind and 272. 
 '* Of Consciousness or Ether 47. 
 " " Mind Forms 65. 
 " " Money 159 to 161, 163, 165. 
 " " Opulence 259 to 284. 
 " " The Universe 101 to 105. 
 " On Material Plane 158, 159. 
 " Precipitation Is Highest Form of 162. 
 " Self-Control Necessary for 80. 
 *' Thoughts Continually Result in 113, 157. 
 Cremation, Occultists Advocate 175. 
 
 Souls Freed from Body by 175. 
 Crime, Coercion to do Evil Greatest Known 214. 
 " Disembodied Entities Cause 176. 
 " Hypnotism Cause of 198 to 200. 
 
INDEX. IX 
 
 Currents. Cosmic, Black, Abnormal 132. 
 
 Blue (see Blue Cosmic Force). 
 Conscious Use of 222, 223, 249. 
 " Defined 219 to 226. 
 
 " " Green (see Green Cosmic Force). 
 
 Healing by (see Healing). 
 How to Connect with 227, 255. 
 Jesus Used 223. 
 Mental Conditions Attract or Repel 255. 
 
 " Scientists Use 222, 223. 
 Orange (see Orange Cosmic Force). 
 Pass from Left to Right 252. 
 Reel (see Red Cosmic Force). 
 Semi-Conscious Use of 222. 
 Surround Us Constantly 242, 243. 
 Unconscious Use of 222, 249. 
 Use of 222, 223, 238, 250 to 258. 
 " White, Abnormal 132. 
 
 Yellow (see Yellow Cosmic Force). 
 Thought 220 to 223. 
 " How Used 222. 
 " Plagiarism and 221. 
 " Used in Disease 223. 
 Dawn of Creation 101. 
 Day, Cosmic, Alike, More or Less 102. 
 " Beginning of 102. 
 " Evolution Carried on in 15. 
 " Failure in One 30. 
 
 Laws for Each 103, 104. 
 " Periods in 21, 25, 26. 
 " Supreme Consciousness Re-Embodies Itself for 
 
 New 104. 
 
 " Vast Period of Time 15. 
 Death of Worlds 105. 
 Declarations Against Fear 87, 88. 
 Beneficial 98, 99. 
 
X INDEX. 
 
 Deity, See Also Consciousness Divine. 
 " All in All 15, 16. 
 " Anthropomorphic Idea of 33, 151. 
 " Awakening of 101, 102, 103. 
 " Change in Idea of 31, 32, 151. 
 " Conceptions of 31 to 33, 151. 
 " Created Only Good 173. 
 " Demand from 99, 150 to 152, 155, 162. 
 " Depend Upon, Instead of Persons or Things 152. 
 " Does not Coerce 211, 212. 
 " Everything Belongs to 271. 
 " " Exists in 15, 16, 270, 271. 
 
 " Force Is desire- of 39. 
 
 " Idealizes What It Will Accomplish in a Cosmic Day 15. 
 " Instrument of, in Healing 254, 255. 
 " Just Is 117. 
 " Laws Made by 103, 104. 
 " Manifestation of 15, 39 to 41, 101. 
 " Men with No Conception of 31. 
 " Nature Worshipped as 32. 
 Nearness of Man to 151, 152. 
 Physical Ills of Undeveloped Provided for by 249. 
 " Re-Embodies Itself 103, 104. 
 " Solar, Denned 102. 
 
 " Radiates Life Force 102. 
 " Tribal Worship of 32. 
 " Universal, Nature of 33. 
 " Universality of the Idea of 31. 
 Universe Is Manifestation of 101. 
 " Unfoldment of 15, 16. 
 " Wisdom Should Be Demanded of 99. 
 
 " Works During Each Cosmic Day 262. 
 
 Yellow Force Is Highest Aspect of, for Us 237. 
 Demagnetization (see Vampirization). 
 Demand, and Supply, Law of, is Law of Opulence 264. 
 
 Desire Necessary 277. 
 " Earnestness Necessary 281. 
 
INDEX. XI 
 
 Demand Effect of Excitement on 277 to 279. 
 For Knowledge 154. 
 
 " Wealth Hastened 222. 
 
 " From Supreme Power 99, 150 to 152, 155, 162. 
 
 " How Answered 50, 155- 
 
 Hurry Delays 279. 
 " Objective Mind Sometimes Answers 152, 157. 
 
 Repelled by Speculation, Anger, etc. 280, 281. 
 " Should Be Deliberate and Quiet 27.9. 
 
 " " " Positive 273, 279. 
 
 " Specific 275- 
 Success Obtained by 271, 272. 
 " When Answered 155, 156. 
 Denials Hypnotism Produced by 249. 
 
 " in Treatment of Disease 249, 250, 251, 252, 257. 
 " Mental Scientists Use 223. 
 Desire Color of Sex 230. 
 
 Its Function in Making a Demand 277. 
 " Positive Side of Objective Mind 83, 148. 
 " Power to Do Anything, One 238. 
 
 Will Is Greater Than Desire 84. 
 Despondency, Caused by Fear 85. 
 Destiny, Man's Affected by Every Thought 119. 
 Development, Adepts Aid 64. 
 
 Rest Between Lives Determined by 112. 
 Dewey, George, His Self-Control 79. 
 Discontent Repels Demonstrations 280, 281. 
 Disease (see also Healing). 
 
 Cause of 73, 93, 242, 243, 244, 257. 
 Classified 244 to 246. 
 Cure of 194, 237, 245 to 258. 
 " " Defined 246. 
 Defined 239, 241. 
 
 Emotions and Their Relations to 79, 93. 
 Habit in Picturing 96, 97. 
 Hereditary, Caused by Mental Conditions 244. 
 How It Manifests 242. 
 
xii INDEX. 
 
 Disease Hypnotism Does Not Cure 212, 213. 
 " Ignorance Is Cause of 242. 
 " Imaginary, Cause of 244, 245. 
 Manifestation of 242. 
 
 Mental Dominion Does Not Cure 212, 213. 
 Negativeness Produces 150. 
 " Real, Cause of 245 to 247. 
 Dissolution, Evolution Alternates With 100. 
 Divine Healers Use Law 223. 
 
 Mind (see Consciousness Divine; Deity). 
 Doubt Caused by Fear-^85. 
 Drinking Overcome by Suggestion 97, 98. 
 Drugs, Mineral and Vegetable 247. 
 
 Physical Body Affected by 247, 248. 
 Duty, Mistaken Sense of, Leads to Difficulties 235. 
 Dwellers on the Threshold 169 to 174. 
 Earnestness in Demands 281. 
 Earth Ages of (see Ages of Earth). 
 " Fourth Planet 233. 
 " Keynote of Is Fa. 233. 
 " Why It Does Not Disintegrate 240. 
 Eddy, Mrs. Mary Baker G. 265, 266. 
 Education, Higher, Color of 235. 
 Effects, Science Studies 16. 
 Egg, Auric, Defined 128. 
 Egypt 25, 26. 
 
 Occultism in 26. 
 Egyptian Bodies Preserved to Use Again 55. 
 
 Empire Founded by Advanced Souls 25, 26. 
 Electricity, As a Cure for Disease 246, 247. 
 Is a Force 148. 
 Physicians' Use of 197. 
 Subdivision of Blue Force 247. 
 Elementals 171 to 176. 
 
 Created by Thoughts of Men 172, 173. 
 Good and Bad 172, 173. 
 How Created 172. 
 
INDEX. 
 
 Xlll 
 
 Elcmentals, Leave Creators 173, 174. 
 " Utilized in Magic 174. 
 
 " " Psychic Phenomena 174. 
 Elimination Of Fear 85 to 88, 92 to 99, 140, 141. 
 " " Sensuousness 88, 89, 92 to 99. 
 
 " Sex Desire 89, 90, 92 to 99- 
 " " Vanity 90 to 99. 
 
 Elohim (see Planetary Spirits). 
 
 Elusinian Mysteries, Evolution of Souls Taught in 27, 28. 
 Embryology, Difficulties in 16. 
 Emotion, Action Upon Regretted 93. 
 
 " Ascendency of, in Beginning 133. 
 
 Conquering of, Aids in 84, 93 to 99. 
 
 " " " Law of Periodicity Helps 94 to 96. 
 
 " " " Suggestions Used in 97, 98. 
 
 " Thinking With Subjective Mind 
 
 Helps 92. 
 
 " Will Must Be Exercised in 92. 
 Disease Caused by 79, 93. 
 Fear An 84 to 88 (see Fear). 
 Four Basic 84. 
 
 Ignorance Cause of Uncontrolled 93. 
 Intellect Can Control 136. 
 
 Mental Condition of Objective Mind 81, 84, 92. 
 Natural Forces on Own Plane 84. 
 Red Color of 136. 
 Self-Control Necessary in Control of 70 to 83, 
 
 92, 93- 
 
 Sensuousness An 85, 88, 89 (see Sensuousness). 
 Sex Desire an 85, 89, 90 (see Sex Desire). 
 Subjective Mind Can Control 92, 93. 
 Vanity An 85, 90 to 92 (see Vanity). 
 Entites on Subjective Side of Life 171, 175 to 177. 
 
 " Pose as Teachers 185. 
 Environment Shows Which Consciousness Controls 74. 
 
 Thoughts Determine 116 to 119. 
 Envy Repels Demonstrations 280, 281. 
 
XIV INDEX. 
 
 Epilepsy, Mental Treatment of 180, 252. 
 
 " Obession Causes 180. 
 Equilibrium, Law of (see Justice, Law of). 
 Esotericism, Jesus Taught 13, 14. 
 " Teachings of 12, 14, 15. 
 
 ' for Students 13. 
 Essence, Divine See Deity. 
 Essenes, Cosmic Forces Used by 223. 
 Eternity, Length of 100. 
 Ether Birth of Minds from 65 to 67. 
 " Defined 43, 44. 
 " Nature of 43 to 48. 
 
 Everything, Ability to do, Can Be Gained 12, 166. 
 " Belongs to Deity 271. 
 " Distributed by Law 271, 272. 
 " Enough of for Everybody 271. 
 
 Exists in Deity 16. 
 " Is Unfoldment of Deity 16. 
 " Law Governs 117, 118, 259, 261, 271. 
 " Must Unfold ii. 
 
 Temporary Use of 271. 
 Evil, Creation of Objective Mind 75, 76. 
 " Result of Ignorance 74, 76, 94, 108. 
 Evolution As Divine Energy or Impulse 15. 
 
 Centers of Consciousness Necessary for <44, 63. 
 Dissolution Alternates With 100. 
 Occultism Teaches 15. 
 Of Soul 28. 
 " Universe 100 to 102. 
 Process of 12, 15, 62 to 64, 114. 
 Works Through Individuals 63. 
 Excitement, Effect of on Demands 277 to 279. 
 Exotericism, Jesus Taught 13, 14. 
 
 " Masses Are Taught 13. 
 
 Eyesight Failing, How to Cure 234. 
 Fa, Corresponds to Green Force 233. 
 " Keynote of Earth 233. 
 
INDEX. XV 
 
 Failures Caused by Fear 73, 74, 85, 140, 141. 
 Fairies Are Elementals 172. 
 Faith, According to, Be It Unto You 272, 284. 
 " Assists in Conquering Circumstances 266. 
 " Based Upon Ignorance Only a Hope 267. 
 
 " " Law, Becomes Knowledge 267. 
 " Curers, Healing by, Based on Law 223. 
 " Salvation Does Not Depend Upon, Alone 67. 
 Fear (see Emotion, Conquering of). 
 " Acquired Before Birth 72. 
 
 Acquirement of Objective Mind 72, 73. 
 " Analyzed 85. 
 
 Base of Most Anger, Jealousy, Murder, Failure, Theft, 
 
 Discouragement, Despondency 85. 
 Basic Emotion 84, 85. 
 Causes Cancer 73, 74. 
 
 Failures 73, 74, 85, 140, 141. 
 " Fevers 244. 
 
 Heart Troubles 243, 244. 
 " Color of 140, 230. 
 " Control of 85 to 88, 92 to 99. 
 " Creates Diseases 73, 257. 
 " Declarations Against 87, 88. 
 
 Diseases and 257. 
 " Draws That Which Is Feared 85. 
 
 Elimination of 85 to 88, 92 to 99, 140, 141. 
 " Force Saved by Fight Directly on 85. 
 
 Healing Requires Removal of 256, 257. 
 " Humanity Shifts 85. 
 
 Ignorance and 94. 
 " Lives Wretched Though 87. 
 1 Objective Mind Cause of 72, 73, 93. 
 " Of persons 86. 
 " " Public Opinion 86, 87. 
 " " the Unknown 87. 
 " Suggestion of Punishment Causes 205. 
 
XVI INDEX. 
 
 Fevers Caused by Fear 244. 
 
 " Cure of 244. 
 
 Flammarion, Student of the Occult 15. 
 Force (see Currents, Cosmic). 
 
 " Consciousness Ensouls 103. 
 
 " Defined 39, 40, 41, 223, 224. 
 Desire of Deity Is 39. 
 
 " Divine Essence Manifesting as Motion Is 40, 41, 223, 
 224. 
 
 " Expression of Divine Mind 36, 39, 41. 
 
 " Manifests Under Five Aspects 224. 
 
 " Misuse of, Brings Destruction 24, 84, 166, 167. 
 
 " Persistency of 100. 
 
 " Product of Mind 40, 224. 
 
 " Thought Identical With 40. 
 
 " Uses Us if We Do Not Use It 281. 
 Form Cause of 39. 
 Defined 41. 
 
 " In Manifestation 124, 125. 
 
 " Mental Basis for 72. 
 
 " Mind Has 60, 62. 
 
 " Vibration and 125. 
 Free Will, Justice Limits, 114. 
 
 " " Man Has 112, 114, 118, 119. 
 Fright, System Deranged by 119. 
 Gambling Forbidden to Students 187. 
 Gases, Consciousness of 35. 
 Gates, Prof., Experiments of 244. 
 Genesis, a Chaldean Occult Record 71. 
 Glass, Cause of Diamond Cutting 243. 
 Goblins, Are Elcmentals 172. 
 God See Deity. 
 
 Godhood, Possibility of Reaching 67, 108. 
 Grant, His Self-Control 79. 
 
 Gravitation, Earth Held Together by Law of 240. 
 Greece Colors in Ancient 120. 
 
 Materialism in Ancient 27, 28. 
 Occultism in Ancient 27. 
 
INDEX. XV11 
 
 Green, Fourth Planet Always 233. 
 
 Indicates Individualization 137, 232, 233. 
 " Intellectualization Without Intuition Is 232, 233. 
 " Normal Color of Objective Mind 62, 133, 137, 233, 240, 
 
 241. 
 
 " Positive and Negative 139. 
 " Selfishness Indicated by 232. 
 Green Cosmic Force, Acquisitiveness Is Autumn Grass Shade 
 
 of 232. 
 
 " " Altruism Cured by 234, 235. 
 
 " " " Eye Troubles Cured by 234. 
 
 Growth Disrupted by 253, 254. 
 " Healing by 234, 253 to 255. 
 
 " " " Individualization is Pastel Green 233. 
 
 " " Nervousness Cured by 234. 
 
 Selfishness is Bottle Green Shade 232. 
 Used in Creating Wealth, Power, Po- 
 sition and Material Things 233, 234. 
 X-Ray, Shade of 254. 
 Habit Elements in Forming 94 to 97. 
 Law of Periodicity 94 to 97. 
 Self-Control and 94 to 97. 
 
 " Suggestions Aid in Overcoming 97, 98, 211. 
 Hades, Penetrates Physical World 174. 
 " Place for Departed Spirits 174. 
 Harmony, Blue Force Inspires 235. 
 
 Divine, Color of 237. 
 Hate, Coerced Love Turns to 215. 
 
 Souls Bound Together by 113, 114. 
 Healers, Magnetic Depletion of 45, 194 to 196. 
 
 Precautions for 195, 196. 
 Healing (see Disease, Cure of) 
 
 " Animal Magnetism, How Used in 194. 
 " Avoid Sight of Disease in 250, 251. 
 " Based on Same Law, All 223. 
 Blue Force Used in 247, 255. 
 Boils 253. 
 
XV111 INDEX. 
 
 Healing, Cancers, Tumors, etc. 252, 253. 
 " Concentration to Get Aura in 254. 
 " Cosmic Forces Used in 195, 223, 250. 
 " Depletion of Users of Animal Magnetism 194. 
 " Destroy Wrong Creations 251, 252. 
 
 Electricity Used in 246, 247. 
 " Emotions Must Be Controlled in 79. 
 Fear Should Be Removed in 256, 257. 
 " Green Force Used in 234, 253 to 255. 
 " Growths 253. 
 " Mental Troubles 252. 
 Mind Used in 247 to 258. 
 New Elements Should Be Introduced in 250. 
 " Orange Force Used for Children and Animals, 231. 
 " " " in Nerve Troubles 194. 
 
 " Tissue Building 194. 
 
 " Picture of Disease Should Be Destroyed in 250. 
 " Positiveness Necessary in 196, 252, 255. 
 " Realize, Forces in 256. 
 
 " Red Force Used to Restore Sex Function in 230. 
 " Rules for 250 to 258. 
 " Suggestion Used in 256, 257. 
 " Use Few Words in 257. 
 
 " Highest Shade in Growths 253. 
 " " Next Higher Shade or Color 255, 256. 
 " " One Hand Only 252, 253. 
 " Vegetable Compounds Used in 247 to 249. 
 " Vibrations Should Be Raised in 250. 
 Health Cosmic Currents and 223. 
 Defined 241. 
 
 Emotions Must Be Controlled for 79. 
 Habit in Picturing 96, 97. 
 How to Obtain 231, 237, 245 to 258. 
 Heart, Connects Deity With Individual 151. 
 " Troubles Caused by Fear 243 to 245. 
 Heaven, Man Determines His 112. 
 " Several 112. 
 
INDEX. XIX 
 
 Help, Should Be Given 118. 
 
 Holman, Referred to 37. 
 
 Holmes, Oliver Wendell, and Plagiarism 221. 
 
 Honor, Green Force Used to Create 233. 
 
 Hook, Robert 121. 
 Huxley 20. 
 
 " Definition of Matter by 37- 
 Huygens, Christian 121. 
 Hypnotism 58 to 60, 189 to 218. 
 
 Coercion While Under 198 to 200. 
 Crime Caused Through 198 to 200. 
 " Defined 197, 198. 
 
 Denials Produce 249. 
 Disease Not Cured by 212, 213. 
 Effect of Continuous 213 to 215. 
 Emphasizes Objective Mind 211. 
 First Known as Braidism 191. 
 Harm Done by 58. 
 " How Broken 202, 215. 
 
 " Produced 197, 198. 
 Little Good Done by 58. 
 Love Induced by 215. 
 Malignant Force 215. 
 Man Is Mind Proved by 59. 
 Mental Dominion a Phase of 200 to 204. 
 " Mind Controlled in 198 to 200. 
 
 " Is Not Product of Brain Proven by 56 to 60. 
 Never Justified 200. 
 " Obedience in 198, 199. 
 
 Operator Reaps 111 Effect of 214. 
 " Patrick Case Cited 199. 
 
 Persistenee of Mind Proved by 59. 
 Prevention of 215 to 218. 
 Suggestions and 197 to 204. 
 Will Destroyed by 198, 213. 
 " " Used in Breaking 215. 
 
 " " Producing 197, 198. 
 
XX INDEX. 
 
 Ignorance Cause of Disease 242. 
 
 " Evil Caused by 74, 94, J o8. 
 
 In Creations 74, 276. 
 " Is No Protection 50. 
 
 Of Laws Is No Excuse 74. 
 " Prevents Self-Control 93, 94. 
 
 Uncontrolled Emotions Caused by 93- 
 Vanity and 94. 
 Imagination Is Creation 157. 
 Immortality, Denned 150. 
 
 " How Acquired 150. 
 
 " Hypnotism Furnished Scientific Data to Prove 59 
 
 Imperishable Isles 21. 
 Incarnations. See Re-Embodiment. 
 
 " Law of Justice Causes Certain 116. 
 
 " Time Between 112, 113. 
 
 Independence, Animals Teach 260. 
 India, Colonists of 22, 26. 
 
 " Rich in Literature and Philosophy 22. 
 " Temples in 120. 
 Indigo Force Inspires Music 236. 
 Individualism Versus Altruism and Selfishness 45, 46. 
 Individualization. Deity Teaches 260, 261. 
 " Green Color of 232, 233. 
 
 Light Green Color of 137. 
 
 Permits More of God's Plants to Manifest, 
 
 1 06. 
 " Planet of, Is Fourth 233. 
 
 Positive Condition Necessary for 150. 
 Wise Parent Teaches 260. 
 Ingersoll, Colonel, Quoted 31. 
 Insanity, Emotional, Caused by Disembodied Entity 176. 
 
 Red Force Causes 229. 
 " Mediumship Leads to 181. 
 " Mental Treatment of 252, 253. 
 " Obsession Cause of Most 180. 
 Inspiration, Blue Force Causes 235 to 237. 
 
INDEX. XXI 
 
 Intellect, Negative Side of Subjective Mind 83. 
 Intellectualization, Color of 232. 
 Intelligence, Gradation of 20. 
 Intuition Color of 237. 
 
 Self-Control Necessary for 80. 
 Inventors Use Same Thought Currents 221. 
 Jealousy Caused by Fear 85. 
 Jehovah, Male Female Creative Principle 33. 
 j esus _Altruism Said to Have Been Taught by 45. 
 " Altruist Desire to Sacrifice Self Like 234, 235. 
 " Lord's Prayer Analysed 273, 274. 
 " Taught Estoterically and Exoterically 13, 14- 
 " Teacher of "Love Your Enemies" 142. 
 Judaism Jehovic, Cabalistic and Talmudic 14 
 
 Ritualism in 145, 146. 
 
 Justice, Law of, Brings Back What Is Sent Forth 115. 
 " " " Causes Certain Incarnations 116. 
 " " " Evolution Modified by 114. 
 " " Exists 114, 116, 117. 
 " " Free Will Limited by 114. 
 " " Materializations Governed by 161. 
 " " Misuse of Mental Force Punished by 166, 167. 
 " " Thoughts Put Into Action 114. 
 " Will Prevail 115 to 117. 
 Keynote of Occultism, Duality of Atom Is 41. 
 
 " Our World Is Fa 233. 
 
 Knowledge, Assimilated on Subjective Planes in. 
 Higher Taught by Occultism 188. 
 How Gained 18. 
 Received from Demands 154. 
 
 Through Meditation 150 to 157. 
 Land of the Gods 21. 
 
 Latent Ability to Know Everything in Man 237. 
 Law, Divine Works Automatically and Impartially 214. 
 Governs Everything 117, 118, 259, 261, 271. 
 Ignorance of, No Excuse 74. 
 
 Of Demand and Supply (see Demand and Supply, Law 
 of). 
 
XX11 INDEX. 
 
 Law Of Equilibrium (see Justice, Law of). 
 " " Justice (see Justice, Law of). 
 " " Opulence (see Opulence, Law of). 
 " " Periodicity (see Periodicity, Law of). 
 " " Re- Embodiment (see Re-Embodiment, Law of). 
 " Practice, How to Build 159. 
 Laws, Govern Every Detail 117, 118, 259, 261, 271. 
 " Method of Manifestation of Deity 103, 104. 
 " Natural, Are Plan of Deity 103. 
 " of Each Cosmic Day 103, 104. 
 " " Universe 104. 
 " Same for Each Side of Life 103, 108. 
 Lemuria, Man Existed on in Third Age 21, 22. 
 
 " Sinking of 22. 
 Lemurians Fate of 22. 
 
 -Reincarnation of 23. 
 
 Life Force (see Orange Force; Magnetism, Animal). 
 " " Body Preserved by 135. 
 
 " Builds Life 127, 134. 
 " " Orange Colored 134, 135, 231. 
 " " Planetary Spirits Radiate 102. 
 " " Solar Deities Radiate 102. 
 " " Vegetation Animated by 106, 107. 
 Formed by Molecules 239. 
 Human, Prolonged Many Years 119, 242. 
 Light Blue Force Inspires Literature 237. 
 
 " Colored Glass Modifies Ray of 52. 
 Lights, Zodiacal, are Cosmic Currents 225. 
 Literary Thought, Color of 235, 237. 
 Liver, Cause of Torpid 242. 
 
 " Vibration of, Is Brown 241. 
 Loeb, Prof., Conditions for Life by 242. 
 Logos, Subjective Mind Is the 68. 
 Lord's Prayer Analyzed 273, 274. 
 
 Loudres, Priests of the Waters, healing by, Based On Law- 
 223. 
 

 INDEX. XX111 
 
 Love. A Constructive Force 142, 157. 
 " Coerced Turns to Hate 215. 
 '' Color of, Yellow 142, 157, 237. 
 " Deflects Lower Vibrations 143. 
 " Divine 157, 158, 237. 
 " God Is 114. 
 
 " Greatest Force on This Planet 142. 
 " Human Creation of 158. 
 " Hypnotism Produced, Turns to Hate 215. 
 " Justice and, Are the Same 114. 
 " Right to Ask for Honest 215. 
 ' Souls Bound Together by 113, 114. 
 " Spiritual and Creative, Yellow 237. 
 " Your Enemies, Good Reason for 142. 
 Magi Power of 26 
 Magic, Ceremonial, Defined 27. 
 " Laws Used in 15. 
 " Practice of 15, 174- 
 " Red Force Used for Destruction in 230. 
 
 " " Help in 230, 231. 
 
 " White and Black, Distinction Between 204, 230, 231. 
 Magnetic Connections, Concentration Produces 154, 161, 
 
 281. 
 
 " " Thought Makes 154, 160, 161, 281. 
 
 Magnetism, Animal, (see Orange Force; Life Force). 
 *' Best Condition for 193. 
 
 Curative Power of 194, 195. 
 
 Depletion of 194, 195, 196. 
 
 Malicious, Christian Science Believes is 
 
 Personal Devil 76. 
 Occult Force 29. 
 Used in Mesmerism 192. 
 Utilized by Blending Auras 194. 
 Man, A Centre of Consciousness 87, 112. 
 Adepts Aid Development of 27, 64. 
 Assisted by Universal Consciousness 68, 260, 261. 
 Cannot Imagine the Non-Existent 272. 
 
XXIV INDEX. 
 
 Man, Color of Early, a Dirty Brown 240. 
 " Denizens of Next Plane Use 176, 177. 
 " Destiny of 68. 
 
 " Destructive Things Created by Man 173. 
 " Determines His Own Birth 118. 
 " Early Conceptions of 53 to 58. 
 " Elementals Created by Thoughts of 172. 
 " God Easily Reached by 151. 
 " Habitation of, Between Embodiments 109 to 112. 
 " Not Bound by Time or Space 17. 
 " Psychic, Denned 81. 
 " Realizes He Is Mind 17, 58, 59. 
 
 " Sensual, Becomes Earthbound After Excarnation in. 
 " The Magnetic Field Around 126, 127. 
 " The Real, Defined 72, 81. 
 Mass, Sung in Certain Key 175. 
 Masters, Atlantis Helped by 23. 
 
 " Custodians of Occultism 20. 
 
 " Defined 19. 
 
 " Divine Stage Reached by 19. 
 
 Grades of 19. 
 
 " Teachers of Occultism 19, 23, 186. 
 Mata, the Magician, Quoted 65, 66. 
 Materia Medica, Difference in Vibrations Not Considered in 
 
 248. 
 
 Materialism, Artistic Form of, in Greece 27. 
 Called Discovered Science 13. 
 Laws Unknown to 15. 
 Reached Lowest Point in I9th Century 29. 
 Stamped Belief in Subjective Superstition 13. 
 Materialization (see Demand). 
 
 Concentration Hastens 162. 
 Delayed by Hurry 279. 
 Matrix, Material Thing Drawn to 281. 
 
 " Mental Creation Becomes 160, 161, 281. 
 
INDEX. XXV 
 
 Matter, Consciousness Ensouls 103. 
 " Indistructibility of 100. 
 44 Is Persistent 100. 
 " Particled 37 to 39. 
 " Subject to Mind 17, 41. 
 44 Unparticled 37 to 39. 
 
 Matthews, Dr., Necessary Conditions for Life 242. 
 Maxwell, J. Clerk, Referred to 37. 
 Medicine, an Experimental Science 248. 
 Meditation, Analyzed 149, 150. 
 
 Answers During 156. 
 
 Before Creation 167. 
 
 Defined 149. 
 
 Demand in, Direct to Deity 150, 151. 
 
 In Creation of Opulence 272. 
 
 Knowledge Received Through 150 to 157. 
 
 Method of, Proper 153, 156, 157. 
 
 " Wrong 149, 150, 152, 155. 
 Necessary for Quick Demonstrations 149. 
 Negative Warnings Against 149, 150. 
 Opulence and 272. 
 Philosophical 149 to 157. 
 Rules for 149 to 157. 
 Time for 154. 
 
 Mediums, Controls of, Are of Low Order 181. 
 Force of, Wasted 181. 
 Frauds Among 181. 
 Insanity Is Result Among 181. 
 Instrument for Excarnated Souls 179, 180. 
 Low Order of 181. 
 
 Magnetism of, Absorbed by Controls 180. 
 Moral Character Degenerate in 181. 
 Obsession, Result of 180. 
 Passive, Unreliable 179, 183. 
 Positive Character, Cannot Be 181, 182. 
 Vampirized by Controls 181. 
 
XXVi INDEX. 
 
 Mental, Blue Force Is 158. 
 
 " Connections Between Persons 113, 114, 154- 
 " Creation (see Creation, Mental). 
 " Depletion, Treatment of 252. 
 " Dominion, Coercion by 202, 203. 
 " " Defined 200 to 204, 212. 
 
 " Disease Not Cured by 212, 213. 
 " " Examples of 202, 203. 
 
 < " Extensive Use of 201 to 203. 
 
 " Used Without Knowledge of Victim 200. 
 
 " Force Transmuted from Sex Desire 89. 
 
 Form Precedes Physical 72. 
 " Increase of, Force, How Gained 158. 
 " Inspiration Caused by Blue Force 235, 236. 
 " Pictures Become Physical Things 50, 172. 
 " Qualities, Blue is Color of Higher 235. 
 " Scientists, Cosmic Forces Used by 222, 223. 
 
 " Denials Used by 252. 
 
 " " Depletion of, How Restored 195, 196. 
 
 " " Healing by, Based on Law 223. 
 
 ' " Mistakes of 40. 
 
 Workers (see Workers, Mental). 
 Mesmer 'Cures by 189, 190. 
 
 " History of 189 to 192, 195 to 197- 
 " Student of Occultism 189. 
 Mesmerism, Animal Magnetism Known as 192. 
 " Cosmic Force 192, 193. 
 " Nature of 190 to 193. 
 Metaphysicians, Differ in Process of Cures 249. 
 
 Effect oif Drugs Denied by Some 247, 248. 
 Mice, Small Centres of Consciousness 87. 
 Mind 52 to 77. 
 
 " Acids in Blood Caused by 244. 
 " Animal, Becomes Objective Minds 70. 
 " " Growth of 70. 
 
 " Body Controlled by Positive 243. 
 " Body's Influence on 277. 
 
INDEX. XXV11 
 
 Mind.Brain Does Not Produce 58, 59. 
 " Color of 60, 61, 62. 
 
 " Divine (see Deity; Consciousness, Divine). 
 " Division of 59, 60. 
 ' Drawing Power of 85. 
 1 During Hypnosis 198. 
 " Excarnated 176, 177. 
 
 Force Is Produce of 40, 224. 
 Form of 60, 62. 
 
 ; Higher Form of Consciousness 35. 
 " Impotent Through Non-Use 246. 
 " In Cure of Diseases 249 to 258. 
 " Invisible Part of 36. 
 " Man Realizes He Is 17, 58, 59. 
 " " Must Now Use His-68. 
 " Manifested 36. 
 
 Answers Uncolored by 157. 
 Matter Subject to 17, 41. 
 " Objective, Argument With, Useless 98. 
 Body Held Together by 240. 
 Colds Created by 97. 
 Controls of 75 76, 81 to 84, 170. 
 Dark Side of Life Appeals to 206. 
 Demands and 152, 157. 
 Detached 170, 171, 176, 177. 
 
 Sensitives Controlled by 176. 
 Victim of 176. 
 
 Devil, Personal, of Christian Science 76. 
 Disease and 93. 
 Disintegrate, When Abandoned by Subjective 
 
 179- 
 Emotions Are Mental Conditions of Si, 84, 
 
 92. 
 
 Evil Is Creation of 75, 76. 
 Evolution of 68, 69, 70. 
 Fear an Acquirement of 72, 73, 93. 
 First Consciousness Reached Is 60. 
 
XXV111 INDEX. 
 
 Mind, Objective. Ignorance of 76. 
 " " Mastery of, How Obtained 98, 99- 
 
 " Meditation Influenced by 156, 157. 
 " Nature of 71, 72, 83. 
 
 Negative Side of, Is Reason 83. 
 " " Origin of 68 to 70. 
 
 " " Positive Side of, Is Desire 3, 148. 
 
 " Re-incarnation of 170, 171. 
 " " Self-Control and 92, 93. 
 
 " Separation from Subjective Mind 170, 171. 
 " " Shapes Physical Body 240. 
 
 " " Sin a Creation of 75, 76. 
 
 " " Subjective Mind Controlling 81 to 84, 98. 
 
 in, 170. 
 " " Suggestions by and to 97 to 99, 206, 210, 211, 
 
 272. 
 
 Union With Subjective Mind 70 to 73, 170. 
 " Particled 37 to 39. 
 " Persistence of 59. 
 " Poisons in Blood Caused by 244. 
 " Power of, Unlimited 204. 
 " Reached by Repeated Thought 204. 
 " Subjective, Awakening of 83, 84. 
 
 " Blue Force Can Be Used Only by 235. 
 
 " " Classes of 67. 
 
 Color of 62, 133, 137, 233, 240, 241. 
 " " Creation of 64 to 66. 
 
 Emotions Conquered by 92. 
 Evolution of 67. 
 Functions of 68, 82, 83. 
 " Incarnation of 67, 72. 
 
 Intuitive Part of Man 68. 
 
 " " Negative Side of, Is Intellectual 83. 
 
 " " Objective Mind Controlled by 81 to 84, in, 
 
 170. 
 
 Origin of 64 to 66. 
 Positive Side of, Is Will 83, 84, 148. 
 
INDEX. XXIX 
 
 Mind, Subjective, Remembers Past 109. 
 
 Second Consciousness That Is Appealed to 
 
 -60. 
 " " Self-Control and 92, 93. 
 
 Separation from Objective Mind 170, 171, 
 
 179- 
 
 Strong Enough to Do Anything 83. 
 " Suggestions by 97, 98, 210, 211. 
 
 " " Union with Objective Mind 70 to 73, 170. 
 
 " Supreme Over Disease 249. 
 " Synonymous with Consciousness 34. 
 " Thought Is Product of 40. 
 " Universal See Deity. 
 
 Unlimited Power of 204. 
 " Unmanifested 36. 
 " Visible Part of 36. 
 
 Minerals, as Drugs Should Not Be Used 247, 248. 
 Cohesion Power of, Is Consciousness 34. 
 Consciousness in 34, 35, 69, 106. 
 Individualization of 69. 
 
 Kingdom Supports Vegetable Kingdom 248. 
 Low Rate of Vibration of 247. 
 Re-Embodiment in 106. 
 
 Misuse of Force, Brings Destruction 24, 166, 167. 
 Molecules from Complex Individual Life 239. 
 Money (see Opulence). 
 
 Creation of 159 to 161, 163, 165, 222. 
 How to Materialize 234, 259 to 284. 
 Motion 39, 40. 
 Mount Muru 21. 
 Music, Blue Force Inspires 235, 236. 
 
 Color of 235 to 237. 
 Napoleon, His Self Control 79. 
 Nature, Unaided Fails 63, 64. 
 
 Worshipped as Deity 32. 
 Necromancy, Spiritualism Is, Revamped 178. 
 
XXX INDEX. 
 
 Negativeness, Cause of Colds 243. 
 
 " Death Produced by 150. 
 
 Defined 148. 
 
 Diseases Produced by 150, 243. 
 " Evolution Hindered by 150. 
 
 " Failure Due to 46. 
 
 " Harm Caused by 149, 150. 
 
 " Hypnotism Permitted by 216. 
 
 " Immortality Prevented by 150. 
 
 ' Meditation Hindered by 150. 
 
 " Obsession Results from 149. 
 
 Neo-Platonists, Cosmic Force Caused by 223. 
 Nerves, Treatment for Diseases of 194. 
 Nervousness, Green Force Used for 234. 
 " How to Cure 234. 
 
 " Orange Force Used in 194. 
 
 New Thought Scientist, Healing by, Based on Law 223. 
 Newton, Theory of Light 121. 
 Nice, Council of, Immortality Accounted for by 55. 
 Night, Cosmic, Condition in 101. 
 
 " Lasts Eons of Years 101. 
 " Of Brahma, Description of 101, 102. 
 Nimbus, Defined 128. 
 Nineteenth Century Materialistic 17. 
 Obsession, Epilepsy Caused by 180. 
 Insanity Caused by 180. 
 Negativeness Induces 149. 
 
 Occultism, Atlanteans Were Openly Taught 23, 24. 
 Causes Taught by 16, 17. 
 Cremation Advocated by 175. 
 Criminal Use of 24. 
 Definition of 12, 13. 
 Deity Is All Taught by 15. 
 Everyone Has vvfhat He Deserves Taught by 259, 
 
 260. 
 
 Evolution Taught by 15. 
 " History of IT to 31. 
 
INDEX. XXXI 
 
 Occultism In Catholic Church 28. 
 " Christian Church 28. 
 "In Middle Ages 12. 
 " Keynote to 41. 
 
 Knowledge of, How Gained 18, 28, 29. 
 Law of Being Taught by 188. 
 Laws of Divine Unfoldment Taught by 16. 
 Meanings of 12, 13, 15. 
 ' Misuse of, Brings Quick Destruction 24. 
 
 Original Research One Way of Studying 18. 
 Perfect Sciences 20. 
 
 " Priesthood Contained Knowledge of 28. 
 " Results Gotten Quicker Through 234. 
 " Science of Cause and Effect 17. 
 " " " Divine Unfoldment 15, 16. 
 
 " Secret Societies Depositories of 28, 29. 
 Self-control Necessary in 80. 
 Survivors Will All Be Students of 50. 
 " Taught in Greece 27. 
 
 Teachers of 18, 19, 23, 186. 
 Teaches No Sacrifice of Self 44, 45. 
 Verification of n, 12, 21. 
 World Now Ready For 29. 
 Opulence, Creation of 259 to 284. 
 
 " " " Anger Repels in ^280, 281. 
 
 " Centers Used in 264 to 266, 268. 
 
 " Concentration Required in 234. 
 
 " Creation Required in-^232, 233. 
 
 " Declare "God Has Met My Demand" 
 
 in 282, 283. 
 
 " Deliberativeness in 279. 
 " Demand in 272 to 275. 
 
 " Until It Comes 272. 
 ' Demands Should Be Specific 275, 276. 
 " Demonstrations Prove 267, 268. 
 " " " Desire Strongly in 277. 
 
XXXll INDEX. 
 
 Opulence, Creation of. Discontent Repels 280, 281. 
 ' " " Earnestness Required in 281. 
 
 " " " Envy Repels 280, 281. 
 
 " " ." Everything Belongs to Divine Mind 
 
 271. 
 " Everything Distributed by Law 271, 
 
 272. 
 " " " Everything Exists in Divine Mind 
 
 270, 271. 
 " " " Excitement Affects 277 to 279. 
 
 " Faith in 266, 267. 
 " " " Frequency of Demand Required in 
 
 281. 
 
 " " " Green Force Used in 233, 234. 
 
 " " " Illustrations of 265 to 270. 
 
 " Law of 233, 234, 259 to 284. 
 * " " Loss of Self-Control Repels 280, 281. 
 
 " Master of 266, 267. 
 " " " Meditation Before 272. 
 
 " " " Positiveness Necessary in 272, 273, 
 
 275- 
 
 " " " Quietness in 277. 
 
 " " " Realize You Are Using Immutable 
 
 Law in 282. 
 " " " Specific Demands required in 275, 
 
 276. 
 
 " Speculation Scatters Force in 280. 
 " Mental Workers Draw 264, 268, 269. 
 " Physical Mental Workers Draw 263, 268, 269. 
 *' Physical Workers Never Gain 264. 
 Orange Force (see Life Force). "Magnetism, Animal." 
 " Animal Magnetism Is 192, 193. 
 
 Animals Treated With 231. 
 " Children Treated With 231. 
 " Cosmic Force 224. 
 " " Depletion Caused by Using 194. 
 
 " " Nerve Troubles Helped by 194. 
 
INDEX. xxxiii 
 
 Orange Force, Plants Stimulated by 231. 
 " " Tissue Builder 194. 
 " " Universal Life Principle 134, 135, 193, 231. 
 
 " Utilised by Blending Auras 194. 
 Order, Blue Force Inspires 235. 
 
 " of Universal Harmony 190. 
 Organization, Blue Force Inspires 235. 
 Organs, have Individual Vibrations 241. 
 Osteopathy, as a Cure for Disease 246. 
 
 Depletion in Practice of 195, 196. 
 Pain, Escape, from 80, 82. 
 
 " Evidence That Objective Mind Has Not Been Con- 
 quered 82. 
 
 Palmistry, Revival of 17. 
 Particled Matter 37 to 39. 
 Patrick, Hypnotic Influence of 199. 
 Paul, Mysticism of 14. 
 Peace, Self-Control Necessary for 80. 
 Periodicity, Law of, Concentration Aided by 163, 164. 
 " " Defined-94, 95- 
 " " Habits Broken by Use of 96. 
 
 " Formed " " " 94 to 96. 
 " " Universe Governed by 103, 104. 
 Periods of Evolution 21. 
 " Fifth 25 to 29. 
 
 First and Second 21. 
 " Fourth 23 to 25. 
 " Third 21, 22. 
 
 Phenomena, Vibration Causes of Physical 42. 
 Photosphere, Is Book of Life 182. 
 Physical Form, Preceded by Mental Creation 72. 
 " Life, Orange Force Causes 134, 135. 
 * Phenomena, Vibration Cause, of 42. 
 Resurrection of, Taught 55. 
 Universe Defined 40. 
 Vanity Must Be Conquered 90. 
 " Workers (see Workers, Physical). 
 
 I 
 
XXXIV INDEX. 
 
 Physicists Mistaken in Believing Matter Is All 40. 
 
 " " " Not Recognizing Conscious Side of 
 
 Atom 41. 
 
 Physico Mental Workers (see Workers, Physico Mental). 
 Pictures, Mental, Finally Materialize 50, 96, 97. 
 
 First Mental Things 50. 
 " Materialization of 96, 97. 
 " " Matrix Formed by 160. 
 
 Photographs Made of 160 to 162. 
 Pineal Gland, Center to Function on Subjective 184. 
 Plane (see Subjective Planes). 
 Planet, Ages of (see Ages of Earth). 
 First 67. 
 
 For Subjective Minds 67. 
 Fourth 67, 68, 82. 
 
 " Always Green 233. 
 " Incarnation Upon Another in. 
 Planetary Chain, Consists of Seven Planets 233. 
 Evolution Takes Place on 67. 
 Spirits, Great Beings 66. 
 " " Life Force Radiated by 102. 
 
 " " Planets Created by 104, 105, 160. 
 
 Subjective Minds Created by 65, 66. 
 Poise, Students Required to Gain 178. 
 Poison. Disease Only Changed by 247. 
 " Low Rate of Vibration 247. 
 " Mind Causes Creation of 244. 
 Position, Green Force Used to Create 233. 
 Positiveness, Defined 148. 
 
 Demands Should Have 273, 274, 279. 
 Evolution Requires 46, 150, 180. 
 Health Restored by 180, 196. 
 Hypnotism Prevented by 215, 216. 
 Immortality Depends Upon 150. 
 " Mediumship Prevented by 181, 182. 
 
INDEX. XXXV 
 
 Positiveness, Necessity of, for Opulence 272, 273, 275. 
 
 " " Progress 46, 150, 180, 196. 
 " " " in Prayer 275. 
 
 Required in Healing 196, 252, 255. 
 Vampirization Prevented by 130. 
 Power, Misuse of Brings Destruction 24, 166, 167. 
 5 rayer, Different Forms of 145 to 147, 151, 273 to 275. 
 ' Lord's, Analyzed 273, 274. 
 " Negative as a Rule 275. 
 
 " Positiveness Required in, to Be Efficacious 275. 
 " Rational 147. 
 " Should be Directed to Universal Consciousness 
 
 150 to 152. 
 Precipitation, Denned 162. 
 
 Highest Form of Creation 162. 
 Preservation of Self, First Duty to God 44. 
 Priests, Occult Knowledge Possessed by 28, 175. 
 
 " Students of Adepts 27. 
 Probation of Seven Years for Students 186. 
 Procreation, Red Color of 233. 
 Protestantism, Prayer in 145 to 147. 
 Psychism i Animal Minds Contacted, in 174. 
 " Avoid Study of 168. 
 
 Dwellers on Threshold Met in, 169 to 175. 
 Elementals in 171, 172. 
 Used in 174. 
 
 Humanity Approaching 168, 170. 
 Ignorant Influenced by 178. 
 Imposition of Spirit Controls in 180, 181. 
 Nothing Offered Students Now by 188. 
 Objective Minds Contacted in 170, 171. 
 Sensitives Study 177, 178. 
 
 Used in 177, 178. 
 Students Protected by Cosmic Force in Studying 
 
 178. 
 
 Students Required to Develop Before Studying 
 178. 
 
XXXVI INDEX. 
 
 Psychism, Subdivision of Occultism 168. 
 
 Threshold in, Souls Must Pass Over 175. 
 Psychometry, Denned 128. 
 Public Opinion, Fear of 86, 87. 
 Purgatory, Location of 174, 175. 
 
 '" Souls Freed from, by Masses 175. 
 
 Quimby, Dr., Mrs. Eddy Studied Under 266. 
 Reason, Actions Should Be Governed by 78. 
 " Emotions Overcome, in Beginning 133. 
 " Negative Side of Objective Mind 83. 
 Red, Cclor of Anger 142, 143, 230. 
 " " " Animal Propensities 135, 136. 
 <: " " Emotional Nature 135, 136. 
 " <v " Fear 140, 230. 
 " <c " Procreation 233. 
 " Cosmic Force, Black Magicians Use, for Destruction 
 
 230. 
 
 " Body Disrupted by 230. 
 " Crimson Indicates Sex Desire 230. 
 " Darker Shade Indicates Fear 230. 
 " Emotional Insanity Caused by 229. 
 " " Emotions Result from 135, 136, 288. 
 
 " " " Lowest Force in Man 135. 
 
 " " " Natural Force in Animals 228. 
 
 " " Scarlet Indicates Anger 230. 
 
 " " Sex Functions Restored by 230. 
 
 '* " White Magicians Use, for Punish- 
 
 ment 230, 231. 
 
 Wine Color Indicates Sense Gratifica- 
 tion 230. 
 Re-embodiment, A. Cosmic Law 104. 
 
 Condition of Man Between Incarnations 105 
 
 to 112. 
 
 Consciousness Subject to 108. 
 " Deity Re-embodies Itself 103. 
 
INDEX. XXXV11 
 
 Re-embodiment, Fact in Nature 105, 106. 
 
 In Animal Kingdom 107 to 109. 
 " Mineral " 106. 
 " Vegetable " 106, 107. 
 Law of 101 to 119. 
 Man Determines Time and Condition of 
 
 112, 117. 
 
 Manifests Everywhere 105.. 
 Not Disproven by Inability to Remember 
 
 109. 
 
 Of Objective Mind 170, 171. 
 " Subjective Mind 67, 72. 
 Time Required for 112 to 114. 
 Upon Other Planets in. 
 
 Reform, Carried on Through Individuals 63. 
 Re-incarnation (see Re-embodiment; Incarnation). 
 Religions, Esoteric for Students 13, 14. 
 
 Exoteric for the Masses 13, 14. 
 Remembrance of Past Lives, Condition Necessary for 
 
 109. 
 
 Reptiles Produced by Poisonous Thoughts 173. 
 Rest, Subjectve Planes Place of in, 112. 
 Resurrection, Physical, Taught 55. 
 Ritualism, Defined 145. 
 
 In Brahminism 145. 
 " Buddhism 14^. 
 ' Christianity 145, 146. 
 " Judaism 145. 
 Roscicrucians, Cosmic Force Used by 223. 
 
 Occult Body 28. 
 
 Sacrifice, Occultism Teaches No, of Self 44-45. 
 Saint Germain, an Occultist 190. 
 Salvation Not by Faith Alone 67. 
 Saviours of Men, Recognition of 92. 
 Science, Chemistry Once an Occult 12. 
 " Esoteric for Students 13. 
 " Exoteric for the Masses 14. 
 
XXXV111 INDEX. 
 
 Science, Treats of Effects. 
 
 Unknown Now Being Investigated by 15. 
 Scriptures, Actions Controlled by 78. 
 Secret Societies, Occult Knowledge in 28. 
 Seers Function on Subjective Planes 61. 
 Self, Occultism Teaches No Sacrifice of 44, 45. 
 
 Preservation, First Duty to God 44. 
 Self-control, Aids in 92 to 99. 
 
 1 Clairaudience requires 80. 
 
 Clairvoyance " 80. 
 
 Concentration " 80. 
 Creation " 80. 
 
 " Emotions and 79 to 83, 92, 93. 
 '' " Greatness Cannot Be Obtained Without 
 
 78, 79. 
 
 Habit Utilized in 94 to 97. 
 Health Requires 79. 
 Ignorance Prevents 93, 94. 
 Intuition Cannot Be Awakened Without 
 
 80. 
 
 Means Control of Objective Mind by Sub- 
 jective 81. 
 
 Occultism Requires 80. 
 " " Pain May Be Eliminated by 80. 
 
 Peace Cannot Be Attained Without 80. 
 Practice of, Is Hard 78. 
 Rules for 92 to 99. 
 Students Must Have 80. 
 
 " " Subjective Mind Used in 92, 93- 
 
 " " Success Unattained Without 79. 
 
 " " Suggestion Used in 97, 98. 
 
 " Will Necessary in 92, 93. 
 
 Selfishness, Green Is Color of 232, 233. 
 
 " Versus Altruism and Individualism 45, 46. 
 
 Sensation, Manifestation of Objective Mind 81. 
 " Reason Displaced by, at First 133. 
 
 " Vibration Causes 42. 
 
INDEX. XXXIX 
 
 Sense, Gratification, Red is Color of 230. 
 Sensitives, Demizens of Next Plane Use 177. 
 Influences on 176 to 178. 
 Moods Produced in 176. 
 Psychism Investigated by 178. 
 Psychometrizing Done by 128. 
 Will of Weak 177. 
 Sensuousness, Analysed 88. 
 
 Asceticism Is Moral Reaction from 88, 89. 
 
 Basic Emotion 85, 88. 
 
 Earthbound on Subjective Plane Caused by 
 
 in. 
 
 Elimination of 88, 89 (see Emotion, Con- 
 quering of). 
 
 Over Indulgence in, Is Perversion 88, 89. 
 Regulation of, Occultism Teaches 89. 
 " Wisest Course-88, 89. 
 Sex Desire, Anaylsed 89. 
 
 Basic Emotions 85, 89. 
 
 Bodies, LJnmarred by Passion, Created 
 
 Through 89. 
 
 Chemical Affinity in Minerals Is 89. 
 Control of, Should Be Gained 89. 
 Crimson Color of 230. 
 
 Elimination of 89, 90 (see Emotions, Con- 
 quering of). 
 
 Force of Life and Love 89. 
 Mental Force Made from 89. 
 Regulations of, Wisest Course 89, 90. 
 Function Restored by Red Force 230. 
 Silence, Going Into, Process of Meditation 147, 152. 
 Silver Cord Binds Soul to Body 175. 
 Sin, a Creation of Objective Mind 75, 76. 
 " Original 75, 76. 
 " Result of Ignorance 108, 243. 
 Smoking, Overcome by Suggestion 97, 98. 
 
Xl INDEX. 
 
 Society for Psychical Research, Evidence Collected by 60. 
 
 Mind Has Form Agreed 
 
 by 60. 
 Psychism Studied by 57, 
 
 178. 
 Spiritualistic Phenomena 
 
 Verified by 182. 
 
 Solar Deities (see Deities, Solar). 
 Soul (see Mind). 
 " Bound to Body 175. 
 " Color of, Determined by Character 133. 
 " Courageous, Make Mistakes 18. 
 " Early Conceptions of 53 to 58. 
 " Evolution of 28, 108. 
 " Godhood Possibility of 108. 
 " Hate Binds, Together 113, 114. 
 " Latent Ability to Know Everything Possessed by 
 
 108, 237. 
 
 " Love Binds, Together 114. 
 " of Animals 69, 174. 
 " " Bulb 107. 
 
 Sound, Vibrations Cause of 41, 42. 
 Speculation, Avoid in Demands 280, 281. 
 Spencer, Herbert, Discussion of Force and Matter 100, 105. 
 Spinal Troubles, Treatment of 252. 
 Spirit Controls, Crime Traceable to 177. 
 
 Friends Impersonated by 179. 
 " '*' Low Order 181. 
 
 Spirits, Planetary (see Planetary Spirits). 
 Spiritualism, Aspects of 178, 179, 182, 183. 
 
 " Eternal Progression Taught in 57. 
 
 " Evidence Collected by 60. 
 
 Necromancy Revamped Is 178. 
 Passivity Required in 179. 
 " Practice of 178, 179, 182. 
 
 " Vampirization in 179 to 181. 
 
INDEX. 
 
 xli 
 
 Spirituality, Tendency Towards Now 29. 
 
 Yellow Color of 138, 237. 
 Students, Clairvoyance Taught 184. 
 
 Coercion Never Used on 186. 
 Experience of Seventy-two 187. 
 Faults of 187. 
 Great Ones Help All 186. 
 Mental Development Required of 178. 
 People Finally Become 18. 
 Poise Required of 178. 
 
 Prepared to Look Down on Psychic Plane 175. 
 Protected by Cosmic Forces 178. 
 Self Control Must Be Gained by 80. 
 Seven Years' Probation of 186. 
 Teachers Demanded by Most 185. 
 " " Made from 19, 186. 
 
 Unattached, Without a Master 185. 
 Study, Amount of, different in Each Life 18. 
 Subjective Planes, Ancients Experimented Upon 12, 13. 
 " Clairvoyants Function on 61. 
 " Denizens of 176, 177. 
 " Elementals formed on 171 to 176. 
 
 Entities on 149, 171, 175 to 177, 185. 
 " First Defined 174. 
 
 Forces Strong Upon 18. 
 " Knowledge Assimilated on in. 
 
 Life Manifests as Orange Force Upon 
 
 134- 
 
 " Man Contacts as He Develops 175. 
 " Man Rests on Between Incarnation 
 
 no to 112. 
 
 Number of 109 to in, 174, 175. 
 " Seers Function on 61. 
 " Zones on 1 10, in, 174, 175. 
 Substance, Atom Has, Side 41. 
 
 Divine Essence Manifesting as Matter 40. 
 
xlii INDEX. 
 
 Success Attributed to Outside Causes 222, 223. 
 Dependent Upon Self-Control 79. 
 Laws Governing 222, 223. 
 Suggestion, Acceptions of, Dependent Upon Recipient 204, 
 
 205, 208, 216. 
 
 Aid in Life Received from 207. 
 Atlanteans Destroyed Through Misuse of 204. 
 Audible Denned 205. 
 
 " Examples of 205, 206. 
 " Auto, Denned 206, 211. 
 
 " Should Be Made by Subjective to Objec- 
 " tive 211. 
 
 Beneficial, Examples of 98. 
 " Coercion by, Not Right 207 to 209. 
 
 Constructive, Examples of 205 to 207. 
 " " Should Be Used 205 to 207. 
 
 Destruction Follows Misuse of 204. 
 " Destructive Examples of 205, 206. 
 
 " Double, to Objective and Subjective 210, 211. 
 
 " Drinking Overcome by 97, 98, 208, 209. 
 
 Emotions Conquered by 97, 98. 
 Evil Use of 208. 
 " Examine All, Carefully 216, 217. 
 
 Grows With Use 208. 
 " Healing by 256, 257. 
 
 " Hetro, Defined 206. 
 
 " Examples of 207, 208. 
 " Hypnotism Produced by 197 to 200. 
 
 " Kinds of 205, 206. 
 
 Mental Dominion by 200 to 204. 
 " Moral Stimulus 208. 
 
 " Objective Mind Overcome by 97, 98, 210, 211. 
 
 " " " Readily Accepts Destructive 
 
 206. 
 
 " Obstructions Removed by 207, 208. 
 
 " Parents Misuse, on Children 205. 
 
INDEX. xliii 
 
 Suggestion, Power of, Unlimited 204. 
 Rejection of 205, 208. 
 Right, May Be Made 207. 
 
 to Use 207. 
 
 " Use of 204, 207 to 211. 
 Rules for Proper Use 209 to 211. 
 Silent, Denned 205 to 208. 
 
 " Stronger Than Audible 206. 
 Smoking Overcome by 97, 98. 
 Subjective Mind Using 97, 98, 210, 211. 
 Teachers Constantly Make, to Children 205. 
 Wrong, Example of 205. 
 Sun, Centre of Life 63. 
 " Fears Dispelled by 49. 
 " Orbit of 104. 
 " Treatment from 49. 
 
 Vibration Strongest from 49. 
 Surplus, Only Should Be Given Away 235. 
 Sympathy Should be Controlled in Healing 196. 
 Teachers, Classes of 19, 186. 
 
 Demanded by Most 185. 
 Never Try to Control Anyone 185, 186. 
 of Occult Law 18, 20. 185. 
 Subjective Entities Pose as 185. 
 World 142. 
 
 Theft Caused by Fear 85. 
 Telepathy, Based on Law 17, 204. 
 
 Defined 130, 131. 
 
 Thought, Aura Determined by Intensity of 132. 
 Badness Not a Quality of 147, 148. 
 Careless, Brings No Result 153. 
 Cause of Vibration 62, n.i, 130, 131, 148. 
 Character Made by 113, 119. 
 Color of, Determined by Quality 132, 133. 
 Concreteness Necessary in 153. 
 Consciously Directed, Brings Results 48. 
 
INDEX. 
 
 Thought, Creations Constantly Result from 113, 157. 
 
 Creative Always in Pictures 153, 160. 
 
 Currents of 220 to 223. 
 
 Defined 147, 148. 
 
 Destiny of Man Affected by Every 119. 
 
 Divine Consciousness Impressed by 50, 273, 274. 
 
 Elementals Created by 172. 
 
 Environment Determined by 113, 116 to 119. 
 
 Examine All, Carefully 217. 
 
 Family Determined by 117. 
 
 Force Is, or Result of 40, 41, 128, 223, 224. 
 
 Goodness Not a Quality of 147, 148. 
 
 Kind of Depends Upon Its Use 147, 148. 
 
 Law of Equilibrium Put in Action by 114. 
 
 Licentious, Becomes Vermin 173. 
 
 Mind Produces 40, 147. 
 " Negative, Low Rate of Vibration 14?. 
 
 Persons Connected by 113, 114, 154. 
 
 Photographs of 161, 162. 
 " Physical Body Affected by 109, 119, 258. 
 
 Poisonous, Produce Reptiles 173. 
 " Positive, High Rate of Vibration 148. 
 
 Power of 17, 113, 114, 131. 
 
 Sent in Any Direction 17. 
 
 Stinging, Produces Wasps, Mosquitos, etc. 173. 
 
 Things Are 5cx 
 
 Vibration, Chief Characteristic of 148. 
 " Will Determines Direction of 148, 149. 
 " " Intensity of 148. 
 
 " " Nature of 148. 
 
 Tobacco, Students Forbidden 187. 
 Treatment, How to Give 48. 
 
 " Received from Sun 49. 
 
 Trinity of Consciousness, Force and Substance 41. 
 Truth Always Demonstrable II, 12. 
 Tumor, Treatment of 253. 
 
INDEX. 
 
 Universal Consciousness (see Deity; Consciousness Divine), 
 Universe, Deity Manifests as 101. 
 
 " Evolution and Dissolution Alternate in 100. 
 Physical, Basis of 39. 
 
 Creation of 101 to 105. 
 " Definition of 40. 
 " Manifestation of 39, 100. 
 Unknown, Fear of the 87. 
 Unparticled Matter 37 to 39. 
 Unseen, Fear of the 87. 
 Vampirization, by Invalids 129, 130. 
 Defined 129. 
 Of Spiritualists 179, 180. 
 Of Young by Old 130. 
 Prevention of 130. 
 Vanity Analyzed 90, 91. 
 " Basic Emotion 85, 90. 
 
 " Causes Practice of Artificial Clairvoyance 184. 
 " Conquering of, Necessary 90 (see Emotion Con- 
 quering). 
 " Control of 90 to 99. 
 
 Evolution Greatly Retarded by 91. 
 Ignorance Shown by 94. 
 " Mental Aspect of 90. 
 
 " Hard to Recognize 90. 
 Physical Aspect of 90. 
 Spiritual Aspect of 91, 92. 
 
 Martyrdom Crushes Out 91. 
 Must Pass Away 92. 
 Reformers Actuated by 91. 
 Subtleness of, Makes Hard to Conquer 90. 
 " Unrecognized by Its Possessor 90, 91. 
 Vegetable Compounds in Cure of Diseases 247 to 249. 
 
 Kingdom, Animal Kingdom Supported by 248. 
 Consciousness in 35, 69, 106, 107. 
 Individualization in 69. 
 
INDEX. 
 
 Vegetable Kingdom, Mineral Kingdom Supports 248. 
 Re-embodiment in 106, 107. 
 Souls in 107. 
 
 Vermin, Licentious Thoughts Cause 173. 
 Vibration, All Is 42. 
 
 Cannot Lie 61. 
 
 Cause of Physical Phenomena 42. 
 
 " " Sensation 42. 
 Character Cause of Man's 62. 
 Disease Results from Law 242. 
 Disk to Register 131. 
 " High and Low 129. 
 " Instruments Made to Measure 131, 132. 
 of Color 42. 
 
 " Diamond and Glass Compared 243. 
 " Man 62. 
 " Sound 41. 
 " Thought Forces 66. 
 " Water Raised 35. 
 Power Results from High 46. 
 Produces Form and Color 121 to 125. 
 Sun 49. 
 
 Sympathetic 219. 
 
 " Thought Causes 62, in, 130, 131, 148. 
 Visible Part of Mind 36. 
 Von Reichenbach, Karl 126. 
 Wachmeister, Countess 203, 204. 
 Wasps, Produced by Biting Thoughts 173. 
 Wealth (see Opulence). 
 White, Abnormality Indicated by 132. 
 Will Awakening of, Our Great Object 83. 
 " Clairvoyance by Effort of 184, 185. 
 " Cultivation of 149. 
 " Desire Is Weaker Than 84. 
 " Determines Direction of Thought 148, i-do. 
 " " Intensity " " 148. 
 
 Nature " " 148. 
 
INDEX. xlvii 
 
 Will Domination of 209. 
 " Exercise of 92. 
 Force of the 149. 
 Free, Justice Limits 114. 
 
 Man Has 112, 114, 119. 
 " Hypnotism and 197 to 199, 215. 
 
 Broken by 215. 
 
 Positive Side of Subjective Mind 83, 84, 148. 
 Self-control and 92, 93. 
 Wilmans, Mrs. Helen 269, 270. 
 Wines, Students Forbidden 187. 
 Wisdom, Color of 237. 
 
 " Demand Highest, of Deity 99. 
 " How Acquired 50. 
 Wood, Henry 212. 
 Work, Defined 262. 
 
 " Deity Does, in Each Cosmic Day, 262. 
 Everyone Must, Who Progresses 262. 
 " Mental, Included by 262, 263, 283. 
 Workers, Classes of, Defined 263, 264. 
 
 Mental, Conscious Users of the Law 264 to 268. 
 " Mind Used by 264. 
 
 Opulence Gained by 264. 
 " Physical Lower Than 263, 268. 
 " Success Obtained by 262 to 270. 
 Physical, Defined 263. 
 
 Mental Are Higher Than 263, 268. 
 Opulence Never Manifests in 264. 
 Physico-Mental, Mind Used by 263. 
 
 Opulence Gained by 264. 
 Students Among 268, 269. 
 Worlds, Creation of 103 to 105. 
 
 " Death of 105. 
 X-Ray, Shade of Green Force 224. 
 
xlviii INDEX. 
 
 Yellow Cosmic Force, Difficult to See 132, 133. 
 " " " Divine Harmony 237. 
 
 " Highest Force on Earth 237. 
 " " " Intuition Is 237. 
 
 " Love is 157, 158. 
 
 " " " Love, Spiritual and Creative 237. 
 
 " " Spirituality gained from 138, 237. 
 
 " Sun Gives Forth 49. 
 " User of, Can Do Anything 238. 
 " " " Wisdom Is 237. 
 
 Yoga, Mental and Physical 144. 
 Youth Restored Consciously 119. 
 Zanoni, Seeker After Knowledge 169. 
 Zodiacal Lights, Cosmic Forces 225. 
 Zones on Subjective Side of Life no, in, 174, 175- 
 
From Incarnation to Re-incarnation 
 
 By RICHARD INGALESE and ISABELLA INGALESE 
 
 Is an advanced course of lectures on Occult Philosophy and the 
 Science of Mind. These teachings describe both the construction 
 of the Universe and the method of man's physical, mental and 
 spiritual evolution. The nature of each lecture is partially indi- 
 cated by its title and by the sub-heads it contains. The table of 
 contents is as follows : 
 
 1. THE RELATION OF SEX. The Positive and Negative aspects of 
 
 the Universal Principle Attraction and Repulsion in Lower Forms 
 of Life -Sex in Organized Life The Law of Sex Relation The 
 Result of the Abuses of the Law. 
 
 2. MARRIAGE. Prostitution Celibacy Chastity Sacramental Un- 
 
 ion and its esoteric basis Contractual Union Rights and Obliga- 
 tions of each party to the Union Result of Marital Relations upon 
 Individuals and upon Races. 
 
 3. PARENTHOOD.- Attraction of Incarnating Ego to Parents Con- 
 
 ception Building the Body Heredity The Incarnation of the 
 Ego -Real and Mistaken Duties of Parents "Race Suicide" versus 
 Parental Slavery. 
 
 4. PHYSICAL AND PSYCHIC DEVELOPMENT. "A Sound Mind in 
 
 a Sound Body" -Exercise Breathing and Yoga Imprudent Psy- 
 chic Development The Inner Senses Mistaken Ideas Concerning 
 Spirituality. 
 
 5 MENTAL AND SPIRITUAL DEVELOPMENT. The Nature of 
 Mind Will and Desire Development of the Objective Mind Of 
 the Subjective Mind Misconceptions and Limitations of "Spiritual 
 Growth 5 ' Ethics Morality Conscience How to Develop Clair- 
 voyance or Seership. 
 
 6. FOCUSING FORCES. Generation of Power-Its Use and Misuse- 
 
 Aids to Mental Creation Exercises in Concentration. 
 
 7. MENTAL REPULSION.-Vibration -Friends and Enemies-Har- 
 
 mony and Disharmony Pessimism Causes of Failure in Demon- 
 strating -Retrogression -Destruction. 
 
 8. MENTAL ATTRACTION. Vibration-The Subjective Mind-Op- 
 
 timism Progression The Law of Success Evolution 
 
 9. DEATH. Transition Physical Immortality Process of Death- 
 
 Cremation "Second Death" Mourning for the Dead. 
 10. AFTER DEATH. Purgatory-Hell-Heavens or Homes of the 
 Soul Post Mortem Occupations and Recreations. 
 
 Cloth, 326 pp. including an index, price $2.00 post paid. 
 
 THE OCCULT BOOK CONCERN 
 
 Publishers 
 9-15 Murray Street, New York 
 
LINKED LIVES 
 
 A Tale of Yesterday and To-day 
 By ISABELLA INGALESE 
 
 THIS is a story of the Law of Justice. It is a graphic pre- 
 sentation of the truth expressed by Saint Paul when he 
 wrote: "Be not deceived; God is not mocked; for what- 
 soever a man soweth, that shall he also reap." 
 
 The necessity of a book of this kind is shown by the disbe- 
 lief of many persons in the Law of Compensation, which is 
 partially reflected in the following conflicting press reviews of 
 the work. 
 
 "Linked Lives" is a really fasci- 
 nating story ; it is written in ex- 
 cellent modern style and deals 
 with powerful issues in a powerful 
 way. Boston Ideas. 
 
 The note the author strikes is 
 that of the evolution of the indi- 
 vidual soul. The story is well 
 told. New York Ethical Record. 
 
 From its pages we may learn 
 how much happier our develop- 
 ment would progress if we had 
 faith in the inner guidance. 
 
 Boston Occult Review. 
 
 The story is filled with dramatic 
 incidents. Its characters are true 
 to \\te.-Christian Herald. 
 
 This is a story of modern life as 
 it is not, with a touch of the ghost- 
 ly super added. * * It seems rather 
 unfair and unnecessary. 
 
 New York Times. 
 
 This is a story constructed for the 
 sole purpose of elaborating a 
 theory. Saint Paul Pioneer Press. 
 
 The narrative is founded entirely 
 on the doctrines expressed by 
 those who profess faith in Occult 
 Sciences. Chicago Tribune. 
 
 An impossible story. 
 
 Los Angeles Herald. 
 
 Cloth in Green and Gold, 235 pp. Price, $1.50 post paid 
 
 THE OCCULT BOOK CONCERN 
 
 Publishers 
 9-15 Murray Street, New York 
 
MATA THE MAGICIAN 
 
 By ISABELLA INGALESE 
 
 Is not an ordinary or conventional novel. It is written for the 
 
 purpose of bringing lovers of fiction into an entirely 
 
 new line of thought. 
 
 'T^HIS is an era of spiritual and intellectual progress and tremendous 
 
 J. development of the human mind. All thinking men and women 
 
 are beginning earnestly to desire a wider knowledge of the powers 
 
 and possibilities latent within them, and this book is calculated to throw 
 
 much light on the problem of individual growth. 
 
 The story explains the operation of the vibratory law underlying all 
 phenomena, and while it instructs it also entertains its readers with 
 many strange and ludicrous characters and situations. 
 
 The author, Isabella Ingalese, has had exceptional opportunities to 
 study Occultism, having been a pupil of both Eastern and Western 
 teachers of the mystic sciences. In this story she describes phenomena 
 that she has witnessed, and then explains them so lucidly and scientifi- 
 cally as to rob them of the characterization "occult" or ''supernatural." 
 She gives the key with which to unlock many of the ancient mysteries 
 and points out the path to greater wisdom. 
 
 The pure and lofty character of the heroine though ideal is so 
 natural as to stimulate emulation and raise womanhood to a higher plane. 
 
 The story is written in plain, choice English. It is devoid of all met- 
 aphysical, occult, and Oriental terms and abstractions, and is of absorb- 
 ing interest throughout. "MATA THE MAGICIAN" marks a new era in 
 romantic literature. 
 
 Following is a list of the chapters : 
 1. A New Patient. 16. The Theater. 
 
 8. Magician or Lunatic ? 17. The Woman's Dress Reform. 
 
 3. A Contract of Marriage. 18. Passing Away. 
 
 4. Dust to Dust. 19. Little Mata. 
 
 5. A Lying Cannibal. 30. Clairvoyance. 
 
 6. Mrs. Smythe. 21. The Music Teacher. 
 
 7. Sealed Instructions. 22. The Thirtieth of November. 
 
 8. At Death's Door. 23. The Governess. 
 
 9. The Magic Fluid. 24. The Plague. 
 
 10. My Mother. 25. Occult Philosophy. 
 
 11. The Hon. John Brunt, Attorney- 26. On the Defensive. 
 
 at-Layr. 27. Angel or Demon ? 
 
 12. The Smythes' Last Appeal. 28. "The Devil." 
 
 18. The Mysterious Stranger. 29. The Railway Accident. 
 
 14. Mata. 30. Conchision. 
 
 15. Our "At Home" 
 
 Cloth, 12mo, Daintily Produced, $1.50 post paid 
 
 THE OCCULT BOOK CONCERN 
 
 Publishers 
 9-15 Murray Street, New York 
 
UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY 
 BERKELEY 
 
 Return to desk from which borrowed. 
 This book is DUE on the last date stamped below. 
 
 MAY 28 1948 
 
 2QJan'50J R 
 UMar'SOBG 
 
 OEC 21953LU 
 4 30ct'55GB 
 
 
 JAN 1 6' 1957 
 6Sar'57LS 
 
 ' ,;- * 
 
 2Dec'57JZ 
 REC'D L,D 
 
 JAN 1 5 '.- :: 
 
 I 
 
 LD21 - 100m - 9 ' 47(A5702sl6)476 
 
 REC'D 
 
 J^3. 1962 
 
 RECEIVED BY 
 
 APR 251981 
 
 CIRCULATION DE>T. 
 
YC 31964 
 
 UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY